JP2022060474A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having improved discharge of game balls from a game area.

SOLUTION: A downward ball streaming unit 150 is configured to have a section where game balls discharged from a game area may be visually recognized, thus a player may confirm how the game balls are discharged from the game area by visually staring the game balls flowing downward at the section. Thereby, the discharge of the game balls from the game area may be improved. Herein, the discharge of the game balls from the game area refers to all modes where the game balls are discharged from the game area. For example, applied are a mode where the game balls are discharged through a prize port and a mode where the game balls are discharged through an out-port which provides no prize balls.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a gaming machine in which the base plate constituting the gaming area is composed of plywood (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-80178

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming ball from the gaming area. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the ejection of gaming balls from the gaming area.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a gaming area and a flow-down means for flowing down a game ball discharged from the gaming area, and the flow-down means is discharged from the gaming area. A section is provided so that the game ball can be visually recognized.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is arranged so that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can pass through the gaming machine according to claim 1, and gives a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the gaming ball. The first component unit is provided with a profit-giving means that can be configured, and the flow-down means is configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side closer to the profit-giving means on the upper side of the profit-giving means, and a first component thereof. It is provided with a second component which is arranged on the downstream side of the component and is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side away from the profit-giving means on the upper side of the profit-giving means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the attention means formed inside the gaming area and the frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means. The flow-down means is configured to flow down the gaming ball to the inward side of the frame means in front view.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the discharge of the gaming ball from the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the flow path of the discharged gaming ball can be made appropriate.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the discharged gaming ball can be easily put into the player's field of view.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in line XIIa-XIIA of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and an operating unit in the XIV-XIV line of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement control device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement control device. (A) is a rear view of the contact member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in the line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a firing effect unit. (A) is a side view of the first light irradiation device in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 25. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and a launching unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of FIG. 36 (b). (A) is a plan view of the front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of a rear transmission member, a transmission arm member, and a lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of. It is a front perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a directing member. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a directing member. It is a front view of the function plate part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of the function plate part. It is a front view of the function plate part. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the effect member. It is a rear view of a directing member. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction view of the arrow LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction view of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 75 (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect member in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lateral slide member. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7. It is a perspective view of the wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of the path forming member of a wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIb-LXXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. It is a partial front enlargement view of the 1st decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit in the third embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and a launching unit according to a sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the substrate box in 7th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a board box. (A) is a front view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a rear perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover in the direction of arrow CXa of FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover in the direction of arrow CXb of FIG. 109. (A) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main control device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 112 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in the partial CXIII. (A) is a front view of the main control device in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), and (b) is a side view of the main control device in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114 (a). (C) is a side view of the main control device in the direction view of the arrow CXIVc of FIG. 114 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box in a state where the key is operated in the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box in a state where the key is operated in the on position. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box in the arrow CXVIa direction view of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box in the arrow CXVIb direction view of FIG. 115 (b). be. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. It is a figure. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of FIG. 115 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. It is a figure. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121 (a). (A) is a front view of the substrate box according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the substrate box in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of a pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back surface side (or front surface side).

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate which is provided with a rotating shaft at the lower end portion and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate is the game area and the first. By closing the space between the two winning openings 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) visible through the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, above. The middle and bottom three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

It should be noted that the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, left or right or below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 in the front view, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the front view of the first winning opening 64, or may be on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the game area.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second by "left-handed". You can also aim for the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that the first winning opening 64 cannot be aimed at by "right-handed", and the ball fired by "left-handed" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding a game property that changes the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 640.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a are provided in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening / closing drive and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. ..

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5 and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. In FIGS. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The rear case 510 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning convex portion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened to.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, window portion 60a opened in base plate 60 (see FIG. 90) can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 composed of a shape, a ball flow unit 150 configured to allow a ball discharged from a game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) launched toward the front side of a third symbol display device 81. It is configured by assembling a firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral edge portion is arranged and fixed facing the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the player can easily see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even when the ball flow-down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so that the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 can be visually recognized. .. In the present embodiment, the ball flow unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect of the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, a sticker member having low light transmission (or light transmission) may be attached.

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The firing effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 for partitioning the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is centered. It is possible to fire toward the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible to effectively make the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86 visually recognize the granular member 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the inner left and right portions of the rear case 510. Equipped with.

Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged at the position above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged at the left and right positions of the opening 511a on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, respectively. First, an outline of the operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. Note that FIG. 7 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 8 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the overhanging state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state. In FIG. 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the enlarged state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 10, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the effect standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect upper end state are illustrated. In FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state, and the displacement rotation on the right side. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the effect.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap each other in the front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state from the effect standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state can be executably controlled on condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 can be controlled. By controlling the state change from the effect standby state executably on the condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 overlap in a front view. Can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved (the front-rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be capable of downward displacement with the effect members 700 collectively arranged in one place, and is in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after the downward displacement. The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the above position, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognizable in the front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), are displaced ascending in a state of being collectively arranged at one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

The state change shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured so that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the effect standby state in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along the path curve S1 set by the mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc portion S1a having an arc shape centered on each center point C1 and an advancing / retreating path portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc portion S1a to the left, right, outside, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, while the right side. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

Therefore, when the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is controlled to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 11, the lateral slide member 840 is as if the third symbol display device 81. The player can visually recognize the player as if the player is rotationally displaced around the center point C1 arranged near the center.

That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of the effect of the effect using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the line XIIa-XIIA of FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 on the XIIIa-XIIIa line, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 on the XIV-XIV line of FIG.

Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the state in which the game board 13 is assembled to the front side of the operation unit 500 is shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 (see FIG. 2).

Further, FIGS. 12 (a) and 13 (a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12 (b) and 13 (b), the granular member 320 is launched and scattered. An example of the state is illustrated.

In the effect standby state shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the central portion of the collective arrangement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged above the section member 310 of the launch effect unit 300, and the section member is arranged. Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is visibly configured through 310.

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the effect member 700 is arranged close to the partition member 310 of the launch effect unit 300 and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is invisiblely shielded.

Since the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partition member 310, the launch effect unit 300 is set so as to execute the operation effect of firing the granular member 320 on the partition member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is launched by a path that ascends and inclines toward the front. , It is struck against the front wall portion of the partition member 310, and rises while bouncing within the range formed by the partition member 310.

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it were coming toward one's own side, so that the attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

Further, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the constituent members arranged in the game area such as the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) can be arranged. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of placement.

In other words, as a standby position of the granular member 320 to be launched toward the partition member 310 of the present embodiment, a position directly below the partition member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the firing effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the guide path for flowing the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. It becomes difficult, and there is a possibility that it will be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the partition member 310 at the frontmost position and arranging the standby position of the granular member 320 diagonally rearward, it is possible to secure a space on the back side of the first winning opening 64. The guide path of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first winning opening 64 cannot be freely arranged.

When the control to launch the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 12 (a), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the granular member 320 and the third symbol display device 81 scattered inside the partition member 310. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that is three-dimensionally displaced.

When the control to launch the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13 (a), as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the granular member 320 is scattered inside the partition member 310 and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It can be shown to the player in combination with the changes. In this case, for example, by matching the timing of scattering of the granular member 320 with the timing of displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 is on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 whose state changes. It is possible to visually recognize how the elements are scattered, and it is possible to enhance the power of the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

Here, as a method of producing the effect together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be considered.

However, as in the present embodiment, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is considered that the display is difficult to show and it is difficult to effectively produce the display.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partition member 310 that forms a range in which the granular member 320 that produces an operation in accordance with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult to show the granular member 320 to the player.

Further, by forming the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the case where the granular member 320 is made of a large member.

Therefore, even when most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be improved.

Further, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

That is, the displacement rotation unit 800 is in a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and is arranged in the same manner as the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (effect standby state, see FIG. 7). Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed depending on the state in which the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower end state of the effect, the upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11), the state can be changed according to the state. , The effect of combining the scattered granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 for visual recognition, and the effect of combining the scattered granular member 320 and the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 for visual recognition are executed. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can effectively produce the effect by scattering the granular member 320 according to the displacement of the mode in which the effect member 700 is dispersed, but the displacement rotation unit 800 can rotate. By scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the rotation of the pinnate member 854 arranged in the pinnate member 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the pinnate member 854 (the pinnate member 854 is so large that the air flow is generated). It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing it in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. Can also be used for.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the firing effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit There is a possibility of collision with 800.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advance / retreat path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid a collision between the launch effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the injection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 can be set. In addition to improving the degree of freedom of setting, it is configured to be able to be displaced upward beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the space between the effect member 700 and the section member 310 is arranged to such an extent that a space can be secured between the effect member 700 and the section member 310. Not considered. Therefore, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range during transportation so that the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 are not arranged in close proximity to each other.

It will be described back to FIG. The operating unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510. The displacement regulating device 180 is configured so that the state can be changed by manual operation from the back surface of the rear case 510, and regulates the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state to the downward displacement in the regulated state.

By adopting the displacement regulating device 180, even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped or transported.

More specifically, conventionally, the cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) is packed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. As a result, it may be possible to prevent the movable accessory from being displaced at the time of shipment or transportation. However, when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no penetration point for removing the cushioning material, so that the game board 13 and the back case 510 If the cushioning material is not disassembled, the cushioning material cannot be removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure, the displacement forming device 180 is adopted in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be changed between the regulated state of restricting the ascending / descending displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the deregulated state in which the regulation is released without releasing the fixing of the game board 13 and the rear case 510. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15 (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15 (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15 (c) is a front perspective of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a figure.

Note that FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) show the displacement regulating device 180 in the deregulated state, and FIG. 15 (c) shows the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state. As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the displacement regulating device 180 switches between the regulated state and the deregulated state by the cylindrical portion 183d appearing and disappearing from the contact member 181. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to extend to the inside of the rear case 510 and engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, which will be described in detail later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18A is a rear view of the contact member 181. 18 (b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18 (c) is a front view of the operation member 183.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 has a contact member 181 arranged in contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6) and a contact member arranged on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guide member 182, and an arrangement between the operation member 183 and the contact member 181. The operation member 181 is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 that is configured to be able to apply a urging force toward the back surface side.

As the operating member 183 is formed from a long, substantially elliptical shape on the left and right in the rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 that accommodate the operating member 183 also have a long, substantially elliptical shape on the left and right in the rear view. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right when viewed from the rear.

The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and for holding the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the back side. The wall portion is extended, and the insertion hole 181a is formed at the left and right ends and the fastening portion protruding from the rear case 510 is inserted, and the coil spring 184 is a double tubular shape that can be arranged in the gap on the back surface. It includes a tubular holding portion 181b projecting to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183.

The guide member 182 is an elliptical annular body extending in the front-rear direction along the outer circumference of the contact member 181 and a screw into which a fastening screw screwed into a fastening portion inserted into the insertion hole 181a is inserted. The insertion portion 182b, the fastening portion 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the abutting member 181 is screwed, the retaining portion 182d protruding inward in the radial direction at the rear end of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. It is provided with a ridge 182e projecting inward in the radial direction in the upper and lower inner portions in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 and can be held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled is limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side (the side covered by the back case 510) of the contact member 182. Therefore, when the displacement regulating device 180 is attached to the rear case 510, the fastening screw cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the rear case 510.

Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the rear case 510 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 182b from the rear side of the guide member 182, the rear side of the rear case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). It can be easily touched in (see), making it easy to remove the displacement limiting device 180 from the rear case 510.

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape in which the rear view outer shape is formed in an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 and the front side is opened, and the front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. A flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the center, a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d projecting cylindrically from the center of the bottom of the main body portion 183a to the front side, and a cylinder thereof. A position where the arc-shaped ridge portion 183e projecting to the front side in an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 around the portion 183d and the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181 can be engaged. It is provided with an engaging portion 183f which is projected from the above and is capable of constructing a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An oval-shaped sticker is attached to the back surface of the plate of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one end in the lateral direction (see FIG. 15A), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent mistakes in vertical posture during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operation member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by abutting with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

The flange portion 183b is formed larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 in the rear view, whereby the operating member 183 can be prevented from falling out of the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the abutting member 181 and the guide member 182.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the ridge 182e of the guide member 182, and has a role of smoothly performing the front-back displacement of the operation member 183. In the present embodiment, the ridges 182e are formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side, and the groove portions 183c are also formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side. This makes it possible to prevent erroneous assembly of the operating member 183 by mistake.

The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion inserted through the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be inserted into the central opening of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. In a state where the cylindrical portion 183d projects from the central opening of the abutting member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to regulate the vertical displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be shared by both the portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is arranged to face the large diameter side tubular portion of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped ridge portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portions, so that the load generation area can be increased and the load generation area can be increased locally. It is possible to prevent a load from being generated.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is formed not in a circular shape but in an arc shape in which the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 183f from being too far apart from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

The state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is urged to the back side by a coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed toward the front side against this urging force, it is composed of an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time the latch mechanism is pushed in at the minimum stroke or more on which the latch mechanism acts, the above-mentioned restricted state and the restricted state are switched alternately.

As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operating member 183 is the minimum described above by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10 not only when the operating member 183 is intentionally operated. If the displacement is increased by the stroke, the displacement regulating device 180 may unintentionally change its state.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is unintentionally changed due to an impact at the time of shipment or vibration during transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state (effect member 700). Is placed at the upper displacement end). When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13) and receives an impact at the time of shipment or vibration during transportation, the effect member 700 causes the effect member 700 to launch the partition member of the effect unit 300. There is a risk of collision with the 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (eccentric to the right) away from the position (center position) where the urging force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member is arranged. The gap between the groove 183c of the 183 and the ridge 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the posture of the operating member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operating member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement in which the operating member 183 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operating unit 500 will be described. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 is open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500, with FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). Is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the XXIa-XXIa line of FIG. 20.

Note that FIG. 21 (a) illustrates the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21 (b) illustrates the deregulated state of the displacement regulating device 180.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening / closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the operator can reach out by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is configured to be touched. Since this position is on the opposite side of the side (opening / closing tip side, right side) where the worker who works by opening the inner frame 12 enters, the worker unintentionally displaces the displacement regulating device when the inner frame 12 is opened. It is possible to avoid touching 180.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the above-mentioned latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load for pushing the operating member 183 is used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but also for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side portion moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side portion may not be sufficiently pushed in.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to push the forming portion of the latch mechanism pinpoint to cause the displacement required for the displacement regulating device 180, and the displacement is displaced. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulating device 180.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to restrict the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform the operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism with a pinpoint.

Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed occurs in a mode in which the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed to the pushing side. Therefore, as the pushing amount increases, the pushing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to regulate the displacement of the transmission gear 650. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction centered on the front-rear axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (front-rear direction) are orthogonal to each other, the operation member 183 applies a load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It is possible to prevent receiving. As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated even if the forming portion of the latch mechanism is not rigidly configured.

As described above, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state, the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained. Therefore, the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the time of transportation. For example, after installation in a gaming machine store, maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state at the time of maintenance.

That is, when the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 during the maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement control device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding with each other. Can be done.

If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched to the deregulated state by pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180. (See FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement regulating device 180 is released from the regulation by looking into the open tip side (right side). Explain that it is configured so that it can be confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 21A, in the restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged in front of the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the direction is viewed from the right side. The operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the state of deregulation of the displacement regulating device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged so as to project from the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 to the rear side. In the directional view looking from the right side, the operation member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

Therefore, as a confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, but the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly with respect to the outer frame 11. It can be confirmed that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the deregulated state by visually recognizing that the operating member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 in the direction view when the operation member 183 is opened and viewed from the right side.

In this embodiment, since the back case 510 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and the operating member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, the visibility of the operating member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case where the power is turned on with the cylindrical portion 183d inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A) will be described. .. In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the scaling unit 600 does not change its state during the operation when the power is introduced. It is determined from the output of, and the position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

By showing this position detection error display to the clerk of the gaming machine store, it is possible to make them aware that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not be changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued by using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement / reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. Can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, the operating member 183 is configured to be inoperable to be pushed in while the power is turned on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation member 183 may be configured to be operable even while the power is turned on.

Further, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the push-in operation may be disabled due to the friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the plate of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in the front-rear direction to limit the displacement of the operating member 183.

As a different situation, an example of a case where the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a gaming machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 coincides with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front-rear direction.

For example, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 8) during maintenance, the displacement regulating device 180 changes to the regulated state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, when the driving force is generated after the maintenance and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by displaying an error (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. It is possible to notify the clerk of the gaming machine store that this is the case, but the details will be described later.

Thereby, even if a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is not separately provided, the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted to determine the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

The operation of the displacement regulating device 180 can be performed before or after assembling the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 to the inner frame 12, so if possible, displacement regulation before assembling to the inner frame 12. It is preferable to operate the device 180.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. These effect devices will be described in order from the launch effect unit 300.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the firing effect unit 300, the partition member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of superimposing the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 on the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161.

Since the partition member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can visually recognize the range surrounded by the center frame 86. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of superimposing and visually recognizing the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular member 320.

FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. In FIGS. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 is a partition member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open lower side, and a partition thereof. A plurality of granular members 320 displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged in a manner of closing the lower open portion so that the granular member 320 does not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partition member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-shaped portion arranged in the foreground and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And, the bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged to face the back side of the front plate portion 311 and has a closing wall extending to the front side from the left and right and the upper part of the bottom plate portion so as to close the gap. The back compartment 313 and the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) that is integrally formed below the back compartment 313 and is formed between the front plate portion 311 and the back compartment 313 are communicated with each other. It is provided with a back surface section lower portion 314 in which a path can be configured between the curved plate portion 312 and a modified penetrating portion 315 formed through the back surface section lower portion 314.

The size of the partition member 310 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the front view of the partition member 310 are about the same. It is formed so as to be. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed so as to have substantially the same shape.

As a result, the constituent member for hiding the edge portion of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for the purpose of hiding the edge portion of the partition member 310. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the edge of the partition member 310 is visually recognized so as to overlap the display by the third symbol display device 81 while reducing the number of members. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the display device 81 is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 are scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 is very large for a powerful effect. There will be a lot of need. Therefore, it is possible to perform a powerful effect by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with a high density by forming the space as a narrow space to some extent.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is secured to be about the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear compartment lower portion 314. Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and sudden deceleration at the time of injection.

Further, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the rear compartment lower portion 314 than the left and right central portions 312b, the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b is compared with the movement path of the granular member 320 in the vicinity of the left and right central portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 in the above can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is ejected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement paths of the granular member 320 can be concentrated in the vicinity of the left and right central portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is the internal space IE1. It can be easily reached near the central part. This makes it easier for the player to see the granular member 320.

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize the granular member 320 as if it exploded and scattered in all directions from the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, so that the operation effect of the granular member 320 is powerful. Can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion for receiving the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 ejected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the back surface side and downward toward the center of the left and right sides.

As a result, regardless of where the granular member 320 is arranged in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 that is downwardly displaced by its own weight can be displaced downward on the back surface side while being moved toward the left and right center side.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the curved plate portion 312 in the left and right portions 312a is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right center side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the back surface side. As a result, as the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, the displacement toward the left-right center side can be generated in preference to the displacement toward the back surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400 described later, the granular members 320 try to be displaced toward the back surface all at once at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of the downward displacement. Can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination of the curved plate portion 312 toward the back surface side in the left and right central portions 312b is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central sides of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. This makes it easy to prevent the granular members 320 from congesting in the middle of the flow.

On the other hand, in the rear compartment lower part 314, the plate portion arranged to face the back side of the curved plate portion 312 is about the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape having an inclination angle of a mode in which the distance from the left and right central portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large).

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the lower portion 314 of the back surface section with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (slightly larger) the inclination angle of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 with respect to the vertical direction in the displacement direction.

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the lower surface section 314 is the same regardless of the injection direction of the granular member 320 that can change from side to side, so that the resistance given to the granular member 320 from the lower surface section 314 is almost uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which a lid member 480 can be inserted, and has a short portion extending vertically at both left and right ends and a long portion extending vertically curved in a manner connecting the upper ends of the short portions. To prepare for. The penetrating direction is formed so as to be inclined diagonally upward from the back side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the lower portion 314 of the back section (see FIG. 12A). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the lower portion 314 of the back surface section (the lower portion of the deformed penetrating portion 315 in FIG. 12A) constituting the deformed penetrating portion 315 is not arranged to face the injection direction of the granular member 320.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the acute-angled portion when the granular member 320 is ejected, so that it is possible to avoid a local load on the granular member 320 and the lower portion 314 of the back surface section, and the granular member 320 can be prevented from being subjected to a local load. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the lower portion 314 of the back surface section from being cracked or chipped.

The granular member 320 has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons) from a resin material that is relatively flexible (at least more flexible than the resin material that forms the partition member 310), as shown enlarged in FIGS. 24 and 25. It is a 32-sided body composed of a regular hexagon and a quasi-regular polyhedron), and has a non-penetrating recess 321 which is recessed along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

The non-penetrating recess 321 makes it possible to reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and to deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the shape center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased to the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. ..

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received on the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, it is possible to easily avoid damage or chipping of the granular member 320. .. Further, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when the load is received from the injection device 400 and the injection is performed, the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed is made to collide with the front plate portion 311. Can be done. As a result, the load at the time of collision with the front plate portion 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixing plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back compartment portion 313, an illuminated substrate 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the illuminated substrate 332. It is provided with a lid portion 333 which is arranged on the right side and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 331 so as to be able to accommodate the illuminated substrate 332 between the fixed plate portion 331 and the fixed plate portion 331.

The illuminated substrate 332 is provided with light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmission, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portions 332a. As a result, the light can be visually recognized as being divided into granules.

Of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 332, the light emitted to the right side illuminates the right path (right-handed channel) of the game area in which the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. It serves as one purpose. The light emitted to the left side will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmission (or light opaque), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation parts 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as the light divided into granules, and the illuminated substrate 332 has the fixed plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 332a. It is shielded by the light and can be avoided from being visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixing plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back compartment portion 313, an illuminated substrate 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixing plate portion 341, and the illuminated substrate 342. It is provided with a lid portion 343 arranged on the left side, fastened to and fixed to the fixing plate portion 341, and formed so as to accommodate the illuminated substrate 342 between the fixing plate portion 341 and the fixing plate portion 341.

The fixing plate portion 341 is formed of a resin material having low light transmission (or light transmission impervious), while the lid portion 343 is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the illuminated substrate 342 can be seen when visually recognized from the left direction, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is long overhanging to the left. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and it is possible to prevent the left side surface of the illuminated substrate 342 from being visually recognized from the front view.

This makes it possible to irradiate light through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the visible illumination substrate 342.

The illuminated substrate 342 is provided with light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides. Light having an optical axis pointing in the forward direction is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side portion of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left side path of the game area.

Here, it is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, that is different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the illumination substrate 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area. The game is played by left-handed, and the game is played by right-handed during probabilistic change, time saving, and jackpot game). This will be described below.

Since the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the flow path of the ball on the left side of the gaming area, the firing intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball flows down on the desired path during normal gaming. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity in the left side portion of the game area is set too high, the visibility of the ball deteriorates, which hinders the adjustment of the firing intensity of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when launching a ball to the right side of the game area, the player basically launches the ball with the maximum firing intensity. The momentum of the fired ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, the degree of freedom in selecting the flow path of the ball on the downstream side thereof is significantly reduced, and the ball follows the same path exclusively.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed with a width through which one ball passes on the downstream side of the second winning opening 640, and enters the second winning opening 640. All the balls that did not hit pass through the guide path DL1 and head toward the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

In this way, since it is not necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball deteriorates in the right side portion of the game area (particularly, the place where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game is hindered. Since it is unlikely to occur, it is possible to perform an effect with high emission intensity in this range.

Due to such circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the illuminated substrate 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation unit 332a is arranged so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illuminated substrate 342 arranged on the left side is arranged. Then, the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective light emission effect while suppressing the occurrence of dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis pointing to the right is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as granularly divided light, and the illuminated substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. It can be avoided to be visually recognized. The object illuminated by the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface will be described later.

26 (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, and FIG. 26 (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 25. It is a figure. In FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiation unit 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 has an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310 and light on the back side of the partition member 310. It is equipped with an LED through which the shaft passes.

As a result, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also the light is emitted to other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is possible to execute the effect of irradiating.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 does not have an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and has a back side of the partition member 310. It is composed only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310, the irradiation intensity of light toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 or displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 310 is increased. Can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, the comfort of the game in the normal state can be improved by suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310. That is, in the game in the normal state, the line of sight of the player is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning opening 64. Often looking at the area to the left of the center of the game area.

In this case, when the inside of the partition member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position as close to the front as the game area, so that it is backlit for the player who visually recognizes the left side of the game area. Therefore, there is a risk that the visibility of the game area will deteriorate for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is moved toward the back side, and the game area and the light irradiation unit 342a are separated from each other. Can reduce the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 with high intensity while reducing the degree of illuminating the game area. You can perform the production. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect of illuminating the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the back side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertical substrate unit 167 described later that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the light irradiation unit 342a from being incident on the light guide plate 161 and perform the light emission effect. Therefore, the light effect performed by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 are illuminated. It can be separated from the production.

When the light guide plate 161 is adopted as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the irradiation path of light, which may reduce the effect of the effect. In particular, since the light emitted around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) easily illuminates the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which causes a decrease in the degree of freedom in production. Was there.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to avoid the light guide plate 161 and travel, the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the light emission effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 24 and 25. The injection device 400 is a device that is disposed below the partition member 310 and on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 rides on the injection device 400.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. In addition, FIG. 28 and FIG. 31 show the configuration of the injection device 400 as an outline, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the front side. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the back surface side. Further, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 is fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24) as a member to be fixed, and is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 that can form a space that can accommodate other movable members between the fixing member 350 and an electrical wiring or transmission arm member 470 that is fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360, which will be described later. It is provided with a limiting member 370 that limits the displacement in the front-rear direction, and an intermediate member 401 that is disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed in the central portion.

The fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). The base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350 so that the screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. This prevents the fixing member 350 from being accidentally removed from the partition member 310 and the granular member 320 being discharged from the fixing member 310 while the launching unit 300 is attached to the game board 13. be able to.

The injection device 400 is configured so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front surface side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted and linearly displaceable as a member displaceably arranged between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350. The linear motion member 410, and the collision member 420 which is arranged above the linear motion member 410 and is displaceably supported along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 and has an arch-shaped collision surface at the upper part. A contact member 430, which is arranged under the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change the state between a state in which contact is possible and a state in which contact is not possible in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, is provided.

The injection device 400 is formed so as to be able to transmit a load to the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 as a member displaceably arranged between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is rotatable to the space forming member 360. The front transmission member 440, which is pivotally supported and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface, and the drive that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. It includes a gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 that is arranged on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

The injection device 400 is rotatably supported by a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 as a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and is pivotally supported from the rear transmission member 460. It includes a transmission arm member 470 that can be displaced by action, and a lid member 480 that is pivotally supported and displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 with a straight line pointing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis.

The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360. Within the arrangement range divided in this way, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range in which the drive gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is generated in the front side range and the rear side. By transmitting to each of the ranges of, displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

From such a design concept, openings for driving force transmission are bored in the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 drilled in the shape of a keyhole, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 drilled in the shape of a lemon (substantially elliptical shape).

Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the front range and the rear range. , The details of the configuration of the intermediate range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

First, the front range will be focused on. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 has the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side in a columnar shape, and the columnar protrusions 403 thereof. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper end is supported, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged at symmetrical positions so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 can be fixed, and a columnar protrusion toward the front side near the lower end. The support column portion 405 is provided, and the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed on the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed so as to be shorter than the distance between the columnar protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always urged by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the urging force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged diagonally below the linear motion member 410, with the aim of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 tends to accumulate.

The linear motion member 410 includes the above-mentioned claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted, and a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 projecting from the upper end portion in the center of the left and right in a trapezoidal shape. A linear ridge 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower ridge portion formed as a ridge shorter than the ridge 414 on the lower side of the ridge 414. It includes a 415 and a displacement regulating portion 416 projecting from the lower end portion in the center of the left and right toward the front side.

The trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal protrusion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal protrusion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. To.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive a load from other components during load transmission, and the details will be described later.

The displacement regulating portion 416 is a portion that abuts with the cushioning member 352 of the fixing member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by this abutment (the ascending side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 is a flat plate extending parallel to the displaced plane of the linear motion member 410 from the curved plate portion 421 forming the arch-shaped collision surface and the rear end portion of the curved plate portion 421. The plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 drilled in an elongated hole shape extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 at the lower ends of the left and right center portions of the plate portion 422. It is provided with a cushioning member 424 fixed at a position where it is arranged to face each other and arranged so as to be in contact with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413.

A columnar protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423. That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is also used as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 may be damaged or chipped. It can be suppressed.

The abutting member 430 is formed in the shape of a substantially triangular long plate, and has a support hole 431 formed at one end of the long plate as a circular opening through which a support pillar portion 405 can be inserted, and the other end of the long plate. A projecting portion 432 projecting to the back surface side with a circular cross section, and a hook-shaped projecting portion 433 projecting to the front side in a hook shape at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting portion 432. Be prepared.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support pillar portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support pillar portion 405 so as to be rotatable and displaceable.

The projecting portion 432 and the uncinate process portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members during load transmission, and details thereof will be described later.

The fixing member 350 can accept the motor fixing portion 351 in which the above-mentioned drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, the cushioning member 352 arranged so as to be in contact with the displacement regulating portion 416, and the tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses and having a fastening screw inserted from the front side into a through hole inside the recess and screwed into a female screw formed in a circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed. It is provided with a guide portion 354 that guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24), which is composed of an inclined surface in a mode of shrinking from the front side and three directions of left and right.

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement regulating portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of damage or chipping of the displacement regulating portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the cushioning members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the displacement end in the urging direction. As a result, as will be described later, even in a displacement mode in which the linear motion member 410 is displaced ascending at high speed due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load received by the linear motion member 410 at the time of sudden stoppage. Can be absorbed by deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release the connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connecting recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). It is configured so that it cannot be done.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened while the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled. Can be done.

Next, the explanation will be given focusing on the range on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-mentioned opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape from a substantially central position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a back portion. Upper end position of the face plate portion A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending to the front side at the left and right end portions, and arranged below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right projecting support portions 364 projecting from the back plate portion to the front side and a lid member 480 formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right ends and arranged on the same line are formed in a size capable of axial support. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 to generate an urging force toward the side where the lid member 480 is retracted, and a columnar protrusion on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. It is provided with a columnar protrusion 366 to be formed.

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. Along with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. This wall portion can cover the internal front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surface of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the flowing granular member 320 is on the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

The protrusion support portion 364 is formed so that the tip of the protrusion is in contact with the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. On this flush surface, the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 are supported in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The shape of the support pillar portion 365 is different on the left and right. That is, on the right side, it is formed in the shape of a small-diameter cylinder that protrudes toward the left and right outside, and on the left side, it is formed in the shape of a cylinder having an inner diameter that can accept the tubular portion of the left cover member 489.

The columnar protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw having a large diameter to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is a long member formed in a shape substantially in the shape of an appearance, and is formed with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 366, and the support for inserting the columnar protrusion 366. The hole 471, the columnar protrusion 472 projecting parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 471 from one end in the elongated direction toward the front side, and the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the elongated direction are orthogonal to each other. It is provided with a transmission protrusion 473 that is projected in a columnar shape along a plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 passes through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and projects to the front side, and is formed so as to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 changes as the posture of the rear transmission member 460 changes, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes, but the details will be described later.

A limiting member 370 is arranged on the back surface side of the columnar protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and presses the covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the columnar protrusion 472 from the back surface side and the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back surface side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the columnar protrusion 472 to the back surface side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, and thus it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from being disengaged from the rear transmission member 460. can.

The presser claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing the electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the back side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electric wiring from shaking (for example, the arrangement of the electric wiring is changed due to vibration or the like), and it is possible to secure the entry path of other constituent members. Therefore, as described above, the injection is performed. The lateral slide member 840 and the pinnate member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced by a path including a position close to the device 400.

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 and transmits a driving force to the lid member 480.

The lid member 480 is a member configured so as to be able to advance and retreat in and out of the partition member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310, and the advancing and retreating portion formed in the shape of a curved plate. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from the left and right ends of the advancing / retreating portion 481, and a plurality of extending plate portions 485 that are received coaxially with the support column portion 365 at the extending end portion. 486, a transmission hole 487 that is drilled in a curved elongated hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left side and through which a transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape that surrounds the reception portion 486 on the right side. It is formed in the shape of a disk with a portion, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support pillar portion 365 is inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486. The right cover member 488 is prevented from coming off, and the left cover member 489 has a cylindrical portion inserted into the receiving portion 486 on the left side and a long hole-shaped portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487.

The left cover member 489 is not formed like a drill hole along the axial direction, but is formed with functionally formed contact surfaces 489a to 489c, which will be described in detail later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured to go toward the axis, it is not simply a shape in which the pipe is divided, but the radius and formation length of the arc are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be described.

First, the advancing / retreating portion 481 includes an overhanging portion 482 that travels to the approach side at the center position on the left and right. The overhanging portion 482 is formed so that the overhanging width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end face on the approach side is formed so as to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another constituent member (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, a load directed to the left and right outward with respect to the constituent member. Can be given, and the constituent members can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured so as to be able to enter the partition member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, and the overhanging portion 482 precedes the partition. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center positions where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the positional deviation that may occur at the portion where the irregular penetration portion 315 begins to enter (the center of the left and right of the overhanging portion 482), so that the advance / retreat portion 481 cannot enter the irregular penetration portion 315. Can be suppressed.

Thirdly, the arc radius is lengthened in the vicinity of the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retreating portion 481 as opposed to the left / right center position of the overhanging portion 482. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays closer to the left and right outside due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

This way of staying is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may be non-uniform on the left and right. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, the unevenly stayed granular members 320 may collide with the advancing / retreating portion 481. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is lengthened in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where many granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, the distance between the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 can be secured sufficiently long in advance, so that even if the method of staying of the granular member 320 becomes non-uniform, the granular member 320 and the advancing / retreating portion 481 You can avoid collisions.

Explain other design concepts. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the approach side is formed recessed toward the retracting side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the extending plate portion 485 from colliding with the stagnant granular member 320.

In addition, even when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the approach side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 is still provided with the concave forming portion of the extending plate portion 485 and the curvature of the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be collected on the upper part of the collision member 420 by being configured to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The receiving portion 486 has a different shape on the left and right. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular tubular shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape), which is designed in consideration of assembly.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 28 and 31. Since the support pillar portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction particularly on the right side, the lid member 480 is supported when both the receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular tubular shape. It is necessary to divide the advancing / retreating portion 481 in order to assemble it to the pillar portion 365.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the lid member 480 can be moved back and forth on the partition member 310, while the granular member 320 can be prevented from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the deformed penetrating portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed penetrating portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to the extent that it cannot pass through the deformed penetrating portion 315, advance / retreat displacement becomes impossible, so accuracy is required for the shape. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by connecting a plurality of members, the shape may be deformed due to factors such as an assembly error.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is different on the left and right so that the advance / retreat portion 481 does not need to be divided. In the assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the outer side (left side) in the axial direction of the support pillar portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving portion 486a while being inserted into the support pillar portion 365. As a result, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support pillar portion 365.

At this time, in the right receiving portion 486b, the support pillar portion 365 is arranged to face each other on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extension plate portion 485 by inserting a fastening screw through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing it into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

After that, if the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction and is supported by the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support pillar portion 365 so as not to fall off, the lid member 480 is spaced. It can be rotatably supported with respect to the forming member 360.

With reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described. In FIGS. 34 to 36, the displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are shown in chronological order.

34 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 34 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 34 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of FIG. 34 (b).

35 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 35 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b).

36 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 36 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 36 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of FIG. 36 (b).

In FIGS. 35 and 36, a process is shown in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side. In detail, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the approach side end within the displacement range, and FIG. 34 shows the lid member 480 at the retracted end within the displacement range. The arranged state is shown, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at an intermediate position in the displacement range is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel to each other. More specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane shown in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane shown in FIG. 34B). ) Is orthogonal.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 that comes into contact with the left cover member 489 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the elongated direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34 (a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts at the position closer to the right side of the left cover member 489 (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts over the width direction of the left cover member 489. Be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c) and 36 (c), the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponds to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed so that the left cover member 489 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can come into contact with each other in the left-right width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 is compared with the first contact surface 489a that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a thereof. The second contact surface 489b, which is formed to have a small inclination in the left-right direction, and the lid member 480, which is formed to have a small inclination in the left-right direction as compared with the second contact surface 489b, are arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. A third contact surface 489c that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in the state is provided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left cover member 489 in the shape of the upper side surface of the opening in the left-right direction is gradually reduced as it approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480 with the first contact surface 489a as the maximum. Designed to.

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination of the left cover member 489 at the contact position with the upper side surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be secured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is in the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489) at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing when the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity. Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area responsible for the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the approach side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489), so that the transmission protrusion In addition to the small contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximum, which may cause an overload on the transmission protrusion 473. be.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the ratio of the weight of the lid member 480 loaded on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the advancing / retreating portion 481 occupying most of the weight of the lid member 480 is the rotation shaft of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the approach side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the urging force of the torsion spring SP2, at least the urging force is at least. A part can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is compared with the case where most of the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. Can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation shaft O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, the distance between the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the position on the retracting side to the position on the approach side is the lid. It is configured to be the longest when the member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side.

In addition, in the first contact surface 489a, the normal at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 in the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 becomes an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to be along (the inclination angle becomes small), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can be generated along an arc.

As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, so that the load required to rotate the lid member 480 is reduced. can do.

As a device for the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove portion 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove portion 473a along the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side to the back side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b) and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right sides. Will be done. Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the overhanging portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center side in the left-right direction.

The radius of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the center position on the left and right is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotating shaft O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overhanging portion 482 having the maximum approach width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 slightly over-rotates (to the extent that it is caused by a design error for each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding with each other and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, the description will be given focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, the front transmission member 440 and the rear side are fixed as the drive gear 450 rotates. The transmission member 460 is integrally rotated about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction in the front view (front view of the transmission member 440 side view) will be described as a forward rotation.

The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are configured to secure relative positions and rigidity with respect to each other on the sides facing each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite surfaces. The shape portion is formed. The details of the shaped portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28. .. The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front transmission member 440 projects axially on the central side of the substantially disk-shaped main body plate portion 441 and the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove is formed inside the main body plate portion 441. A groove forming portion 442 to be recessed, a support hole 443 which is a circular opening formed in a center portion of the main body plate portion 441 so as to allow a shaft portion 362 to be inserted, and a gear formed in the main body plate portion 441. The flange portion 444 that is overlaid on the teeth, the detected portion 445 that extends radially outward from the flange portion 444 and is formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and the groove formation. A transmission protrusion 446 is provided so as to project parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric with respect to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442.

In the groove forming portion 442, a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 is recessed so that the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is such that the front transmission member 440 rotates in a forward direction with the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b to which the projecting portion 432 is guided and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a diameter larger than the reference arc of the first groove portion 442a. A third groove portion 442c formed along the above, and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a are provided.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller formation angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is rapid. Designed to be.

The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove portion 446a formed linearly along the protrusion direction connecting the central portion and one point on the outer diameter side. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when the load is input from the direction orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the groove portion 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 has a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the main body plate portion 461 thereof. A groove forming portion 462 in which a groove is recessed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 462, and a shaft portion 362 formed at the center of the main body plate portion 461 with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the base side outer diameter of the shaft portion 362. It is provided with a non-contact opening portion 463 formed so as to avoid contact with the above.

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a in which the groove portion to be recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and is expanded in the radial direction in a range not functioning as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjusting portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as an integral body, and the weight portion 461a is arranged and modified for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity to the shape of a rotation axis. The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. ..

The groove forming portion 462 is recessed with a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the columnar protrusion 472 so that the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is formed by the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the first groove portion 462a formed along the first arc shape and the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 are arranged in the first groove portion 462a. The second groove portion 462b to which the columnar protrusion 472 is guided by rotating in the forward direction (clockwise rotation in the rear view) and the first groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. It includes a third groove portion 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove portion 462d connecting the third groove portion 462c and the first groove portion 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger formation angle range (about 180 degrees) than the second groove portion 462b, and the groove and the non-contact open portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. It is designed so that the change in distance between them is slow.

Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. In FIGS. 38, 39, 40 and 41, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. Further, for easy understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a schematic diagram to the extent that the change in length can be grasped.

In FIGS. 38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows the effect standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. 40 shows the injection standby state. The launch standby state, which is the state of waiting for the launch timing of the device 400, is shown, and FIG. 41 shows the launch state, which is the state immediately after the injection device 400 executes the launch effect. Note that FIG. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, but immediately after this, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the linear motion member 410, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the displacement on the approach side will be described as an effect standby state (see FIG. 39) of the injection device 400.

In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, and the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged below the granular member 320.

In the launch standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended so that the columnar protrusion 403 comes into contact with the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. .. In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the columnar protrusion 403 is a guide hole. It stops at the position where it comes into contact with the lower inner surface of 423. After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward due to its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG. 38.

The flow of the granular member 320 that is bounced off and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being moved to the left and right center side by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, so that the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixing member 350 and the collision member 420. The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the above is set to be shallow.

Therefore, in terms of shape, it may not be possible to receive the plurality of granular members 320 in a biased manner. In the present embodiment, the partition member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be biasedly received.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of granular members 320 start to return to the right side of the collision member 420 in a biased manner, when the granular member 320 returns after that, the granular member 320 that has returned earlier causes the collision member 420 to return. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side portion, the granular member 320 that has returned later flows to the left side along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner of flowing on the granular member 320.

As a result, the left-right bias of the granular member 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias (difference in scattering mode) of the arrangement of the granular member 320 in each firing effect is reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged at a position in the middle of the displacement section, and the lower linear motion member 410 is one point with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413. It is just in contact with. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the columnar protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. That is, it is permissible to change the posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one of the columnar protrusions 403.

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420 in a biased manner, the collision member 420 changes its posture in such a manner that the right side portion is lowered as compared with the left side portion. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right side.

Therefore, it becomes easy to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left and right center positions of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 coincide with each other in front view, and the furnishing left-right center position of the guide portion 354 is set. It is considered that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right is almost uniformly distributed to the left or right depending on the difference in the contact points between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

On the other hand, when the posture of the collision member 420 is changed, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left and right center positions of the guide portion 354, and the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right side, and flows down the furnishing left and right center positions of the guide portion 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left side along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421. As a result, it becomes easy for the granular member 320 that has returned later to flow down to the side where the accumulated granular member 320 is small, so that the granular member 320 can be easily distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the posture change of the collision member 420 is not always allowed as well. For example, in the launch standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper ends of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower ends of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is restricted, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is an urging force generated by a pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the elongated direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easy to stabilize.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the collision member 420 from the launch standby state to the launch state. As a result, when the retention state of the granular member 320 (bias of the number of grains to the left and right) is the same, it is possible to stabilize the scattering method of the granular member 320 which is scattered by receiving a load from the collision member 420.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular member 320 scatters and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. It returns to the upper surface of, and returns to the production standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for making this state change feasible will be described in detail below.

42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the front transmission member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. It is a plan view of 440.

In FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the outer shapes are shown. Except for the parts related to mutual load transmission, the ridges 414 and lower ridges 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430, and the uncinate process. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown. Is illustrated without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) accompanying the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440. ) Changes in arrangement are shown in chronological order. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 is shown. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected by the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting the change from the state in which the unit 445 is not arranged to the state in which the detected unit 445 is inserted, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42B illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the protrusion 414 of the linear movement member 410 and starts pushing down the linear movement member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, between FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, so that direct load transmission between the members is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration and the load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be shut off.

FIG. 42 (c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally lowered and displaced. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , Can be indirectly transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, the load generated by the collision of the granular member 320 with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410, which is a transmission point where the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the transmission member 440. It is a direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotation displacement of the transmission member 440.

The effect on the forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, an effect that causes the speed that is driven and controlled as a rotational displacement to differ from the actual speed, and an effect that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat are exemplified.

In FIG. 42 (d), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 starts to tilt is shown. Will be done.

The contact member 430 is a member whose posture changes according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442 without being given an urging force by other urging means. From FIG. 42 (d), the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is the direction of displacement by its own weight. Therefore, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 has little change from the state before FIG. 42 (d) in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

FIG. 42 (e) illustrates the arrangement of each constituent member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), in the state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 42 (f), the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 is completely tilted is shown. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is used. Is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (the posture change is prevented).

Therefore, with respect to the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, the contact is as compared with the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are in contact with each other at a speed in the opposite direction. The aspect can be softened.

In FIG. 43 (a), a diagram in the same state as in FIG. 42 (f) is shown for ease of understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), the linear motion member 410 is displaced ascending as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 and the contact member. The arrangement of each constituent member in the state where the uncinate process 433 of the 430 starts to come into contact with the 430 is illustrated.

The state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the launch standby state (see, for example, FIG. 40).

The lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate process portion 433 are provided with an overhanging portion that projects toward the side facing each other at the tip portions on the sides facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent slippage from occurring at the contact position between the lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate process portion 433, and the lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate process portion 433 can be stably contacted with each other. Can be touched.

In the state shown in FIG. 43B, the terminal position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected unit 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and the switching of this state is switched to the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). It is output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected by the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting the switch from the state in which the unit 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected unit 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, it is controlled to determine that the injection device 400 has shifted to the launch standby state. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43B, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the contact member 430. A urging force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load in the direction of erecting the contact member 430 is applied to the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 is a protrusion. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is regulated by being hindered by the groove forming portion 442.

The contact between the protrusion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is a contact between a circularly curved surface (outer surface of the protrusion 432) and an arcuate surface (inner surface of the third groove 442c). The load generated at that time goes toward the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load given from the protrusion 432 is on the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and it is possible to regulate the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

Therefore, in the launch standby state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) can be maintained even after the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, for example, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must always be energized in the launch standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. Can be improved.

This is, for example, a limitation on the setting of the length of the display effect from the launch standby state to the launch state when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect in the third symbol display device 81. Is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

In FIG. 43 (c), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 starts to stand up is shown. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that abuts on the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove forming portion 442c, so that the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is transmitted to the front side. It will deviate from the rotation axis of the member 440.

Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the launch standby state, the drive motor MT1 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is necessary to turn off the power.

In FIG. 43 (d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retracts from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the restriction on the ascending displacement of the linear motion member 410 is lifted. , The arrangement of each constituent member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is upwardly displaced by the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is bounced upward is shown. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the abutting member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). .. On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410. The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the abutting member 430 in the upright direction.

In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are both. Since they are configured in the same direction in the standing direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a manner of assisting each other.

In FIG. 43 (e), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 is completely upright is shown. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that abuts on the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440 The effect on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, since the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d), FIG. 43 (d). ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction of erecting the contact member 430 in the subsequent displacement will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement of the contact member 430 in an upright position may hinder the rotation of the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a, and from the contact member 430 via the projecting portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to be directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being hindered by the displacement in which the contact member 430 stands upright.

When the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e) and it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to be stopped, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state, and the state change shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of emission effects. The control program shown in FIG. 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the injection device 400, the launch execution control for rotating the front transmission member 440 once in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that rises due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 in the firing state, and the granular member 320 is scattered.

Since this effect scatters the granular member 320 into the player's field of view, it is flashy and can improve the player's attention. For example, it takes a few minutes without the player knowing whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if it is a big hit, the player can improve the interest of the player by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular member 320 to produce the effect.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is off), performing an effect of scattering the granular member 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a big hit, which is not preferable.

In addition, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the state does not shift to the firing state (in the case of disconnection), the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 will result in a long reach during execution, resulting in a big hit. It becomes possible for the player to grasp whether the player is out of the question or not, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of disengagement, after the injection device 400 is put into the launch standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction to control the injection device 400. It is configured to be able to return to the production standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, by driving and controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction of counterclockwise rotation (clockwise) of the front transmission member 440 from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), each component member is displaced in the reverse direction of the above time series. Can be made to.

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42 (e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 into contact with the contact member 430. (See FIG. 42 (f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing when releasing the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430.

Further, after FIG. 42 (e), the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in the auxiliary direction, it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In this case, the ascending displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not a momentary one based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linearly moving member 410 from bouncing off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in an effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) without performing the effect of scattering the granular member 320. Can be restored to.

In order to obtain the state shown in FIG. 42A after the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, the detection sensor SC4 The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction until it is detected that the detection groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

As a result, both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for not scattering the granular member 320 can be executed with the same preparatory operation associated with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to produce a big hit or a miss in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of success or failure due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the launch standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized to temporarily eliminate the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. .. This makes it difficult to grasp from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction, as compared with the case where the drive direction is switched from the state where the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven. ..

Therefore, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the hit / miss notification timing in the production, and even if a drive sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the drive direction, so that the situation where the player can grasp the hit / miss result is avoided. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the hit / miss notification timing without risking the player to grasp the hit / fail result by the drive sound, so that the drive motor MT1 in the launch standby state can be started. It is possible to give a range to the stop timing. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the launch state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in the state sufficiently before the launch state, the subsequent production is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates against control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28.

In FIG. 44, there is a change in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component” in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460. Illustrated in chronological order. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

In FIG. 44 (a), the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480. Is placed at the displacement end position on the approach side.

Since the lid member 480 receives an urging force from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) toward the retracting side, a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is generated. By being transmitted to the rear transmission member 460, there is a risk of affecting the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44A, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 abuts on the third groove portion 462c of the groove forming portion 462 and passes through the contact point. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, since the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface are in contact with each other, the load generated by the contact is directed toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, since the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 goes toward the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is rearward. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44 (b), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44 (c), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this urging force moves the columnar protrusion 472 upward. Since it works in the direction of displacement to, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 also works to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470.

In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 given via the lid member 480 are set. Since both are configured to be the same in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a manner of assisting each other.

In FIG. 44 (d), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44 (d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in a non-contact manner.

As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the lid member 480 to the approach side, and it is possible to alleviate the degree of accumulation of fatigue on the transmission arm member 470. ..

In FIG. 44 (e), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), the launch standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is configured. From the launch standby state to the launch state, the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side so as to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44 (f), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is the state after the firing effect is executed, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 (for example). e) See). Therefore, the amount of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) distributed to the front transmission member 440 can be very small.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the displacement direction of the lid member 480 is a direction that opposes the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Since most of the above can be used as a driving force for rotating other constituent members that come into contact with the rear transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be secured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. In FIG. 45, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described in FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown. Is illustrated without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the ascending side (for example, in the effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction to transmit the front side. The state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 abuts on the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit is set in the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, whereas in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, the drive can be performed continuously. When the displacement angle exceeds the permissible angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and the continuous drive beyond that is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven in a state where the displacement is regulated, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control is limited to the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. Although damage to the drive motor MT1 is avoided by providing the above, details will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

It should be noted that FIG. 46 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

Further, in FIG. 46, a guideline for the rotation angle of the forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42 (a) and 44 (a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (d), and so on. 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (c). 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (e).

Further, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (d). 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are described on the horizontal axis with the effect standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and the above-mentioned constituent members corresponding to the angles are shown. The state change in is described. The arrangement change of each configuration by the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the arrangement change of each configuration by the drive control in the reverse rotation corresponds to the left direction in FIG. Respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced ascending by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) is determined. It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced ascending. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of the ascending displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

Since the collision member 420 has already risen after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted in the middle (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. However, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted from reverse rotation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees) when the power is turned on again. That is, when the detected unit 445 is not arranged on the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

This rotation causes the injection device 400 to return to the effect standby state at one end, and then to control the execution of each effect. This prevents the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 from being unintentionally restricted and the drive motor MT1 from generating heat after the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is arranged from the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed that stabilizes.

For example, if the arrangement is stable in 2 seconds from the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation), so that the granules in the middle of the flow flow. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is bitten by the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

The rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4 times speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the approach side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the lid member 480 can be completely displaced before the granular member 320 is arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

In this state, by stopping the drive in the effect standby state, the granular member 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular member 320 is collected toward the left and right center sides along the shape of the lid member 480. Can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retracted side, and the collision member 420 Get on top.

In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 so as to be different, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each launch execution control. Therefore, for example, by forming the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the granular member 320 to be launched (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be different. , The effect of production can be improved.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. Next, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 show the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes an effect member 700 configured to be able to move up and down at the center position in the left-right direction and to produce light emission, and hemispherical illumination fixedly arranged on the left and right sides thereof. A device 613 is provided.

By performing a light emission effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player to perform an effect of making the player visually brilliantly visible. be able to.

FIG. 51 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is shown in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611 in the assembled state, but in FIGS. 51 and 52, For convenience, it is arranged on the back side of the rear plate portion 611.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has a left-right long main body member 601 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and the front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 arranged on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by a cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a geared relationship, and an intermediate between the upper arm member 620 and the upper arm member 620. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a portion and change their posture with the rotation of the upper arm member 620, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601 and the drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. The transmission gear 650, which is combined and rotatably engaged with the left upper arm member 620 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and is rotatably supported by the main body member 601 and the annular portion are assembled to the main body member 601. It includes a torsion spring SP3 that loads an ascending urging force on the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of a long left and right plate, and is a guide hole 602 which is a pair of left and right elongated holes arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of guide holes 602 projecting from a symmetrical position in a columnar shape in both front and rear directions. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as the central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side portion to the back surface side in a cylindrical shape. An arc-shaped hole 606 drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 on the back side in a posture toward the columnar shaft portion 605 side. It includes a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole for guiding the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 projecting to the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620. The upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large diameter at the head into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 projecting from the back surface side is inserted into the winding main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by an overhanging portion 601a protruding from the back side of the main body member 601 in a dogleg shape, and the other arm is pressed by the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the applied portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction of upward displacement of the connecting portion 623.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back surface side of the main body member 601. As a result, the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged with each other.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. A screw having a large diameter at the head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, so that the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. By screwing a screw having a large head diameter into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to fall off.

The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove through which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is arranged at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, or is arranged at another position. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is done.

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member formed of a resin material having low light transmission property and fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. The front plate portion 612, which is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions and is formed so as to project to the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 to enable light emission. The hemispherical lighting device 613 is provided.

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the back side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, projecting to the back side with a dimension slightly longer than the front-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacting the main body member 601 on the surface. The overhanging contact portion 611a in contact is provided.

As a result, it is possible to stabilize the fastened state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 and to displace the upper arm member 620 in the space separated by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. can. In other words, the posture change of the upper arm member 620 (for example, the posture change that bends with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. ..

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 so that the structural portion of these members is not visible to the player, and is a main body member 601. A pair of left and right sliding surfaces 612a formed as a plane parallel to the front plate portion of the above, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opened to the back surface side in the plate portion protruding from the left upper end portion toward the back surface. It is provided with a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and the pressing member PC1 formed from its shape and material with low friction is configured as a slidable flat surface. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the long direction is a flat plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

The shape of the pressing member PC1 on the side facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact is a point contact. It is configured to be. As a result, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side exceeds the allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. Displacement.

In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set by the dimensional relationship between the back side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side is set so that the effect member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts on the pressing member PC1 and limits the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, so that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 becomes the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent contact.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although it is formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 may be formed in a plane shape, and the shape in the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed so as to be limited to the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portions project to the back side (the design portion on the front side is). It may be configured so as to project to the back side due to the influence of being arranged closer to the back side), or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may be configured to have the same planar shape as in the left side portion of the present embodiment. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the columnar protrusion 654. Forward displacement is regulated by the fastening screws that are fixed. That is, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 in addition to limiting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front, it is possible to avoid a large load locally.

The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for electrical wiring through which the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630 is passed. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612b, through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the effect member 700.

In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electric wiring to the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction with the displacement. (In the present embodiment, even in the case of displacing a distance of about half the left-right width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the electrical wiring is loosened and hangs downward.

The hemispherical lighting device 613 is a device provided with a hemispherical lens member and for irradiating the light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back surface side thereof to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. .. In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward on the center side in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier for the player to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 as compared with the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 points in the front-rear direction. can. For example, it is easy to put light into the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or it is easy to notice the light by irradiating the effect member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state. Can be done.

The upper arm member 620 has a support hole 621 that is formed in the shape of a long plate and is formed as a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted through the upper arm member 620. , A gear portion 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and configured to be meshed with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circle at the end in the long direction. As a long hole having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, which is formed only on the connecting portion 623 configured to allow the cylindrical protrusion 631 of the above to be inserted and the upper arm member 620 on the left side. It includes a transmission hole 624 to be formed, and an urged portion 625 projecting from the back surface side of the upper arm member 620 and having a hook-shaped tip portion.

The transmission hole 624 has a margin extending continuously from one end of the transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. A unit 624b and the like.

The transmission unit 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the driving force transmission, which will be described in detail later.

The urging portion 625 is a portion where one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the urging force in the direction of ascending and displacementing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the urging portion 625 is increased. The arm member 620 receives.

Further, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 to the front can be regulated by the engagement between the hook-shaped portion at the tip of the applied portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is formed substantially symmetrically from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed, and is formed in a columnar shape from an intermediate position in the long direction to the back side. The columnar protrusion 631 and the columnar protrusion 632 projecting in a columnar shape from the left and right outer positions to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction at the left and right inner positions with respect to the columnar protrusion 631. A support hole 633 formed in a circular shape and a plurality of arcuate holes 634 formed through a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw having a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is on the back side of the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632. By screwing in a screw having a large diameter from the head, the lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off.

The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 described later, the wall thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. As a result, when the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at a thick portion, so that it is effective for the effect member 700 to change its posture to a forward leaning posture. Can be regulated to.

Further, the lower arm member 630 on the left side has an arrangement portion 635 formed open to the back side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the long direction of the arm body, and the back surface of the arrangement portion 635. It is provided with a thin-walled lid portion 636 which is arranged on the side and functions as a lid of the arrangement portion 635.

The arranging portion 635 includes a base end side through hole 635a formed in the front-rear direction at the columnar protrusion 632 side end portion.

The base end side through hole 635a is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side and is guided to the arrangement portion 635, and exits from the arrangement portion 635 to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630.

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the long direction of the lower arm member 630, and the lower meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is formed deeply on the back side in the effect standby state. Will be done. In other words, the upper side is formed as a thin plate portion with the tangent line as the boundary.

The lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the lower arm member 630 on the right side. Further, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes an upper side wall portion of the arrangement portion 635 in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, is configured to be able to guide electrical wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid in the guide path. The thin-walled lid portion 636 is fastened and fixed to be reinforced.

Since the electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636) and is guided to the effect member 700 side, the members arranged before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, for example). It is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electrical wiring. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from being entangled or rubbed with these members and damaging the electrical wiring.

The lower arm member 630 includes a pressing member PC1 composed of the same member and assembled from the back side, in addition to the above-mentioned pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the front-rear direction via the pressing member PC1. It should be noted that the main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact with each other but have a slight gap, and when the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the back surface, they are in contact with each other to limit the displacement. It functions in the same manner as in the case of the pressing member PC1 on the front side.

That is, the lower arm member 630 is configured so that the pressing member PC1 is assembled on both front and rear sides and can come into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and easily reduce the resistance generated due to the ascending / descending displacement when the displacement is limited.

The tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side to the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the back side end portion of the upper arm member 620. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced toward the back surface to the extent that it abuts on the main body member 601 it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from abutting on the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connecting position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are front and rear. Since the position is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semi-circular main body 651 formed in a substantially semi-circular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape on the radial outer side of the semi-circular main body 651, and a semi-circular main body. A support hole 653 is formed through the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651 as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted, and a cylindrical shape is projected from the outer diameter end of the semicircular main body portion 651 to the front side. A cylindrical protrusion 654, a plate-shaped detected plate portion 655 formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end of the semicircular main body portion 651, and the detected plate portion thereof. It includes a thickened portion 656 thickened and formed between the 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 on the support hole 653 side in the front-rear direction.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in a state of being meshed with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The columnar protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the columnar protrusion 654. The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a fastening screw having a large head diameter is attached to the female screw portion formed at the tip of the protrusion of the columnar protrusion 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions that are configured to be engageable with the above-mentioned displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). By arranging the regulated hole 657 on the support hole 653 side (position closer to the support hole 653), the transmission gear 650 is changed to the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). It is configured to reduce the transmitted load (moment).

Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickening portion 656 is set as a place where it is necessary to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced by forming the portion where the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall.

FIG. 53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a back exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. , A rotary plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-shaped main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the functional plate portion 720, and between the rotary plate portion 730 and the functional plate portion 720. A telescopic displacement member 740 that is arranged and configured to enable displacement similar to that of a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotary plate 730, and a drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 of the functional plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 to execute a light emitting effect, and a light emitting effect device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the tips of a plurality of telescopic displacement members 740, respectively, in an effect standby state. A plurality of shielding design members 760 combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 projecting from symmetrical positions on the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions thereof. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 protruding from the arcuate position centered on 711 to the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions. A through hole 713 formed in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged under the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressing arranged on the back surface of the plate. A member PC1 is provided.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring DK1 guided to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630 between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin-walled lid portion 630 through the lower arm member 630 to the front side. .. In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with other members or is visually recognized by the player.

In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed of an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the wiring guide member 714 is formed with the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. It also has a function to soften the contact of.

That is, the upper side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced ascending, and the effect member 700 is displaced to the back side. Even so, when the wiring guide member 714 comes into contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the ascending displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is slidably arranged with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in the present embodiment, in the process of ascending displacement of the effect member 700, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower end can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. By configuring the above, it is possible to divide the position where the load is generated for maintaining the posture of the effect member 700.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is formed in a substantially plate shape from a resin material, and has a tubular portion 721 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the back surface in the central portion and is formed through the inside of the cylinder, and a central shaft of the tubular portion 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 formed along a coaxial arc shape, a sensor arranging portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. With respect to the motor fixing portion 724 which has a large opening and is formed so that the drive motor MT3 can be fastened and fixed, the radial elongated hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial elongated hole 725a. A plurality of guide holes 725 (five sets in this embodiment) composed of a pair of crossed elongated holes 725b intersecting at right angles, and extending radially outward on an extension of the radial elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (five locations in this embodiment) extending plate portions 726 and both ends in the width direction of the extending plate portion 726 from the back side end portion of the flat surface portion arranged at the extending base end of the extending plate portion 726. A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extension plate portions 726) and a pair of columnar protrusions that are projected from the vicinity of the end portion in the out-of-diameter direction to the back surface side. 728 and.

The tubular portion 721 is arranged so that the rear end is in contact with the plate-shaped main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710 in a state where the internal through hole communicates with the through hole 713 of the plate-shaped main body 710. Will be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side of the plate-shaped main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the back side end portion of the tubular portion 721.

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. ..

The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 which is fastened and fixed to the sensor arrangement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 which is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to project to the front side, and when the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, the rotating plate 730 The posture can be determined.

The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width in which the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 can be arranged, and is a group of through holes formed along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the tubular portion 721. A long hole-shaped long hole 725a to be formed and a long hole along a straight line orthogonal to the reference straight line of the radial long hole 725a on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the radial long hole 725a. A pair of crossed elongated holes 725b formed in the above.

The radial elongated holes 725a and the crossed elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement members 740 in the assembled arrangement state. It works, but the details will be described later.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the tip on the back surface side can come into contact with the plate-shaped main body 710. In the abutting state, the female screw formed on the tip side of the columnar projecting portion 728 is screwed into the fastening screw inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side, so that the functional plate portion 720 is a plate-shaped main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is also used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-shaped main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotary plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is formed from a resin material in a substantially disk shape, and has a cylindrical portion 731 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the front side in a central portion and is formed through the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the tubular portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 formed along a coaxial arc shape, and formed as long through holes at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. It is provided with a plurality of guide holes 733 (five locations in the present embodiment) and an extended claw portion 734 extending in a claw shape in the outer diameter direction at a position corresponding to the guide hole 733.

The tubular portion 731 is designed so that the inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the tubular portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the sensor SC7. The detected portion 731a is formed so as to be able to enter the detected groove of the above, and the gear portion 731b is formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape capable of meshing with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can secure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at a little less than about 120 degrees.

The guide holes 733 are each formed to have the same shape, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the tubular portion 731 and the center of the tubular portion 731 rather than the small-diameter arc portion 733a. It includes a large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the shaft, and a connecting portion 733c that connects the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a.

The mode of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the change in the length of the tubular portion 731 from the central axis per unit angle is formed so as to change according to the position. To. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in the length of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle in the vicinity of the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b from the central axis is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740 can be reduced, and the effect of effect can be improved by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape protruding in the clockwise direction of the front view, is configured to be engageable with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the back side in the thickness direction. The back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the back side claw portion 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are separated at a substantially intermediate position of the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front side claw portion 734b and the back side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, which have different protrusion tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740 in the front-rear direction. It guides inward in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 has a longer extending length in the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side than in the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. Is formed in. In this embodiment, the extension length is lengthened in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. This makes it possible to mitigate the effects of gravity.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 has the same shape, the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravitational direction is different, so that the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. The first guided protrusion 743b of the 740 may be arranged, and the extension claw portion 734 may fail to guide inward in the radial direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extended length of the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably executed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the upper side is displaced due to the influence of its own weight, the displacement is a displacement in the direction closer to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, so that the extension claw portion 734 is guided inward in the radial direction. Is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, but should be made shorter to reduce the material cost and reduce the size of the rotary plate 730. Can be done.

The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

58 (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are shown in a state in which one set arranged at the uppermost part of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and the shielding design member 760 is collectively arranged. In 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in the case of being discrete.

Since the telescopic displacement member 740 is a member constituting a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two front and rear layers, a plurality of the telescopic displacement members 740 arranged on the front side in the following description. The plane on which the long member can be displaced is also referred to as a front layer plane, and the plane on which a plurality of long members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as a rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is pivotally supported by a pair of proximal end side members 741 arranged in two front and rear layers and pivotally supported at the lower end portion, and by the upper end portion of the proximal end side member 741. A pair of first long members 742, a pair of second long members 743 pivotally supported at the upper ends of the first long members 742, and the upper ends of the second long members 742. A tip adjusting member 744 having a guide elongated hole 744a extending linearly so as to be guided is provided.

The base end side member 741, the first long member 742, and the second long member 743, which are composed of a pair of front and rear members, are designed so that the length and the support position in the long direction are the same as each other.

The base end side member 741 has a transmitted protrusion 741a projecting in a columnar shape from the lower end portion of the member on the rear plane side to the back surface side and a circle from the back surface to the front surface side on which the columnar protrusion 741a is projected. A guided protrusion 741b that is projected in a columnar shape and inserted into a member on the front surface plane side, and a lower end portion of the first long member 742 that is projected in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the rear layer plane side member to the front side. A guided protrusion 741c, which is inserted into a through hole formed in, is provided.

The transmitted protrusion 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730.

The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate portion 725, and are guided in the elongated direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the crossed elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first long member 742 is pivotally supported on the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the long direction, and is projected from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side to the front side in a columnar shape on the front plane. A guided protrusion 742a inserted through the upper end portion of the base end side member 741 on the side is provided.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the crossed elongated hole 725b of the functional plate portion 725, and is guided in the elongated direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

The second long member 743 is pivotally supported on the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the long direction, and is projected from the upper end of the member on the front plane side to the front side in a columnar shape. A pair of members projecting from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side to flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side with a diameter of about the width of the member, and projecting in a columnar shape from the tip of the protrusion to the front side. A support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b projecting in a columnar shape from a substantially intermediate position of a member on the rear plane side to the back side are provided.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided to the back side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load inward in the radial direction by this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The tip adjusting member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a length extending along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. It includes a pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in a hole shape, and a second guided protrusion 744b projecting in a columnar shape from a central position in the elongated direction toward the back surface side.

The protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is arranged in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front side claw portion 734b of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730. This guidance receives a load inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 57).

The shape of the tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is not circular, and the rotating plate 730 having a rotation center on the side of the projected protrusion 741a is inclined to approach the second guided protrusion 744b as the rotating plate 730 is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. A surface (the surface on the left side of FIG. 59 (b)) facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) is provided with an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly displaced in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the rotating plate 730 from becoming excessive when it comes into contact with the extended claw portion 734. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively and discretely arranged, they are arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740. Support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjusting member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the long direction) of the tip adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjusting member 744, is extended to the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended tip toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. A member having a shape portion that is inclined toward the extension and extends in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension tip. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to invisiblely shield the decorative member 752 on the back side by attaching colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet to the front and back, and at the right end portion, along the back surface of the member. It is provided with an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right in a manner in which a plate surface is formed.

Similar to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extending plate portion 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet attached to the front and back, and is arranged on the right side (clockwise direction) of the front view. It is arranged so as to face the back surface side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the back surface side, it comes into contact with the design member 760 so that the displacement can be suppressed.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be offset from the back surface side of the main body portion of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion and the extending plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the line.

This action becomes more remarkable as the arrangement of the extending plate portion 761 is separated from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least the size allowed for the shielding design member 760 as a displacement in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 come into contact with each other along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extending plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface or may be formed as a flat surface having a normal line directed in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface in a mode in which the distance from the shielding design member 760 is closer to the back surface side.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state where the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the frontal view of the uppermost shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the back side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760. Even when displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, the position in the front-rear direction of the shield design member 760 on the right side of the front view along the front inclination of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shield design member 760. The deviation can be corrected. As a result, it is possible to easily align the relative positions of the shielding design members 760 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58B, in the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760, the member that supports the right side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the rear layer plane. , The member supporting the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the intermediate portion of the pair of second long members 743 intersects in such a manner that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side portion becomes the right side portion. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily tilted in a posture arranged on the front side.

Since the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side portion is on the right side portion (the side on which the extension plate portion 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it is easy to tilt to the posture arranged on the front side.

Due to the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back surface side of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extending plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) Can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are on the left side (next to the front counterclockwise direction). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses the displacement toward the back surface side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is suppressed from being displaced to the front side by the extending plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (next to the front clockwise direction). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of the shielding design members 760 facing each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of the shielding design members 760.

The interlocking of the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. In FIGS. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the outer shape arrangement of the transmitted protrusion 741a and the guided protrusion 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is shown. Displacement.

In FIG. 60, a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58) is shown, and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. The state (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted protrusion 741a arranged in the guide hole 733 with the rotation of the rotating plate 730 is arranged as a rotating plate. By displacing the 730 in a direction close to the rotation axis side, the state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes.

In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720, so that the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter side with respect to the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be put out, but the details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an illuminated substrate 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 disposed on the front side of the illuminated substrate 751 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the illuminated substrate 751 and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting to the front side, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the drive motor MT3.

The illuminated substrate 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center thereof. Inside the opening 751a, a drive motor MT3 and an electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but the area where the LED as the light emitting means is arranged is limited. Therefore, from the viewpoint of light emission effect, the smaller the opening 751a is. desirable.

Since the LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is assembled from the front side to the light transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material and the light transmitting member 752a, and the visible surface is mirror-like (for example, silver-plated coating). The mirror surface member 752b is provided.

Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in the front view. .. As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light due to the light irradiation from another direction (for example, the light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , It is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized in the dark.

The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for ease of understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descent halfway state in which the effect member 700 descends from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the overhang state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Illustrated.

The lowering halfway state shown in FIG. 63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary position between the transmission portion 624a and the margin portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the columnar protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission unit 624a and is arranged at a position where the downward displacement of the effect member 700 can be started is regarded as the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is downwardly displaced by, for example, the effect member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) arranged in the pachinko machine 10. It is in a state of being switched according to the execution of the effect to be performed, and before the suggestion effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin portion 624b side.

As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shaped portion that is continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and is an arc-shaped hole in the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 goes toward the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated regardless of the presence or absence of energization of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51), whereby the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 connected to the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated.

Even if the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced is an effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. It is controlled to change the state to.

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 does not move downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in order to return the columnar protrusion 654 to the margin portion 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent effect related to the effect member 700 due to the difference in the drive sound of the drive motor MT2. ..

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction of raising the effect member 700. That is, in the driving mode for raising the effect member 700, the effect member 700 is already arranged at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the subsequent displacement of the columnar protrusion 654 is a margin portion. The displacement is such that it slides along 624b.

Further, no matter where the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged in the margin portion 624b, there is no difference in the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is permissible that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar protrusion 654 is low, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is displaced ascendingly is not limited to the speed, and the rotation speed can be set large. As a result, the ascending speed of the effect member 700 can be set large.

In addition, even if the ascending speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed toward the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the columnar protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated at the position where it abuts on the columnar protrusion 654.

Further, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the ascending displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) is from the effect standby state. Compared to the state in the middle of descent, the state from the state in the middle of descent to the overhanging state is set larger.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 due to the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to visually recognize the effect as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is rapidly increasing to the player, and the effect of the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 can be obtained. Can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, for ease of understanding, FIG. 65 (b) is also shown as a diagram in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are not shown.

65 (a) and 65 (b) show the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates the descending halfway state in which the effect member 700 descends from the effect standby state, and FIG. 67 shows. The overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65A, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state where the detected plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before the execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced. However, the drive motor MT2 is driven and controlled with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to the effect standby state.

On the contrary, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side where the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling so as to release the transmission gear 650, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position where the columnar protrusion 654 has entered the margin 624b even slightly from the position of the columnar protrusion 654 in the effect standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 can be stopped. , The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The position of the columnar protrusion 654 is controlled to stop the drive of the drive motor MT2 after a time delay of a sufficient time for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be arranged at the end of the margin portion 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to the position where the position of the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the end of the margin portion 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is made passable through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly displaced, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), and is a position shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is set at a position that partially overlaps the regulation hole 657.

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in to put the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state (see FIG. 15C), and then the transmission gear 650 is set. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction of upward displacement of the effect member 700 by drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) is not reached.

The MPU221 (see FIG. 4) determines the displacement defect of the transmission gear 650 because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. Can be done.

Based on this determination, an abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error display of a displacement defect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulator 180 may remain regulated.

As a result, information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be transmitted to the clerk of the gaming machine store by diverting the notification such as the error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the 700 is displaced ascending is excessive, the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, and the lower arm member 630 becomes the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), a downward acceleration is always added to the lower arm member 630. This makes it possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 Can increase the contact area when collides with the upper arm member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large load from being locally generated on the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

As described above, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced ascending is excessive. Therefore, even if the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm is restricted by the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the columnar protrusion 654 as described above. The ascending displacement of the member 630 can be regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 by the drive force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponds to the state.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 67, the effect member is similar to the state shown in FIG. The auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is arranged at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630.

Thereby, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the degree to stabilize the posture) can be changed. That is, it is possible to increase the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 in the effect standby state or the overhang state as compared with the state in the middle of descent.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotation direction is not regulated (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 is rotated in the rotation direction around the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side. Posture may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side, but in the direction of rotation about the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side. The displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side when the effect member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the effect member 700 may be visibly generated without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the effect member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation about the right columnar protrusion 711 in the overhanging state is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. As a result, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and the attitude change of the effect member 700 can be prevented to the extent that it can be discriminated.

In addition, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped hole 732 in the overhanging state, the right side is caused by the contact between the auxiliary protrusion 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, centering on the columnar protrusion 711. As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear is restricted by the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630.

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, centering on the columnar protrusion 711. As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 on the right side.

Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotation direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the tilting direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress changes in posture and changes in posture in the horizontal swing direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected only by a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but also have an auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged above the cylindrical protrusion 711 and a cylindrical protrusion 711. The lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right sides, so that the posture change of the effect member 700 in the tilting direction can be changed. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged on the upper side of the cylindrical protrusion 711 is arranged in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (on the root side of the arcuate hole 634), so that the effect member 700 is tilted. The load generated by the change in posture in the direction can be withstood by the long main body of the lower arm member 630.

Further, a pressing member PC1 is disposed on the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The displacement of the arm member 630 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

In this way, when the load due to the posture change of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the long direction, the lower arm member 630 By utilizing the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent the posture change of the effect member 700.

Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (lower) of the cylindrical protrusions 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the posture change of the arm member 630 in the lateral swing direction.

In the present embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700. In this embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the effect member 700 changes its posture in a manner of tilting forward around the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and also with the lower arm member 630. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 changes in such a manner that the effect member 700 tilts backward around the connecting portion.

That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes occur in the effect member 700, the displacement of the effect member 700 in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of which of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Because it can be done, it can respond to any change in posture.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) are arranged with a narrow front-rear distance, the effect member 700 may rub against or collide with the partition member 310. Since it can be avoided, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect member 700, deterioration of the design portion, damage to the partition member 310, deterioration of visibility due to scratches (decrease in transparency), and the like.

In the state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 comes into contact with the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive of the drive motor MT2 is continued, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced only by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In the present embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effecting member 700 from bouncing back and being displaced to the ascending side. I'm in control.

As a result, the effecting member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 to be large (for example, a size that allows the effecting member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 is started to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting the displacement to the upper side, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the drive start of the drive motor MT2), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement start.

As a result, the load applied to the drive motor MT2 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced ascendingly.

In FIGS. 65 to 67, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the inner surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is illustrated by a hidden line. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It is passed through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electric wiring DK1 that may occur due to the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electric wiring DK1 previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I try to do it. As a result, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed in the vicinity of the wiring guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed from an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load received by the electric wiring DK1 from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shaped portion of the lower arm member 630 where the arcuate hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced from the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electric wiring with respect to the electric wiring DK1. It is configured so that the DK1 can be pushed toward the wiring guide member 714.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be stably generated.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged in the arcuate hole 634 arranged on the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 and largely hidden in the thin-walled lid portion 636 is in an overhanging state. Only placed in a position visible in the rear view (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arcuate hole 634, and at the same time, is a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw (or remove) the fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. This makes it possible to improve assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency. Further, as a result of assembling and maintaining the effect member 700 in a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at a halfway position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect member 700 and other constituent members are damaged.

Next, the displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 due to the state change will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of expansion / contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

FIG. 68 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is omitted for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, the descending state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the descending state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be expanded / displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter, and the expansion / displacement member 700 is not controlled to the intermediate position. It is controlled to allow extended displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from becoming excessive in size when viewed from the front, and thus the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

The decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered) at the intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700. As the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is a light transmitting member including the position covered by the effect member 700. The 752a is arranged at a position other than the visible position.

As a result, the visibility of the light emitted from the LED or the like arranged on the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a can be improved, and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted to the shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back surface side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is not irradiated with light, the mirror surface member 752b is exposed to the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment). Can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the illuminated substrate 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b and visually recognized is mixed with the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. Can be a different color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through a portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

The control mode is not limited to any one. For example, the shielding design member 760 may be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68 and then controlled to return to the collective arrangement state, or the drive direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. By switching in small steps in the forward and reverse directions, the shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction.

When the shielding design member 760 is controlled to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 is the position of the tip adjusting member in the state of the expanded displacement to the intermediate position. It is set to the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a of 744. As a result, the tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the elongated direction of the guide slot 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such displacement can be achieved, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or when the displacement is expanded to the maximum in the radial direction, the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 Is arranged at both ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjusting member 744, so that the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 in the circumferential direction can be returned (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b)). ).

Further, the intermediate position allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or it may be a position slightly before the position where the maximum expansion displacement occurs.

Here, in a state of being expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extension plate portion 761 is visually recognized overlapping with the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other in the front view), the extension plate is present. Since the portion 761 plays a role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In the present embodiment, since the red reflective sheet is attached to the extending plate portion 761 as in the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, the red color of the extending plate portion 761 can be visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if it is, it is difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extending plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extended plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 visually recognizable may be made conspicuous in the gap between the shielding design members 760.

In the present embodiment, the case where the light transmitting member 752a is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extending plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 shields. Since it is visually recognized in red as in the design member 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the shielding design members 760 as if they are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when irradiating light from the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

70 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is not shown for ease of understanding.

70 and 71 show an overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and an enlarged state of the effect member 700. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be expandable and displaceable until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view is maximized, and the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). The device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 in a front view. Therefore, the mode in which the light is reflected on the mirror surface member 752b when the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is irradiated can be changed from the case where the effect member 700 is arranged in the middle position of the enlarged displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 so that the ground color of the mirror surface member 752b (silver in the present embodiment) can be easily seen by the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to emit light of the same color. The color of the light to be visually recognized by the player can be changed in chronological order.

More specifically, for example, in the case of irradiating white light from the illuminated substrate 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized in the vicinity of the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member is accompanied by the expansion displacement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the ground color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes easily visible at the end position of the enlarged displacement. As a result, it is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player without changing the emission color.

In this embodiment, the expansion displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the expansion displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not continuously generated in a control mode, but the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , It is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700.

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is executably controlled only in the state where the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This makes it possible to prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other constituent members such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering avoidance of collision with other constituent members and configuring so that the displacement does not cause a problem due to collision with other constituent members, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced in the middle of the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduced displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 in the arrow LXXIVb direction view of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is an upper surface of the effect member 700 in the arrow LXXVb direction view of FIG. 75 (a). It is a figure.

In FIGS. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a), the plate-shaped main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. 72 is used as a reference. As such, a state in which the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear is shown. In FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), the rotary plate 730b is not shown.

72 (a) shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effecting member 700 is dispersed at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72 (b) shows the shielding design member 760 of the effecting member 700. A state of being expanded and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is shown.

In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. 72 (b). , The transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at an intermediate position of the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts to come into contact with the claw portion 734a on the back side of the rotating plate 730, and in FIG. 74, the first guided protrusion portion 743b is arranged on the lower side. The state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided to the back side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position immediately before the collective arrangement state is shown.

Since the influence of gravity is different between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the lower side and the member arranged on the upper side. It differs depending on the member.

As shown in FIG. 73, while the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 side by their own weight, the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side rotates by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent permitted in the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted protrusion 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Therefore, the timing at which the shielding design members 760 reach the collective arrangement state is not simultaneous at five, and at least the upper three members are earlier than the lower two members.

As a result, the displacement of the effect member 700 to the collective arrangement state can be stably performed. That is, when the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collective arrangement state vigorously, so that the lower expansion / contraction displacement member When it collides with the 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates on the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature damage.

On the other hand, when the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in the collective arrangement state as in the present embodiment. Is generated in a direction in which its own weight opposes the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, so that the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to the collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed off by the claw portion 734a on the back surface side and is put into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw portion 734b.

In FIG. 75, the collective arrangement state of the effect member 700 is shown. That is, the state in which the rotating plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view is shown up to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the assembled arrangement state of the effect member 700, the surface on the central axis side of the rear side claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740. Displacement to the outside of the direction is regulated.

In addition, the surface of the front side claw portion 734b on the central axis side abuts on the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 to the outside in the radial direction is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut in the radial direction with a front-rear width in the protrusion direction, so that the second long member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744 are arranged and arranged. The posture can be stabilized.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is slidably configured on the back surface of the extending plate portion 726. In this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts on the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collective arrangement state, the more it is inclined so as to project to the front side). Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can give a load to the front side to the second guided protrusion 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, the tip of the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state. The tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extending plate portion 726.

Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from excessively increasing, the load to be sandwiched in the front-rear direction is gradually increased to the tip adjusting member 744, and the position and posture in the front-rear direction of the tip adjusting member 744 are applied. Since it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction, the shielding design member 760 can be closely arranged without any gap in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common, and the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design member 760 is also common.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is on the side where the extending plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59 (a)) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, the right side, FIG. 74). (Refer to (b)) is configured so that the posture can be easily tilted so that it is arranged on the rear side as compared with the opposite side.

This is due to the formation mode of the second long member 743, and this posture inclination also occurs in the tip adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is on the back surface as compared with the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift to the clockwise direction side (on the left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, see FIG. 74 (b)).

On the other hand, in the rotating plate 730, the extended claw portion 734 is arranged so as to face the rearward viewing clockwise direction side of the second guided protrusion 744b, and the extending claw portion 734 is arranged in the rearward viewing counterclockwise direction with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, the inner diameter side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, whereby the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise side when viewed from the rear, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position of the collective arrangement of the effect member 700.

The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. 75. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the effect member 700 shown in time series from FIGS. 72 to 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). The posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and then a posture change that eliminates (corrects) the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be generated.

That is, by maintaining the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extending plate portion 761 come into contact with each other (collision). ), On the other hand, after the approach between the shielding design members 760 is completed, the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member The plate portion arranged in the foreground of the 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and it is possible to easily produce a sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state.

The state shown in FIG. 74 (b) is shown as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. Further, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation in FIG. 74 (b) is configured so as to be less likely to occur from the front-rear arrangement configuration of the second long member 743. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the extended plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other.

Further, the auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the reduced side wall portion in the enlarged / reduced displacement of the tip adjusting member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the extending plate portion 726, the tip adjusting member 744 is brought into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjusting member 744 that has reached the reduced side end of the displacement range. Posture displacement can be corrected.

As a result, not only the posture is corrected by engaging with other shielding design members 760, but also the posture can be stabilized when the tip adjusting member 744 alone reaches the reduced side end of the displacement range. can.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since the displacement rotation unit 800 has a pair of units arranged symmetrically and has a shape symmetrical to each other, the configuration of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the displacement rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described. Omit. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is shown in the assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 has a base plate portion 810 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal that is fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A drive in which a rod MB2 and a metal rod MB2 are inserted and fixed to a vertical slide member 820 configured to be slidable and displaceable in the vertical direction, and fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820, and fastened and fixed to a base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 are inserted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 with the vertical displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820. It includes a wiring arm member 870 that is rotatably and displaceably fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position of the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and a wiring arm member 870 and a wiring guide member 880 that guides electrical wiring. ..

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape and formed so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. It is provided with a drop-off prevention plate 814 arranged on the back surface side in order to prevent the drop-off.

The vertical slide member 820 is a circle from a substantially central position of a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge portion of the flat plate portion 821 to the back surface side, and a region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back surface side. At the columnar protrusions 823 that are projected in a columnar shape, the abbreviated parts 824a and 824b that are large enough to allow the connector part of the electrical wiring to be inserted and the formation of the wall part is omitted, and the left end part of the flat plate part 821. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a tubular shape (or a tubular member is arranged) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal metal rod MB3 capable of inserting the metal rod MB3 in the upper and lower center portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed in (or a tubular member is arranged) and fastened and fixed to a flat plate portion 821 near the end of the metal rod insertion portion 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. A fall-prevention member 827 that can be configured, a shaft support 828 that is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 so that the two-stage pinion 861 can be pivotally supported, and the left and right outside in the horizontal direction from the upper end ( It is provided with a support protrusion 829 that is projected in a cylindrical shape toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electric wiring by forming a displaceable region of the electric wiring arranged between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 inside. The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as the interrupted portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the back surface side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape on the back side in the upper portion thereof, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. The upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower side detection A detected plate portion 825a configured to be displaceable in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 is a female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 in the main body portion 831 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper portion of the main body portion 831. An insertion hole 832 in which an opening is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into the screw can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed. It includes a lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed in and a role as a winding center of the electric wiring as described later.

The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally driven and controlled, the transmission member 830 is displaced up and down in the vertical direction. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is displaced up and down.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 has a main body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is restricted in the left-right direction, and the back surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side to form a guide path for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and is formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a circular member 847 thereof. An illuminated substrate 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841 and an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. A pinnate member 854 that is rotatably supported by the blade, and a mediation member 857 that is fitted from the front side into the opening of the pinnate member 854 in order to match the central opening diameter of the pinnate member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. A central design member 858 is provided with a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 and is projected on the back surface side.

In the main body plate member 841, the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed to the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the rod arrangement portion 842 on which the metal rod MB3 is arranged and the lower side of the rod arrangement portion 842 thereof. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction is provided.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the lateral displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed from a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, but the details will be described later.

The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured such that a pinnate member 854 and a drive gear MG5 formed so as to be meshed with each other are assembled from different directions in the front-rear direction.

The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 formed in a cup shape having a size capable of accepting the pinnate member 854 and recessed toward the back side, and the receiving portion 848 is formed in a cylindrical shape from the center to the front side. It is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 849 to be formed.

The receiving portion 848 includes a through-hole portion 848a that is formed through a shape that overlaps with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5, and a gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 passes through the through-hole portion 848a. It is exposed to a position that can be seen from the rear.

In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 is made meshable with the drive gear MG5, the driving force is transmitted with the rotation of the drive motor MT5, and the pinnate member 854 is rotation-controlled. The rotary drive of the pinnate member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotary unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible even in the effect standby state.

A linear notch 849a is formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 849. This is a shape portion for facilitating the posture maintenance of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, and the details will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

The illuminated substrate 850 has a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a deformed opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the circular opening, and a variant thereof. It is composed of a front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illuminated substrate 850. The back side light emitting means 852b is provided.

In the deformed opening 851, the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be arranged inside the opening, and in the assembled state, the gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 is arranged on the back side of the deformed opening 851.

The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illuminated substrate 850, and the gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed with each other.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces in the front-rear direction. As a result, light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854.

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces outward in the radial direction. As a result, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side due to the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854. In the present embodiment, a plurality of long uneven shapes formed along an arc concentric with the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847. On the other hand, the arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized in the front view.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player does not need to arrange an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854 on the front side of the illuminated substrate 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved in the out-of-diameter direction. In other words, while utilizing the illuminated substrate 850 having a diameter smaller than the outermost diameter of the pinnate member 854, the outside of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outside of the outermost diameter of the pinnate member 854. Light can be visually recognized in (see FIG. 14).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing the light on the radial outside of the pinnate member 854 without increasing the size of the illuminated substrate 850. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the pinnate member 854 rotates at high speed, the back surface side of the pinnate member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to effectively perform light emission effect in this range. .. In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the radial outside of the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854, but for that purpose, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LED or the like. In other words, it becomes necessary to increase the area of the illuminated substrate, which increases the manufacturing cost of the substrate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while keeping the size of the illuminated substrate 850 smaller than the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854, only the visible position of the light is displaced in the outer diameter direction from the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854. It can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect without increasing the manufacturing cost.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 81 and 82. The decorative member 853 is a member formed of a light-impermeable resin material and coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of changing the appearance of the light between the inside and the outside of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, by irradiating blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, there are a region that appears to emit blue light and a region that appears to emit red light. Can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

The pinnate member 854 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a bored in the front-rear direction in the central portion and extending outwardly at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. A plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back surface side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back surface side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The pinnate member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5, but a detection sensor for detecting the posture of the pinnate member 854 is not arranged, and the drive motor MT5 is not provided. The posture of the pinnate member 854 is controlled by the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the pinnate member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and by minimizing the idling after the energization of the drive motor MT5 is released, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the pinnate member 854 assumed by the driving time of the pinnate member 854 and the actual posture of the pinnate member 854. By configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor, the posture of the pinnate member 854 may be detectable.

The mediation member 857 is formed so as to be fitted to the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is formed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. As a result, the mediator member 857 can be made rotatable about the cylindrical protrusion 849.

The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a projecting in a columnar shape from the central portion to the back surface side, a radial projecting portion 858b projecting outward from the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body portion. It is provided with a design ridge portion 858c that is projected upward from the top.

The central protrusion 858a is a portion to be inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in a posture in which the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a, and is inserted into the female screw formed at the tip portion from the back side of the circular member 847. By screwing the fastening screw to be inserted, the central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847.

In addition to the function as the design portion, the design ridge portion 858c can come into contact with the pinnate member 854 and function to adjust the rotation mode of the pinnate member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design ridge portion 858c and the front surface of the pinnate member 854 are arranged close to each other to the extent that they rub against each other, the increase in resistance at the time of rubbing is used to stabilize the stop posture of the pinnate member 854. Can be planned.

As a result, as the drive control mode of the pinnate member 854, a drive mode in which rotation is continued for a long period of time and a drive mode in which rotation of about one rotation is intermittently generated (irregular operation at the start of rotation is produced. When there is a drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the pinnate member 854 in the latter drive mode.

It will be described back to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so that it meshes with the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 and can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction. A rack member 862 and a dropout prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off from the vertical slide member 820 are provided.

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion having a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a, and the gear teeth and teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840. A matching large-diameter pinion 861b is provided, and the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed in a long left and right direction, and is formed as a rack gear that can be meshed with the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. It is provided with a columnar projecting portion 862b projecting from the end portion to the front side in a columnar shape.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are composed of gear teeth having the same shape, and have a pitch circular radius of the small diameter pinion 861a. , The ratio of the large diameter pinion 861b to the pitch circle radius is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the lateral displacement amount of the rack member 862 to the lateral displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar protrusion 862b is formed with an outer diameter that can be arranged inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the columnar protrusion 862b is arranged on the transmission guide portion 813. The plate thickness is set so that the columnar protrusion 862b does not fall off from the transmission guide portion 813 even if it approaches the back surface side until it comes into contact with the plate 814.

Thereby, when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth having the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is as large as that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

Therefore, the displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. As a result, it is possible to secure a large displacement width in the left-right direction of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described in detail later.

FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and has a long main body portion 871 formed in a long curved shape and one side is open, and a long main body portion 871 thereof. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the long direction of the above, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 arranged in close proximity to the support hole 872 and formed in the same direction so that electrical wiring can be arranged. It is possible to extract a plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open side end of the long main body 871 and a resin mold for forming the claws 874. It is provided with a through hole 875 for the purpose of forming a through hole 875, and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting from the vicinity of the other end portion of the elongated main body portion 871 in the elongated direction in a circular cross section in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872.

The long main body portion 871 is a portion in which the electrical wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and the narrowing portion 871a having a shortened width is provided in the intermediate portion thereof. The electrical wiring is arranged along the length direction of the long body portion 871 and is guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion on the opposite side on the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the length direction.

The throttle portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 so as not to cause disconnection and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively displaced. The throttle portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the throttle portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed in a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820.

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged in the wiring arm member 870 passes to the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, it is possible to reduce the amount of misalignment of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871. Further, since the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 having a minimum area, the electrical wiring is opposite to the open portion side of the long main body portion 871. It is possible to prevent the through hole 875 from coming out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in the present embodiment).

The circular protrusion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protrusion length that can be arranged in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 and the prevention plate 881. The member includes a path forming member 882 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape in which one side is open, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion, so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the back side at a position separated in the vertical direction. It constitutes a path passing through the upper open portion 883 and the lower open portion 884.

That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge portion, and the upper opening portion 883 forming the upper opening portion of the path due to the lack of the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. The lower opening portion 884 that is formed in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows the connector of the electrical wiring to be inserted in the portion, and the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range that does not overlap with the prevention plate 881 in the left-right direction view. An extended portion 885, a guide recess 886 recessed in a long groove shape so as not to overlap the extended portion 885 in the left-right direction, and a guide recess 886 below the lower edge portion of the guide recess 886. A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided, which is projected in a columnar shape on the prevention plate 881 side, and a fastening screw inserted into the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip thereof.

A space is formed on the back surface side of the path forming member 882 so that the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction. It enters the back surface side of the wall portion 882a at the position where it is arranged (the position near the lower end of the displacement) (see FIG. 86 (a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position near the lower end of the displacement on the back surface side of the wiring guide member 880 constituting the path through which the electrical wiring is guided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal slide member 840 while allowing the electric wiring and the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 to overlap in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement of the wiring guide member 880 in the width direction is the extension portion 885. And it is regulated by the prevention plate 881. Further, the width direction length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total width direction length of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion portion 876. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 to the back surface side.

The guide recess 886 is a connecting recess 886c that connects the front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, the rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b, and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. And prepare.

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion for limiting the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. In FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changing from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state is illustrated in chronological order.

86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L of FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, FIG. 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L of FIG. 77, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the displacement rotation unit 800 in a line.

In FIG. 86, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is a displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the intermediate right end state and the effect upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the intermediate right end state and the effect upper end state. The state of the left end in the middle of being arranged at the left end of the displacement path between the two is shown, and in FIG. 89, the state of the upper end of the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86 (a), 87 (a), 88 (a) and 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 has a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the illustration of the other shaped portions is omitted so that the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be visually recognized. Further, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end portion of the base plate 810, it is possible to prevent the vertical slide member 820 from being hidden during the vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b) and 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the lateral slide member 840 is shown with an imaginary line. For the purpose of showing only the displacement width in the left-right direction, it is shown by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841.

Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The electric wiring DK2 is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocally displaced in the vertical direction. First, the ascending displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the effect standby state (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. That can be determined by MPU221 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the effect standby state, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer end portions) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged on the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retract from the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840, it is possible to avoid that the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full left and right outside.

The state in which the drive motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction of ascending and displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state and the detected plate portion 825a is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the right end state on the way (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the right end state on the way by the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the right end state on the way, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the ascending direction and the right direction from the effect standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the ascending direction, and the posture is maintained.

That is, in the right end state on the way, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, so that the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the right end state on the way is executed without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. Ru. This makes it possible to avoid collisions between the members due to displacement timing deviations that tend to occur when the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are both displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction with the ascending displacement of the vertical slide member 820. In this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement exceeds the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813 and is displaced in the left-right direction.

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are teethed on the two-stage pinion 861. Will be combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 to the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circular radius of the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) to the pitch circular radius of the large diameter pinion 861b is 9:16, so that the left and right positions of the transmission guide portion 813 are set. The lateral slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by the left-right width obtained by multiplying the change amount of the above by a constant (that is, 16/9 = about 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the left end state on the way, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced outward to the left and right as much as in the effect standby state. In other words, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps with the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88A, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the right end state to the left end state on the way, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is formed in the connecting recess 886c formed on the back side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance between the support protrusion 829 as the support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is reduced as compared with the effect standby state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the lateral slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction. Further, at the time of downward displacement, the reverse (after the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 is prevented, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping with the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction view) is established.

As a result, even if the displacement timing of the horizontal slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870 deviate from each other, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 collide with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end portion (horizontal end portion in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is limited to the vertical displacement and the posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer end portions that are difficult for the player to pay attention to, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of view.

As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is used during the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state. It is arranged in the rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connecting recess 886c of the guide recess 886, and has a support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( The anteroposterior distance from (see FIG. 84) is maintained in the minimum state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at different front-rear positions corresponding to the vertical positions by using the wiring arm member 870 that can change the posture according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. By making it possible, it has an advantageous effect that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the rear, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. More specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the effect standby state is set to the right side (left and right side side). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the position on the right side (left and right inward side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the displacement rotation unit 800 is miniaturized in order to avoid contact. There is a risk that it will be necessary to take measures. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be sufficiently secured, while the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is reduced.

In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in particular, to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640 arranged in the right side region of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc. is likely to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured so that the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 can be displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the lateral slide member 840 is not restricted in the left-right direction. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840 by arranging the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 on the front side, and the horizontal slide member 840. It is avoided that the displacement of is limited by the electric wiring DK2.

In addition, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and at the upper position where the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged to the rear side for electrical wiring. The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the members arranged on the game board 13 as a configuration of a solenoid or the like for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

The state change of the electric wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The state change of the electric wiring DK2 referred to here means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in a state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around a pillar.

In the electric wiring DK2, the upper portion (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding portion DK2b is not preferred to extend and bend exclusively up and down. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 to the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86A), so that the rigidity is higher than that of the winding displacement portion of the lower winding portion DK2b. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the resin cable tube is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so as to exhibit a behavior in which the rigidity is higher than that of the winding-displaced portion.

In the state shown in FIG. 89A, the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2 to avoid rubbing between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

Further, since the wiring arm member 870 is configured so that the lower end opening direction is directed vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary bending deformation from occurring in the electric wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, and the lower side thereof. The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887.

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the columnar protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar protrusion 823. It is composed of.

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 887. Possible to be configured.

That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 and the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 are configured to be different from each other. In this embodiment, the planes in which the planes are orthogonal to each other and the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 are the first omitted portion 824a, the second omitted portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. It is configured to pass through 873.

Displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by having a portion of the wiring arm member 870 arranged inside the long main body portion 871 sandwiched between the throttle portions 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electric wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

From here, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wiring DK2 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be independently completed in each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise from the front view centering on the columnar protrusion 823 from the portion that has passed through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and includes the portion that is wound counterclockwise in the front view, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as the limit, and is in the effect standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). In, the wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 822 in the effect standby state can be reduced.

When the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled and the inside in the radial direction centered on the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the lateral slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left side, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pushed and the upper winding portion is radially outwardly centered on the columnar protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, since the guide piece 844a that inclines downward toward the left is projected from the left end portion of the wiring guide member 844, the upper winding portion DK2a is outward (vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844). It is possible to prevent the upper winding portion DK2a from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from the portion hanging downward from the wiring arm member 870 in the left side view (direction view from the left and right outside) around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (the cylindrical projecting portion 887). It includes a portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction), and means a portion up to a portion arranged in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the effect standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (a)). ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 882a in the effect standby state can be reduced.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the vertical slide member 820 being displaced upward from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction about the columnar projecting portion 887. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed and the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction centered on the cylindrical projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the inclined direction toward the front side toward the lower side, the lower winding portion DK2b is between the columnar projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (cylindrical portion). It can be prevented from entering (above the projecting portion 887), and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the horizontal slide member 840. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction is limited by the arrangement of the lateral slide member 840. The front-back width of (see) can be fully utilized for displacement.

Therefore, since a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently lengthened, and the wiring arm member 870 can be used. The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 has a center frame 86 arranged on the front side of a window portion 60a having an opening formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of streams whose front side is open from the resin member. A ball flow unit 150, which is formed in a road shape and is arranged in the lower portion on the back surface side of the base plate 60, is provided.

The ball flow-down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to accept a ball that has flowed down the lower end LB1 of the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path 152, which is a long box-shaped member whose front side is open and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 151 from the back side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving flow path 151. It includes a flow path member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inside of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the sphere.

The plurality of ridges 154 are arranged alternately on the left and right at intervals of about the diameter of a sphere for each of the left and right wall portions. As a result, the flow of the sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 can be decelerated.

The functions of the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 will be described. In addition to the function of guiding the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to the ball discharge path (not shown), the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 enter the second winning opening 640. There is a function to improve the effect by making the later game ball visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the second winning opening 640, a detection sensor for detecting ball passage is arranged near the lower edge shown in FIG. 90. As a result, the prize ball can be paid out and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the player can notice the entry into the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving flow path 152. For example, it is possible to easily notice a situation in which payment is not made due to a problem on the pachinko / pachislot machine store side.

As will be described below, since it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1, the position of the detection sensor is set to the downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1 or the like. The timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of holding display may be delayed.

The game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is an intermediate flow path LM1 (FIG. 27) flow down.

Similar to the guide flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be able to guide the sphere vertically downward while displacing the sphere left and right in a zigzag manner. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 look the same in the flow mode, the ball in the path on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the sphere is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 even by visually recognizing.

Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is information that is directly linked to the interests of the player, and is the information of the nail (not shown) to be planted on the base plate 60. This is a part where individual differences occur in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the state.

In the present embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before entering the second winning opening 640. Since the nails that the balls collide with are planted, whether the balls easily flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the shortening of the time during the right-handed game flows down the guide path DL1 and enters the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof, unless the ball enters the general winning opening 63. It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a waste ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 correspond uniquely. The degree of freedom of the attention position is higher in the case of paying attention to the guide path DL1 than in the case of paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 because the guide path DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It's clear.

Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide path DL1 is confirmed, the frequency of the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the frequency of occurrence of wasted balls in the right-handed game, and the like are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game in consideration of.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and a ball entering the second winning opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. As a result, it is possible to make it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and has been discharged from the game area, so it flows down vertically as it is, and the specific winning opening 65a is viewed from the front. If it flows down to a position where it overlaps with, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, which may hinder the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by letting the ball flow inward to the left and right by the first receiving flow path 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, the ball reaches the position where it overlaps with the specific winning opening 65a in front view. It is prevented (see Fig. 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. ..

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in the front view to the vicinity of the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view, and passes through the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side of. That is, since the sphere guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, he is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to make the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed route recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning opening 640.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, an important display is executed when the player looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for viewing the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the display, which is a comfortable game. Can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows down diagonally downward to the left on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridge portion 154, the staying time of the flowing ball can be extended. This makes it possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in the front view.

Further, by ensuring a long left-right width of the flow path of the sphere, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. This makes it easier for the ball flowing down inside the second receiving flow path member 153 to enter the player's field of view.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160, and the decorative means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are disassembled views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160, and the decorative means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate effecting means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 from the back side to the center frame 86 so as to be in contact with the front side and the upper surface side of the light guide plate 161. The center frame 86 is formed of an impermeable resin material and has an upper support member 162 that aligns the light guide plate 161 and a light transmissive resin material that presses the lower portion of the light guide plate 161 from the back surface side. A lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed, a sphere flow path component 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material to form a sphere flow path, and a light-transmitting member. A plurality of left and right side support members 165 that are formed from the resin material of the above and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a manner of pressing the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, and are formed in a long left and right shape to support the upper side. The horizontal substrate unit 166 is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending from the upper side of the member 162 to the front side of the center frame 86, and is formed in a vertically long shape and is formed from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. A vertical substrate unit 167 arranged and fastened along the left inner wall is provided.

The decorative means 170 includes a first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged at the left and right center positions near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. On the right side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86, on the front side of the right frame portion of the center frame 86. A third decorative member 177 to be arranged is provided.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to the central portion thereof, and a margin member 173 that is composed of another member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10. To prepare for.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 is provided with a horizontally long groove portion 171a having a horizontally long groove shape recessed on the back surface side. The horizontally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the illuminated substrate of the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate effecting means 160 can be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is visibly configured through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the inside of the center frame 86, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the light emitting effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state can be visually recognized by the player without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

The relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 on the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove portion 171a is separately shown as an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the illuminated substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light is irradiated along the arrows D1a and D1b in the vertical direction. 1 Light that reaches the reflection shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back surface side of the decorative member 171 can be conspicuously visually recognized.

As a result, even in a state where the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the mode (light emitting range or light emitting shape) of the light emitting effect visually recognized by the player depending on the forming range or the forming shape of the reflection shape portion 171b. Can be made different and visible.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface on the lower surface. It is arranged in two horizontal rows, that is, a row corresponding to the top and bottom and a row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface are arranged inside the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a, and the rear row on the lower surface is arranged outside the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the upper row and the front row of the lower surface can irradiate the reflection shape portion 171b with light, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface can be used as different light emitting targets. It can irradiate light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161 and the irradiated LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

In the LED arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, the upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows. Thereby, the light emitted from the front and rear two rows of LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in the front view. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the light that irradiates the display area side and the light that irradiates the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged at the same front-rear position as the reflection shape portion 171b, while the front-rear surface is formed of a flat surface. As a result, even when the light is irradiated from the horizontal substrate unit 166, it is possible to prevent the light from being reflected in the intensity, and the visibility can be maintained.

In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specifications, so-called different specifications) is displayed by the number of the star shapes. It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a member separate from the first decorative member 171 in the case of manufacturing a pachinko machine 10 having a different type of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be replaced by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

The margin member 173 is configured as a member separate from the first decorative member 171 and has a shape different from the shape formed on the reflection shape portion 171b as the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate (in this embodiment, a striped groove). ) Is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflection shape portion 171b.

FIG. 97 is a partially front enlarged view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflection shape portion 171b travels to the front side due to reflection or refraction, and is glittering. On the other hand, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is visually recognized slightly dark because it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and travels as it is, rather than being mainly reflected.

As a result, the shape of the margin member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal substrate unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were. In other words, it is possible to visually recognize the LED as if the LED is arranged on the back side to produce light emission.

The second decorative member 174 is provided with a shielding member 175 in which a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) having low transparency is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back surface side of the second decorative member 174. .. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the back surface side of the second decorative member 174.

As a result, the game region (particularly the left side portion) formed on the front side of the base plate 60 and the formation region of the light guide plate 161 in the front view (including the region overlapping the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in the front-rear direction). Can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

The third decorative member 177 is three-dimensionally formed in such a manner that a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are three-dimensionally formed on the front side and a plurality of hexagonal shaped portions arranged so as to be displaced back and forth on the back side thereof. It is provided with a plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 that are formed in a uniform manner.

Like the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in a space arranged between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1 in the center frame 86. To.

As a result, it is possible to execute a light effect that is visually recognized three-dimensionally, not a light effect that is visually recognized in a plane between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1. That is, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth in the front view.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the back surface side, which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front-rear direction is determined by the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front view. Whether it gets brighter or not changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to perform a light effect such as illuminating the front side or illuminating the back side.

In the present embodiment, as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the back side, a third symbol display device 81, a front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed. , The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with the case where light is emitted from a light emitting means such as a fixedly arranged LED toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the position in the front-rear direction of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front view. Which position of is brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to perform a light effect such as illuminating the front side or illuminating the back side.

In the present embodiment, as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left-right direction, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed (see FIG. 27). The first light irradiation device 330 functions to shield at least a part of the light emitted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 due to its arrangement.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect mode of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played via the three-dimensional decorative member 178. It is possible to easily prevent the color of the light visually recognized by the person from becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is configured to be visible in front view and the whole ball is configured to flow down in the same path has been described, but the ball flow-down unit of the second embodiment has been described. In 2150, the flowing sphere is configured to flow down one of a plurality of paths. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 illustrates an example of how the granular member 320 looks immediately after firing. As shown in FIG. 98, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left, as a difference from the ball flow-down unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving flow path 2155 is provided, which is a flow path having a size that allows a sphere to flow down.

The third receiving flow path 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has an inclined angle set to be looser than that of the first receiving flow path 152, and the lower end (left end) is set to the left side of the front view of the first winning opening 64 with the inclined portion 2155a. , A discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from the front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is slower than the flowing speed of the sphere in the first receiving flow path 152 due to the shallow inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in the front view. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of view for a long time.

As a result, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to be in the view of the player playing the game while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. .. In other words, the attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without discomfort.

The guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 in the same manner, and flows along the second receiving flow path member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152. It is switched by the switching means whether it flows down in the first direction D21 where it flows down or in the second direction D22 which flows down along the third receiving flow path 2155.

In the present embodiment, the ridge portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed in the second receiving flow path member 153 increases the flow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving flow path member 153. Therefore, if the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153, the ball will be guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. ..

Such a situation is likely to occur when a plurality of balls continuously enter in a short period of time, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second winning opening 640 in a row. Therefore, by visually recognizing the situation in which the balls flow down the third receiving flow path 2155, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning opening 640 in a row.

The mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow unit 2150 is provided with an opening / closing plate that can switch between a state in which the ball flows into the first direction D21 and a state in which the ball flows in the first direction D21 by using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that is arranged so as to be able to generate a magnetic force at the branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 is arranged, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the ball to flow down. You may switch the route.

According to these methods, not only the flow path of the ball can be switched to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also the ball can be stopped or the ball can be turned back. Unlike a ball that flows down in the game area, changing the flow path of the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, so a ball that uses magnetic force as described above. It is possible to switch the flow path of.

As described above, when the flow path of the sphere is switched by the device using electricity, it is possible to control whether the sphere flows in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22 by MPU221 (see FIG. 4). can. Therefore, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155 in 60% of the cases where the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving flow path is used. It is possible to improve the expectation of the player who sees the ball flowing down 2155 for the big hit.

In this case, it is easiest to gather the player's line of sight at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152, which is a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 2150 (game). It is possible to improve the attention to the ball already discharged from the area).

As described above, the fact that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 is the expected value of the big hit of the lottery when the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high or the ball enters the second winning opening 640. Suggests a high case.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and when the passage of the sphere is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired. ..

As described above, in order to launch the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the launch standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. take time. On the other hand, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the discharge portion 2155b from there. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by using this flow time.

As a result, the passage of the sphere is determined by the detection sensor SC21, and at the same time, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is launched after a certain time delay expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the flow of the sphere with the firing timing of the granular member 320 as compared with the case of controlling to.

For example, the oil adhering to the sphere may adhere to the first receiving flow path 152 to cause a decrease in the flow speed of the sphere. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in such a manner, the granular member 320 may be fired before the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, and the effect of the effect may be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines the passage of the sphere, by controlling the granular member 320 to be launched, the player waits until the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, it is possible to improve the effect of a series of effects, such as executing a powerful effect that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 by launching the granular member 320. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving flow path 2155 through which the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially arranged in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the above-mentioned series of effects without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

It should be noted that a control that does not fire the granular member 320 when the sphere passes through the detection sensor SC21 may be combined. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, the possibility of the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot may be increased.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155, the player with respect to the third receiving flow path 2155 at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the attention of the player.

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to improve the attention to the subsequent display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

A detection sensor having the same function as that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, the ball may be placed in a place where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 at the timing of passing the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific region where the benefit given to the player by passing the game ball is more advantageous.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be expanded / contracted / displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrically dispersed has been described, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, the effect member 700 has been described. , It is configured so that a non-symmetrical section can be formed in the radial expansion / contraction displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 is only in the effect member 3700, and the configurations of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 are common. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effecting member 3700 is arranged at an intermediate position (intermediate position) of the radial expansion / contraction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the adoption of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, the lower two and the upper left 1 While the sheets are radially expanded and displaced with the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in the assembled arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). The configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotating plate 3730. The rotary plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotary plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that a part of the guide holes 733 is changed to another guide hole 3733.

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 is provided with a separate guide hole 3733 in place of the guide holes 733 on the upper and upper right sides in the front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-mentioned small-diameter arc portion 733a, the large-diameter arc portion 733b, and the adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends from the connecting portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position along the same arc shape, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacent to the large-diameter arc portion 733b in the clockwise direction) or It is formed so as to sharply approach the small diameter arc portion 733a side (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733).

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided to the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c. The telescopic displacement member 740 guided to the above does not undergo radial expansion displacement while being guided to the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be displaced. The operation caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by making the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 left-right asymmetric, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the up-down direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position still remains in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 shifts to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, the effect member 3700 receives a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction in the front view due to its own weight. This load can cause the effect member 3700 to change its posture in the rotation direction around the axis in the front-rear direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

As a result, the direction (that is, not planned) is not planned only from the shapes of the functional plate portion 720 (see FIG. 55), the rotary plate 3730, and the telescopic displacement member 740 (see FIG. 59), which are members for displace the shielding design member 760. The shielding design member 760 can be displaced in the direction of rotation).

In the present embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same except for the other parts, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc are the same. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same for the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state or is arranged at the radial expansion displacement end position, so that the shielding design member 760 is left and right. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the left-right center position and the top-bottom center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained to be displaced, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented.

An example of production using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time and are executed individually has been described, but the purpose thereof is to avoid collision with other configurations. ..

In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be feasible at the same time, after adopting a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded and displaced in the radial direction while the effecting member 3700 is displaced downward.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the radial expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 returns, so that the effect member 3700 is shown in FIG. 99. It is possible to cause a posture change of rotation opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

In this way, it is possible to apply rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions to the radial expansion and displacement of the effect member 3700, so that a simple configuration specialized for radial expansion and contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760. As a result, it is possible to make a complicated movement with the addition of displacement in the rotational direction. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect member 3700.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fourth embodiment, the case has been described. The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 due to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the setting part 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, since the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the player does not have the line of sight blocked by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIGS. 12 (a) and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the linear motion member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (minutely displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, since the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the drive of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced ascending by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, so that control can be facilitated.

Further, in the embodiment in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (minutely displaced) so as to be visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can be done.

The mode in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (small displacement) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to vibrate the collision member 420. In this case, it is preferable that the other vibrating device is arranged on the lower side of the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent another vibrating device from being loaded when the collision member 420 is displaced due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the case has been described. The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 due to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the setting part 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is launched, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see an angle of about 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. It is possible that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 to hinder the rotation of the lid member 480, but in the present embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed from an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotation shaft side. This makes it difficult to hinder the rotation of the lid member 480.

When the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven in the forward rotation direction while the granular member 320 is on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracted side (small diameter side in FIG. 102) and the granular member 320 collides. It falls on the member 420.

On the other hand, since the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released at this timing, it is possible to avoid the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. ..

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the launch standby state, the ascending speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved and the granular member 320 can be launched at a high speed.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side at the time of launching, the firing of the granular member 320 is hindered at the left and right central portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing is performed in the left-right direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were the main one.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is launched can be changed depending on the launch mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the forward direction and the launch mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, the firing direction of the granular member 320 can be varied, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are provided with a flat plate-shaped substrate and irradiate light in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the sixth embodiment has been described. The first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are provided with an illuminated substrate in which the second light irradiation device 6340 is bent and arranged. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the first light irradiation device 6330, in addition to the illuminated substrate 332, the front side end portion is close to the front side end portion of the illuminated substrate 332, and the back side end portion is the illuminated substrate. A second illuminated substrate 6334 is provided so as to be tilted away from the 332.

The second illuminated substrate 6334 includes a light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct the light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of illuminating the granular member 320 that scatters the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310.

In the second light irradiation device 6340, in addition to the illuminated substrate 342, the back side end portion is close to the back side end portion of the illuminated substrate 342, and the front side end portion is inclined so as to be away from the illuminated substrate 342. The second illuminated substrate 6344 is provided.

The second illuminated substrate 6344 is provided with light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the back side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct the light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

The arrangement of the illuminated board is not limited to this. For example, only the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 may be adopted, the illuminated substrate 332, 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be adopted. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side of the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 where the light emitting means is not arranged, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

Further, for the purpose of sloping the direction of light irradiation, a device capable of changing the posture of the light emitting means may be configured without taking the method of increasing the number of illuminated substrates. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illuminated substrate 332,342 and the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 to enable light irradiation.

The substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box A100. 107 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

The arrows F, B, L, R, and U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box A100, respectively. Since the same applies to the following figures, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the substrate box A100 connects the box cover A200, the box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). The main control device includes a sealing unit A400 to be connected by the sealing unit A400, and a sub-cover A500 arranged at an end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotation shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400. The rotary shaft A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 toward the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is a lateral direction (arrows U, D) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). It is formed as an axis parallel to the direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotation axis A410 is on one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) in the front view (arrow B direction view) (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220 with the covering portion A270 described later interposed therebetween, the arrow. It is arranged on the R direction side). The rotating shaft A410 may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the side in the L direction of the arrow), which is opposite to one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) on the main control device A110. The main control device A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) the switch device A120 and the key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same other configurations except for the presence / absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

The switch device A120 is operated (on) by pushing the operation unit A122 from the initial position and turned off by releasing the push (the operation unit A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main control device A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operation unit A122 is pushed to the operating position (turned on position), and the main control is based on the click feeling. The operator can detect the completion of the input to the device A110. Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as "off position"), and the key A140 inserted at the off position is rotated (rotated to the right in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as "on"). A key-operated selector switch (mode) that is turned on by being placed in a position) and is turned off by being placed in an off position while the key A140 is rotated (rotated counterclockwise in this embodiment). It is configured as a changeover switch).

In this embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Further, in the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key A140 cannot be removed in the on position.

Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes RAM erasure), and is a key device. In a state where the A130 is turned on, as will be described later, a mode in which the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”) is exemplified. ..

Here, as described above, since the board boxes A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) are connected so as not to be opened, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130). It is necessary to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 in the present embodiment, openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is possible to save time and effort by eliminating the need to open the substrate box A100. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are located on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation unit A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The legs A121 and A131 are projected, and the legs A121 and A131 are inserted into the holes opened in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from the front side, and the portions protruding to the back side are soldered to the switch device A120 and the key device. The A130 is arranged on the front side of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, on a plane including an external force (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (insertion direction), arrows U, D, and arrows L, R) on the switch device A120 and the key device A130. When a force in the parallel direction) is applied and tilted with respect to the main control device A110 (printed board A119), the leg on one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the side lifted from the printed board A119 by tilting). While the tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, the compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed substrate A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may be broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may be peeled off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, in the substrate box A100, a means for solving such a problem is adopted. Details will be described later.

The main control device 100 includes a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display via the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing the setting using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and then the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position while the pachinko machine A10 is pushed. Turn on the power of. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in.

In the present embodiment, the first to sixth six values are defined as the set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by the pushing operation of the operation unit A122, the set values are changed from the first value to the first value. When the operation unit A122 is pushed in from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device The setting value displayed in 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

The information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to secure (more) the amount of information that can be displayed as compared with the case of using, for example, a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress the operation error. Further, by also using the device for displaying information about the game (third symbol display device 81), the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the display of the set value may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting change mode (the setting value is confirmed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode with the set value set (changed) is activated.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position (that is, it remains in the on position), and the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. However, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 while the key A140 of the key device A130 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode with the set value set (changed) is also activated.

Further, in the setting change mode, RAM erasing is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasure include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, and the timing when the key A140 is arranged at the off position. That is, the timing for executing the RAM erase can be set as appropriate.

Further, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the set value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (while it is placed in the on position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is inserted. If the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in the state of being arranged in the off position, the pachinko machine A10 is not started in the normal mode and is in an error state, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display at the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, to confirm the set value set in the setting change mode, first, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and then the power of the pachinko machine A10 is confirmed. Turn on. As a result, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the set value is activated, and the set value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

The display of the set value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. As a result, the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 can be turned off, and the power of the pachinko machine A10 can be turned on with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 placed in the off position. The normal mode with the set value is activated.

In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined mode. As a predetermined embodiment, for example, an embodiment in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) is blinked at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable 4-digit display, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (2) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode. However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the set value is displayed by the latter two digits (two) (for example, the first value is "01" and the second value is "". "02" is displayed, and "06" is displayed as the sixth value).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main control device A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 in the direction of arrow CXa of FIG. 108. FIG. 110B is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 has a front wall portion A201 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate in front view, and the front wall portion A201 from the four sides to the back side (direction of arrow B). Mainly the wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) that are erected toward the wall and formed in a plate shape. In preparation for the above, each of these wall portions A201 to A205 is formed in a box shape with the back surface open. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

Two steps are formed on the upright tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. As for the step, the first surface (first step) is formed on the internal space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the second surface is formed on the outer side (opposite side of the internal space) of the first surface. A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height of standing from the front wall portion A201 is small), and the surface on which the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as "seat surface A206"). Is formed as).

The seat surface A206 is formed as a surface (first surface) of each wall portion A201 to A205 in a continuous front view substantially rectangular frame shape, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. Fastening holes A206a with female threads screwed on the inner circumference are recessed in the four corners of the seat surface A206 (the parts where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected to each other). Will be done.

Therefore, in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), the outer edge side of the front surface thereof is brought into contact with the seat surface A206, and the screw ASC (FIG. 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b)) are screwed into the fastening hole A206a to be fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and to the substrate box A100. It is stored.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 at predetermined intervals. The engaging piece A207 extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction) and the erection tip of the base portion. It is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300 as described later.

The front wall portion A201 is formed with a portion recessed in a part thereof toward the back surface side (direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 located retracted to the back side (main control device 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is a front wall portion. It is formed on the front wall portion A201 by a plate-shaped wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the substrate box A100 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) is located and operated on the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the side closer to the main control device A110 than the first region. It is formed from a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms an operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and is a substantially horizontally long rectangle in front view (the length in the arrow L and R directions with respect to the length dimension in the arrow U and D directions). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimensions are lengthened), and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

The operating wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotating shaft A410 side of the sealing unit A400) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 in the front view (arrow B direction view).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 as it goes toward it. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be formed, and the first connection wall portion A220 and the first connection wall portion A220 and the space can be formed. The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded as a space that combines the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210.

In this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and the securing of the space inside the substrate box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 is on one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the lateral direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 is on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R). One side on the direction side) is a wall portion connected to the front wall portion A201, respectively, and is arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted and removed from the key device A130, and a main control device A110 ( AOP1 to AOP8 are formed as openings AOP1 to AOP8 for enabling connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The front view shape of the opening A250 is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (a substantially square front view in the present embodiment), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210. Located in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation unit A122 in the pushing direction (arrow B direction) and is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a part for controlling (falling down), and is formed in the shape of a frame having a substantially square front view surrounding the opening A250, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operating wall portion A210 is higher than the tip of the operating portion A122 pushed to the operating position (turned on position) from the operating wall portion A210. The tip is set to a low position (the tip of the operation unit A122 protrudes outward (toward the arrow F direction) from the vertical tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pushing operation of the operation unit A122 from being obstructed by the guide wall A251, and it is possible to improve the operability of the operation unit A122.

However, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operating wall portion A210 is higher than the tip of the operating portion A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). It may be set to a position (the tip of the operation unit A122 is immersed inward (toward the arrow B direction) from the vertical tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

Further, the tip of the operation portion A122 whose guide wall A251 is pushed up to the operating position (position to be turned on) from the operation wall portion A210 is abbreviated as the standing tip from the operation wall portion A210. It may be set to the same height position. When pushing the operation unit A122, the fingers are brought into contact with the vertical tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed to the operating position based on the contact. .. This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the tip end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112A), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operating wall portion A210 and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-shaped end face wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 are mainly provided, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is housed in the space inside the portion A271. To.

The peripheral wall portion A271 is a pair of protrusions protruding outward in the radial direction from a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section and two facing positions (positions in which the phases are substantially different from each other by 180 degrees) of the base portion A271a. A portion A271b is provided. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (arrows F and B directions). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the peripheral wall portion A271 (base A271a and protrusion A271b) (that is, a shape in which two facing portions of the circle are projected outward in the radial direction). An opening is formed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end face wall portion A272. As a result, the end face wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a plate-like (cantilever) in which the base end is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) is free.

Here, the opening A260 is limited to the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position (the region required to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees to allow displacement of a portion of the key A140 on one side of the center of rotation and the other side of the center of rotation of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (on one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end face wall portion A272 extends inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and is formed in a substantially annular shape in the front view (arrow B direction view). And a square portion A272b extending inward in the radial direction from the inner edge of the annulus portion A272a and formed in a substantially triangular shape in the front view (arrow B direction view). The square portions A272b are arranged in a posture of tapering inward in the radial direction in the front view (viewing in the direction of arrow B), and are formed at two positions having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

The key A140 has different dimensions from the radius of gyration of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of gyration of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are ridges that are extended in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end thereof is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. ..

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and the second One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge portion of the key A140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

Further, on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on the extension line of the other end). Are formed respectively. The display unit is a portion showing information on the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with the edge directed toward one end of the first ridge A211 is placed in the off position (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the key with the edge directed toward one end of the second ridge A212. The A140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (paralleled) in series (in a row) along the edge portion of the front wall portion A201.

Upright walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210. The erection wall A280 includes a first erection wall A281, a second erection wall A282, a third erection wall A283, and a fourth erection wall A284, and is opened by each of these erection walls A281, A282, A283, and A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the erection wall A280.

The first erection wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 are arranged so as to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erection wall A281. The fourth erection wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erection wall A281.

The second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 are connected to the first erection wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erection wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283. Further, the fourth erection wall A284 is connected to the second erection wall A282 on one side and to the third erection wall A283 on the other side.

Further, the erection wall A290 includes a first erection wall A291, a second erection wall A292, and a third erection wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by each of the erection walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (B)). Therefore, in the state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the erection wall A290.

The first erection wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293 are arranged so as to face each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erection wall A291.

The second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293 are connected to the first erection wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erection wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293. Further, the fourth erection wall A284 is connected to the second erection wall A292 on one side and to the third erection wall A293 on the other side.

The erection wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the periphery of the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) in the front view (viewing in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, in the front view (arrow B direction view), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 becomes the inner surface (straight line) of the second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293. The outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed inscribed on the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first erection wall A281, A291, the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293 in the erection wall A280, A290 are the back surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The height of the erection from the surface) is the same, and the erection tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of each of the erection walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is the seat surface A206. It is placed at the same height as.

Therefore, in the erection walls A280 and A290, the erection tip surfaces of the second erection walls A282 and A292 and the third erection walls A283 and A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and each erection wall A281 and A293 are connected. , A282, A292, A283, A293 are located on the same plane as the standing tip surface (forms the same plane). As a result, when the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing wall are erected. The vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erection wall A280, the length dimension (arrow U, D direction dimension) of the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 is the length dimension of the first erection wall A281 (arrow L, The value is larger than the R direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the erection wall A280 (the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283), the second erection wall There is a possibility that the A282 and the third erection wall A283 are deformed and the tilt of the switch device A120 cannot be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the facing space between the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 is connected by the fourth erection wall A284, the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A284 are connected. Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, the tilt of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by arranging the fourth erection wall A284 at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erection wall A284 becomes large. This corresponds to the partial formation of a portion having a large plate thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other portions, molding defects occur in the portion having a partially large plate thickness dimension and its vicinity. Cause.

On the other hand, the erection height of the fourth erection wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erection height of the first erection wall A281, the second erection wall A282, and the third erection wall A283. As a result, while ensuring the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erection wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are obtained. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as will be described later, the switch device A120 is tilted toward the arrow D direction. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth erection wall A284, and its inclination can be suppressed to an appropriate range (that is, the inclination is smaller than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). ..

On the inner surface of the first erection wall A281, A291, the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293 in the erection wall A280, A290, the erection tip side (arrow B). The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that are closer to the outer surface side toward the outer surface side, are formed, respectively. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the standing tip of each standing wall A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is gradually reduced toward the standing tip side, and each standing wall A281 is correspondingly reduced. , A291, A282, A292, A283, A293, the area of the vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are provided on the outer surfaces of the first erection walls A281 and A291, the second erection walls A282 and A292 and the third erection walls A283 and A293 on the erection walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

An upright wall A208 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface on the side of the arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned erection walls A280 and A290, an erection wall A209 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The erection wall A208 is formed in a box shape in which plate-shaped bodies on four sides are connected and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is opened, and is mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). 4) is formed at the position corresponding to). Further, the erection wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape in which the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210 is opened, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). Is formed at the position corresponding to. Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the erection wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the erection wall A209.

Here, in the plurality of erection walls A208, A209, A280, A290 that surround the plurality of objects, the height position of the erection tip surface of one or more erection walls is the erection of the remaining erection walls. It is set to a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In the present embodiment, the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). Located on the side to do). As a result, even if there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 on the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). Compared to the erection wall A209, the erection tip surfaces of the erection walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the adhesion of the vertical wall surrounding the object of high importance to the printed circuit board A119.

Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111A is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111B is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 stands from the back wall portion A301 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate in front view and the four sides of the back wall portion A301 toward the front side (arrow F direction). Mainly provided with wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303) provided and formed in a plate shape. Each of these wall portions A301 to A305 forms a box shape with the front side open. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303 at predetermined intervals. The engaged portion A307 is a portion where the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed so as to project downward (toward the arrow D direction).

In the connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase of the engaging piece A207 is set on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the extension portion by the extension length of the extension portion. Face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. Next, the box cover A200 is attached to the box base A300 in the extending direction of the extending portion in the engaging piece A207. Slide and displace in the direction of the arrow R). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, the main control device A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of the main control device A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device A110, and FIG. 113 is a main view in the partial CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110.

114 (a) is a front view of the main control device A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa of FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (b) is a main control device A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb of FIG. 114 (a). 114 (c) is a side view of the main control device A110 in the direction of the arrow CXIVc of FIG. 114 (a).

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the main ones among the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and the other illustrations are omitted. ..

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main control device A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. In the printed circuit board A119, various electronic components (ICs, resistors, capacitors and transistors) are mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is a conductor such as copper foil. The insertion holes A112 are formed at four corners.

The printed circuit board A119 has a board box A100 in a posture in which the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface on the arrow F direction side) faces the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). It is stored in.

In this case, at least in the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, the regions AS1 and AS2 where the vertical tip surfaces of the vertical walls A280 and A290 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact with each other (FIG. 114). (See (a)), electronic components are not mounted or circuits are not formed, and such regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. Note that, in FIG. 114 (a), only the portion of the region where the seat surface A206 is in contact with the standing walls A280 and A290 is shown.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation unit A122 so that it can be displaced (pushed in), and a coil spring (coil spring) that is arranged inside the main body A123 and imparts an urging force to the operation unit A122 to return to the initial position. The urging means (not shown), the contact (not shown) that is arranged inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operation unit A122, and the leg A121 that is electrically connected to the contact. Be prepared.

The main body A123 includes a base portion A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a columnar protrusion A123b projecting from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A123a. The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) face each other.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a on which the leg A121 is projected) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base A123a where the legs A121 project) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base portion A123a may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 may be configured to come into contact with each other.

The leg A121 is projected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a in the main body A123, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 internally arranges a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a matching key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and a cylinder portion A132 thereof. A contact point whose contact can be switched according to the state of the main body A133, the support A134 supporting the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the state of the cylinder portion A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point.

The main body A133 has a base A133a that is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds a cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) thereof, and two positions (phases that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase) on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a. ), A pair of protrusions A133b protruding outward in the radial direction, and an end portion A133c forming an end surface on the tip end side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and a portion where the leg A131 protrudes) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 where the legs A131 project) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) than the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. A circular opening in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a) through the opening. ..

When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering portion A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is covered. The size is the same as or slightly smaller than the concave shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270, whereby the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is placed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

Further, in this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 (end surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) and the back surface of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). It is formed. It should be noted that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end face wall portion A272 may be configured to be in contact with each other.

The leg A131 is projected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed substrate A119.

The support A134 has an opening formed substantially in the center, and the base portion A134a through which the main body A133 (base portion A133a and protrusion A133b) is inserted, and the two opposite sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b to be extended and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided, and a metal plate-like body is bent and integrated. Is formed in.

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B). Is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, the leg A134b1 is projected from the extending tip surface of the extending portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and becomes self-supporting by inserting the leg A134b1 into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the back side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the main body A133 can be prevented from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119 by the support A134.

A gap may be provided between the extended tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extended portion A134b and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support A134 may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the amount of the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may have the same dimensions. That is, the extended tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to be in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 can be supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the main body A133 can be more strongly suppressed from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Further, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape bent into an abbreviated shape or a substantially S shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in a state of being elastically deformed. It may be configured to be used. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may be performed. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the tilt of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (arrow L, B direction dimension, FIG. 114 (b) left-right direction dimension) set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped body constituting the support A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The holes in the printed substrate A119 through which the legs A134b1 are inserted are formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 can be increased, and when the tilt of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extending portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

Further, by forming the reinforcing portion A134c on the two opposite sides of the support A134, it is possible to regulate the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support A134 as a whole can be increased and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that the inclination of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly regulated (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated in the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated in the on position. 116 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction of the arrow CXVIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction view of arrow CXVIb.

117 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 117 (b) is a substrate in the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 118A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the box A100, FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is a substrate in the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100.

In addition, in FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and a single hatch is attached to the cross section to model the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the substrate box A100, the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 is projected. An opening A260 is formed in the end face wall portion A272 forming the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, when the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by a cheating person due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method is performed in which the wall portion A210) is slid on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) to reach the opening A260.

On the other hand, when the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. The tip of a foreign substance such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that regulates the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c, and the peripheral wall portion A271). The path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall (the wire passing through the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c) to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts is bent. A wall to which the tip of the foreign matter abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 through a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)). It is set to a value larger than (horizontal dimension of).

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, it is formed by a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b). The wall where the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire abuts, that is, the wall where the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire passes through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b, that is, the support A134. The upper surface. Further, for foreign matter such as a wire whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the support A134, each vertical wall A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

As a result, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) and the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (circumferentially due to the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b). The tip of the foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b to which the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire abuts by bending the path formed along the route). The wall against which the protrusion A133b abuts, that is, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIG. 118 (a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251, the operating wall portion A210, the operating portion A122, and the protrusion A123b). The wall (path formed by the gap between them) is bent and the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire abuts the wall (the wall where the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation unit A122 abuts, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b. Further, for foreign matter such as a wire that hits the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and whose traveling direction is changed, the route is along the respective vertical walls A281, A282, A283 and the inner surface of the lower wall A203). Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be made to face each other in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the key A140 (the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless operation or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or a collision of another member with the key A140 when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. When an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) the tilt of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress breakage or bending of the leg A131, removal of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

An end face wall portion A272 is formed on the covering portion A270 at the protruding tip (side in the direction of arrow F), and the end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 in the front view (arrow B direction view), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign substance such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100 and being illegally applied to the main control device A110.

In particular, in the end face wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, the square portion A272b extends inward in the radial direction from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the protruding tip surface of the covering portion A270 (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) is open only in the region where the displacement of the key A140 is allowed (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140), and the protruding portion A270 is projected. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) are designated as the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and make it difficult to insert a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end face wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, the foreign matter such as the wire passes through. It can be difficult to do.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 irregular (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are combined so as to face each other), the end face wall portion A272 is relatively complicated so that the pair of square portions A272b project from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. Formed into a unique shape. In this case, the end face wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) is a cantilever beam having a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free. Since it is formed in a shape), the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end face wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the peripheral wall portion A271 on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) is the opening A260. Even in the case of the configuration), when an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilt of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge (the portion forming the opening A260) of the end face wall portion A272. Can be brought into contact with each other. That is, the position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the above-mentioned external force can be brought into contact with the end face wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (covered portion A270) can be suppressed.

Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. Therefore, as described above, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) and the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) face each other. Can be done (see FIG. 118 (a)).

Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless operation or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or a collision of another member with the key A140 when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) is changed to the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side). ), The rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be regulated.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress breakage or bending of the leg A131, removal of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

Here, for example, the operation unit A122 when the operator carelessly or violently operates the key A140 inserted into the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key device A130, or opens the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. Or, due to a collision of another member with the key A140, an external force in the direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the inserting direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R) is applied to the operation unit A122 or the key A140. When acted on, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 may be tilted, and the contact between them may deform and damage the box cover A200 (particularly, the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270). ..

On the other hand, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and these standing walls A280 and A290 are the standing tip surfaces (inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side). The surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

As a result, in addition to improving the rigidity of the operating wall portion A210 by erecting the standing walls A280 and A290 (functioning as ribs), the support portion (deformation suppression) that supports the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 is suppressed. As a means), the standing walls A280 and A290 can be made to function. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

When the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erection walls A280 and A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated). That is, the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses its tilt is shared not only with the operating wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is distributed accordingly. Can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Further, since the standing tip surface of the standing walls A280 and A290 is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119. The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall (a wall that restricts further progress) to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being fraudulently applied.

The vertical walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the surroundings of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (see FIG. 118 (b)). That is, the region AS1 in which the vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the vertical walls A280 and A290 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) abut. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114 (a)).

Therefore, the path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the erection walls A280 and A290. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the movement to the outside of the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is restricted. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being fraudulently applied.

Further, the erection walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the periphery of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, so that the erection walls A280 and A290 are erected (function as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operating wall portion A210 be further improved, but also the directions of the external forces acting on the operating portion A122 or the key A140 (that is, the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R) can be changed. Regardless of which direction of the external force is applied in the including plane), the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

The first erection wall A291 is arranged so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and the second erection wall A292 and the second erection wall A291. The three standing walls A293 are arranged in such a posture that they are orthogonal to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be efficiently exerted on the standing wall A290.

That is, when the external force in the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R is applied to the key A140, the external force in the direction of the arrows U, D or the directions L, R is applied to the erection wall. While the load received by the A290 (the load capacity that the erection wall A290 should exert as a support) is maximized, an external force is applied in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R and the direction of inclination by a predetermined angle. In that case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the external force in the acting direction, and the load received by the erection wall A290 (the erection wall A290 exerts as a support portion) by the amount that the external force escapes due to the rotation. The load capacity) is low. As a result, by arranging the posture of the erection wall A290 as described above, the erection wall A290 efficiently exerts a function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

Since the erection walls A280 and A290 (the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the rigidity of the box cover A200 is used to utilize the erection wall. The rigidity of the A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the functions of the standing walls A280 and A290 as support portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

In the printed circuit board A119, the surface for connecting the electronic components by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , Areas AS1 and AS2 where the vertical tip surface of A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are abutted (see FIG. 114A), where electronic components are not mounted or a circuit is not formed, and such area AS1 , AS2 is formed as a flat surface.

Therefore, the erected tip surfaces (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the erected walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the erected walls A280 and A290 are combined with the erected walls A280 and A290. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the printed circuit board and the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be reliably functioned as a wall to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 abuts.

The first erection walls A281, A291, the second erection walls A282, A292 and the third erection walls A283, A293 in the erection walls A280, A290 have tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the erection tips are formed. The area of the surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure on the vertical tip surface in contact with the printed circuit board A119 and prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted between the printed circuit board A119 and the vertical walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surface (the surface facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) on the standing tip side of the standing walls A280 and A290, so that the moldability is improved. At the same time, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

That is, the shape of the erection wall A280, A290 is formed by reducing the area of the erection tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a, A290a) gradually approaching the outer surface side toward the erection tip side (arrow B direction). The change can be moderated to ensure the fluidity of the resin in the molding die. Therefore, the moldability can be improved.

Further, when the erected tip surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. (A) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to pass (invade) between the erection tip surface of the erection walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. One end of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (base A271a or protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (FIG. 115). b) See).

As a result, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 can function as ribs for increasing the rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is in contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each of the protrusions A211,222 is used to further tilt the switch device A120 or the key device A130. It can be reliably suppressed and damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

Further, on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on the extension line of the other end). ("ON" and "OFF") are formed respectively. As a result, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 can be combined with the function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the off position. It is set to the same phase position (position facing the end face of the key A140) (see FIG. 115A), and one end of the second ridge A212 is the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a) is set to the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) on the arrow U direction side as the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272). ) Is tilted in the direction of contact (arrow U direction), the first ridge A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115A), and is in the on position. When an external force acts on the key A140 in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface on the arrow L direction side is brought into contact with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272), the key A140 is tilted. The second ridge A212 is located on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by a finger) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). The portion to be formed) can be efficiently reinforced by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the action of an external force (force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case can be suppressed by the second connection wall portion A230 on the key A140 in the off position (FIG. 115 (a). ), The action of an external force (force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case can be suppressed by the first connection wall portion A220 (FIG. 115). (B)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other side (arrow D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the lateral direction (arrows U, D direction). The direction side) is open (the connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and is located on the third side from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the worker's hand or other configuration on the space side collides with the key A140, and the key A140 is pointed to by the arrow D. An external force that displaces in the direction or in the direction of the arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 on the side that suppresses the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to such an external force (the side that receives it), it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. It can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end face wall portion A272 are arranged at two locations having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view (arrow B direction view). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (outer edge, edge portion forming the opening A260) in the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as an isosceles triangle).

Specifically, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the off position is the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140. The square portion A272b on the side far from the first connection wall portion A220 (opposite side across the key A140) is the gripping surface of the key A140 with respect to the key A140 in the off position. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the surface is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115 (a)).

Therefore, in other words, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the on position. Is shortened (smaller), and the square portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the worker's hand or other configuration on the space side collides with the key A140, and the key A140. Where an external force that displaces the arrow D or L is likely to be applied, according to the square portion A272b in the present embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 on which the external force in the arrow D direction or the arrow F direction is applied. Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is lengthened, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and the tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, the surface pressure can be suppressed and the damage of the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) is a first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall located closer to the main control device A110 than the first region. It is formed from a second region formed by the portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, as compared with the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased from the person who commits the fraud, and the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased. The openings A250 and A260 can be made difficult to see, and it can be difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening A260.

Here, the board box A100 is a distance from the main control device A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space) in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110. )) It is necessary to secure. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily secure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the substrate box A100. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, work is performed on the step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 toward the operation wall portion A210 from the front wall portion A201. The space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of such inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

The operating wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L and R directions) in the front view (arrow B direction view) and is orthogonal to one direction (arrows U and D). It is formed as a region of a substantially rectangular shape (horizontally long rectangle) larger than the length dimension along the direction (see FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b)).

The key device A130 is arranged so that the posture of the key A140 in the off position is along the other directions (arrows U and D directions) described above (see FIG. 115A). That is, in the key A140 in the off position, the surface gripped by the finger faces the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the front view (arrow B direction view). The longitudinal direction of is taken along the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the side (right side and left side of FIG. 115A) where the surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position is desired. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into or pulled out from the key device A130, a step (first connection wall) in which a finger (for example, a thumb and an index finger) holding the key A140 connects the first region and the second region. Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions), as described above. As the first connection wall portion A220 is formed with a downward inclination, the key A140 is operated by grasping the key A140 with fingers (rotating from the off position to the on position or vice versa). It is possible to prevent a finger different from the gripping finger from interfering with a step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

For example, when the key A140 in the off position is grasped by the index finger and the thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be arranged by using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and the key A140 can be arranged from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

Further, when the key A140 in the on position is grasped by the index finger and the thumb, the little finger and the ring finger are formed into the operation wall portion A210 (second area) in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Arranged using the space on the other side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall part A210 by locating the wall part A210 (second region) on one side from the center in the longitudinal direction. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) described above. can.

In the switch device A120, the position (standing height from the operating wall portion A210) of the protruding tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating portion A122 at the initial position is the protrusion of the covering portion A270. It is set to a position (small dimension) lower than the position of the tip surface (front surface of the end surface wall portion A272, the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interference between the operation unit A122 and the fingers when operating the key A140.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall) on both sides of one side (arrow L direction side) and the other side (arrow R direction side 9) in the longitudinal direction. Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall part A230) is formed on one side (arrow U direction side) in the lateral direction, while the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction is formed. The connection surface is not formed.

As a result, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, it is possible to communicate with the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) and the space on the outside. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped by the finger and operated (insertion into the key device A130, withdrawal from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is pressed. Use the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (pinkie and ring finger) different from the grasped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). Can be done. As a result, operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

Here, as described above, the board box A100 is a distance from the main control device A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110. It is necessary to secure the distance (internal space).

In this case, a step connecting the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). The first connection wall portion A220 is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are formed. By making it non-tilted (only the first connecting wall portion A220 is tilted downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A100 for heat dissipation from the main control device A110.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is tilted downward and the others (second connection wall portion A230 and third connection wall portion A240) are not tilted, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. Has an operation wall portion A210 (second region) having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) from the center in the longitudinal direction. ) By adopting a configuration in which the key device A130 is placed close to each other.

The third connection wall portion A240 is formed on the other side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (opposite to the first connection wall portion A220), whereby the third connection wall portion A240 causes the third connection wall portion A240. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 at the time of manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) is omitted, and the illustration is omitted. The reference numerals are shown only in the main configurations.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, as described above, hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view, and the hinges 18 are attached. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface with the side provided with the above as the axis for opening and closing.

Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side of the front with the hinge 18 as the axis for opening and closing, the opening angle can be sufficiently increased (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, about 90 degrees). When the opening angle can be secured), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the board box A100, and the switch device A120 or the key device is in the same manner as described above (the procedure described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119). The A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, the opening angle can be secured only about 45 degrees, and the outer frame 11 and the inner frame enter the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by the opening. Even when it is necessary to insert a hand from between 12 and operate the key device A130), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 has a direction in which the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 (second region) (for example, the arrow R and L directions in FIG. 115 (a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotary axis). Along with pointing toward, the lateral direction (arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating axis), and one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115 (a)). It is arranged in a posture in which the L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted from between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (front of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second area), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are formed into a space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (that is, the operation wall portion A210 (second region) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the key device. The space on the other side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by locating the A130 on one side of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction). Can be placed using.

In such an arrangement, the operation unit A122 can be operated (pushed) with the thumb or the index finger for the switch device A120, and the key A140 can be rotated with respect to the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and index finger holding the key A140, the space secured by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

The above-mentioned setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned on the front side (front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening / closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation shaft A410 as the opening / closing axis. Is also good. As a result, the operator can stand in a position facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input / output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, and so on, via openings AOP1 to AOP8. 1 The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which one end is connected is connected to the symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and FIG. 4).

Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a possibility that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are likely to be operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is performed. There is a risk of sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which at least one end is connected to the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main control device A110. As long as it is connected to (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected, connection and disconnection are mixed. ), The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Since the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is secured and fraud can be suppressed. Connects other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol hold lamp 84 to the main control device A110. Even if the electrical connection line) is released (pulled out) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed to improve workability (ensure versatility). ) Can be planned.

That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation shaft A410 as the axis for opening and closing, in order to rotate the main control device A110 (main control to the electrical connection line). It is necessary to disconnect (pull out) the electrical connection line so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, if all the electrical connection lines are not connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is placed in a predetermined position (switch device) in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed. It is necessary to rotate the A120 and the key device A130 to a position where they can be easily operated), and then reconnect the electrical connection line released (disconnected) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

In particular, when the main control device A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, the extension line is interposed to release (pull out) the main control device A110. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main control device A110, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) are allowed. It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line connecting the second symbol hold lamp 84 to the main control device A110) via an extension line.

As a result, while the main control device A110 can be arranged at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily operated, the labor is suppressed and the workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is reduced. Can be improved.

Next, the substrate box A2100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the ridge A2273 is projected from the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

121 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A2100 in the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121 (a). Is.

Note that FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Further, in FIG. 121 (b), only the portion to be cross-sectionally viewed is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, a ridge A2273 is projected from the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment. The ridge A2273 is a portion (ridge) extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is an outer edge of the end face wall portion A2272 (the tip in the overhanging direction extending radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge).

Specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position) along the outer edge of the square portion A272b. The range between the position AP1 and the position AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the position AP4 including the position AP5 and the position AP6) and one side (diametrically inward from the peripheral wall portion A271) sandwiching the square portion A272b. It is set to the range along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4) on the side where the overhanging dimension is large), and in this range (the range between the position AP1 and the position AP6). It is formed continuously.

The protrusion dimension from the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 (annulus portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value within the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and the position AP3 to the position AP2. The value is gradually changed to a larger value toward the position AP2, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP2 toward the position AP1, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, and is the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. Set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (protruding dimension).

In this way, by projecting the protrusion A2273 on the end face wall portion A2272, the rigidity of the end face wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and arrows L, R), and the key device A130 is tilted. , It is possible to prevent the end face wall portion A2272 from being damaged when the key A140 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the end face wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) are formed. ), The gap between the front surface and the front surface can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 with respect to the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c in the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value that is approximately the same as the facing interval between them. Therefore, the protruding tip of the ridge A2273 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) is eliminated, and foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A2100 through such a gap. Can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, since the protrusion dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate-like (cantilever) with the outer edge side free is used. Then, the ridge A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly adhered to the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). As a result, foreign matter such as a wire can be more reliably suppressed from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap between the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c of the main body A133). ..

Further, in this way, the protruding tip of the protrusion A2273 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is in contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end face wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, it is possible to prevent the end face wall portion A2272 from being deformed in the insertion direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) of the end face wall portion A2272 from being damaged.

Next, the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

122 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122 (b) shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range). Also, in FIG. 122 (b), only the main configurations are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

Here, the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment has a forming position of the operating wall portion A210 and an opening A260 (covered portion A270, key) in the operating wall portion A210 with respect to the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment. The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (guide wall A251, switch device A120) is different, but the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the operation thereof is performed. The three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covered portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated via the openings A250 and A260. Will be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220, the side in the arrow L direction) than the key device A130. That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the substrate box A3100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated around the rotation axis A410 at a first position (arranged during a game) arranged on the back surface side of the inner frame 12. From the position (see FIG. 120), it is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and the front surface of the box cover A3200 (operation wall portion A210) faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010. That is, it is set in a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in a range of approximately 180 ° up to (see FIG. 122 (b)).

As a result, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information on setting change, setting value). )be able to. As a result, since the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operation mistakes can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to see from the outside, see FIG. 120), so that fraud is performed. (The switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated) can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrows). The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which a desired posture (in the present embodiment, a posture in which both sides are substantially parallel) is obtained (direction B). The angle between the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is preferably set in the range of approximately 0 ° to approximately 45 °.

That is, the substrate is located at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. The box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as wrapping the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. ..

As a result, the work of operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be made easier while checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the information related to the setting change), and the operability is improved and the operation error is made. Can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the key are formed on the operation wall portion A210. The device A130 is arranged.

As a result, the substrate is located at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are located farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly push the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the operation frequency of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220). Arranged. As a result, the frequently operated switch device A120 can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122B). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Further, since the switch device A120 is arranged adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between the fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment is up to the second position described above by the substrate box A3100 (a position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122 (b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to regulate the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (that is, fix the substrate box A3100 to the second position). ) Provide regulatory measures. As a result, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that the operability can be improved.

As a regulating means, the substrate box A3100 is fixed (held) at the second position by using the magnetic force (adhesive force) of the magnet (a force exceeding the attractive force is applied to the first one. It is equipped with a protruding member that is placed in the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed urging means (for example, coil spring), which allows displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the position), and is placed in the protruding position. The protruding member engages with the substrate box A3100 arranged at the second position and regulates the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging means from the protruding position). When the projecting member is immersed against the urging force of the substrate box A3100, displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is allowed) and the like are exemplified.

Next, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft A410 of the substrate box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (arrows U and D directions) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotating shaft A4410 in the tenth embodiment has been described. The pachinko machine A4010 is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) substrate box A4100 is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and orientation) of the rotation shaft A4410 and the number of arrangements, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 projecting from each of the sealing unit A400 and the subcover A500 in a direction away from each other. The pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side of the board box A4100 in the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction) (opposite to the operating wall portion A210, side in the arrow U direction), and are located in the longitudinal direction of the board box A4100 (arrow). L, R direction) It is formed in a posture of protruding outward from both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotating shafts A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the substrate box A4100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated around the rotation axis A4410 at a first position (arranged during a game) arranged on the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The position is displaced (rotated) from the position (position shown by a broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90 ° to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, a position where the substrate box A4100 projects most toward the back surface side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)). ..

As a result, at the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to the side where the operator is present. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operating wall portion A210 can face the back surface of another component arranged on the inner frame 12. Therefore, another component can be made to face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at a position where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation (the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 is applied to another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with each other, the substrate box A4100 is formed so as not to be able to be arranged at the first position. This makes it possible to prevent the key A140 from being forgotten to be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be removed from being illegally acquired.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the second position of the substrate box A4100 is located below the first position in the gravity direction (vertical direction), the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. In this state, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the substrate box A4100 can be subsequently displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the operator to recognize that the substrate box A4100 is in a state where it cannot be arranged at the first position.

As for the separate member, when the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 rather than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape penetrates into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is decelerated by the ridge portion 154 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an adhesive member may be arranged on the inner surface to increase the flow resistance of the sphere, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by a magnetic force. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged in the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the back surface side of the effect member 700 so that the overhang width to the back surface side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated by configuring the main body portion 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to be inserted into the rear case 510 while the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the effecting member 700 can be displaced by operating the operating member 183 so that the insertion into the rear case 510 is released in a state where the overhang width is shortened. At this time, the effecting member 700 can be displaced. The displacement regulating device 180 also displaces with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized and produced by the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by a manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be provided with a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulated state prior to the initial operation from the power-on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from starting displacement while the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. can do. This makes it possible to prevent the operating member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operating member 183 is provided without driving the displacement regulating device 180, and the displacement regulating device 180 is determined to be in the regulated state by this detection sensor. May be controlled so as not to start driving the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof may be used.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the effect member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 from changing. When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is projected, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with the recess provided in the lower arm member 630 to prevent the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 from changing in the left-right direction. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged as an example of the apparatus for restricting the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the upper side of the gaming area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, by disposing a device for restricting (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displaceting the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, the partition member 310 may be prevented from rubbing against the wall surface, cracking the granular member 320, or scratching the partition member 310.

For example, by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side (effect standby state), it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacement of the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partition member 310 with which the granular member 320 can come into contact at the time of shipment, and it is possible to suppress the displacement amount of the granular member 320, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which cracks occur due to collision between the granular members 320. can.

Further, as another example, the granular member 320 is arranged on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate effecting means 160, is configured to be able to project into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in an extended state. An overhanging member may be provided so as to be able to limit the displacement of the.

This overhanging member is configured to be able to be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (front side of the gaming board 13), and is configured to switch between the overhanging state and the non-overhanging state each time the pushing operation is performed. After installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store, the overhanging member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the overhanging member can be improved.

The mode of changing the state of the overhanging member is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism as in the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engaging or disengaging the claws with each other.

Further, as another example, the arrangement of the granular member 320 may be maintained by shipping the partition member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store and lowering the air pressure in the partition member 310 before operating it, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

Further, as another example, a resin as a material of the granular member 320 may be mixed with a metal powder of a ferromagnetic material to form a magnet, and a magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. As a result, at the time of shipment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, by removing this magnet during operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

The magnet is not limited to the one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged as a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480.

In the embodiment in which the granular member 320 is mixed with the metal powder of the ferromagnetic material, for example, after the firing effect is executed, the operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (for example, the magnet is brought close to the partition member 310). By disposing the effect (operating) effect, the effect mode of stopping the granular member 320 in the air (making it appear as if it is floating) can be included in the launch effect.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an insertion hole formed in the rear case 510 on the same straight line as the central axis of the regulated hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged at a predetermined terminal position is formed in the rear case 510 at the time of shipment. A metal rod or a resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole, fixed with tape or the like, and after arriving at the game machine store, the clerk of the game machine store pulls out the metal rod or the resin rod. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be soiled with the tape for fixing, and the metal rod or resin rod cannot be thrown away for delivery to other stores of the pachinko machine 10 and stored. You may need to do it.

In addition, if the storage of metal rods or resin rods is left to each gaming machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if the metal rods or resin rods are delivered to another store without them, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured. It may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 is an improvement of this viewpoint.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the front-rear width of the rear compartment lower portion 314 are about the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the front-rear width of the left-right central portion 312b and the rear compartment lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-rear width of the left-right portion 312a and the back compartment lower portion 314. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased on the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 and the front plate portion 311 can be increased. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged by the collision.

Further, for example, the front-rear width of the left-right portion 312a and the back surface section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be made to enter the internal space IE1 without losing the momentum of the ejected granular member 320.

Further, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive load locally on the partition member 310. Further, by moving the tapering direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular member 320 toward the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion that is a part of the front plate portion 311 and is expected to reach the ejected granular members 320 in a collective manner may be provided so as to project toward the back surface side. good. In this knob-shaped portion, another member may be arranged and fixed on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or a metal may be formed so that a part of the front plate portion 311 is projected toward the back side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed in the shape of a soccer ball has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be spherical, rugby ball-shaped, or star-shaped (a shape in which a protrusion is formed three-dimensionally). By forming the members having a certain size, a gap can be created between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the firing effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back surface side of the light guide plate 161 and is configured to launch the granular member 320 diagonally forward and upward, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the injection device 400 may be the left-right position of the light guide plate 161 or the upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally to the front side. When arranging the injection device 400 at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the effect standby position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed of a monochromatic (red in this embodiment) resin member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two-color molding or two members having different colors may be combined to form one granular member 320. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape having the same size as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the way the granular member 320 flies and looks changes depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape fitted well or the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitted. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is arranged so as to be scattered in the internal space IE1 and gathers on the collision member 420 by gravity has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the granular member 320 is provided with an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side in the effect standby state), and the granular member 320 is configured to be returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. May be. In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member having a fixed end, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the urging means and the granular member 320 is not limited in any way. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be adhered to each other, and although they are not adhered to each other, they are not separated from each other, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. The urging means may be supported by the internal space IE1 while being displaceable from the granular member 320.

Further, the urging means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, the air pressure adjusting means for adjusting the air pressure in the internal space IE1 may be adopted in the same manner as in the case where gravity acts on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment. In this case, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the air pressure in the internal space IE1.

For example, when the pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the upper side of the internal space IE1. When the pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner of extracting gas from the interior space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

In addition, when causing a change in atmospheric pressure, it is preferable to close the deformed penetrating portion 315. It is easily possible to impart the function of closing the deformed penetrating portion 315 to the lid member 480. For example, when a flexible, thin and highly deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed penetration portion 315, the lid is used. The gap between the member 480 and the deformed penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion facing the transmission protrusion 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is arranged at the lower end position, but also the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while in contact with the curved surface, so that the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum urging force of.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right central portions of the collision member 420 are formed of a curved shape with an upward protrusion has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a slope shape in which the central portion is sharpened and descends in the left-right direction, or it may be a hipped roof shape. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharp point in the central portion in the left-right direction as compared with the curved shape. Therefore, the bias of the left-right arrangement of the granular member 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to construct a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a mass until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310 and then separated by the collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, it is preferable that the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are convex upward. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 from colliding with each other.

In the first embodiment, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape in a lateral view has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower half may be overhanging and bent in a lateral view. In this case, the dense position of the granular member 320 can be moved toward the upper half side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the partition member 310 in the front view is about the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the partition member 310 in front view is designed to be equal to or larger than the size of the visible area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the edge portion of the partition member 310 overlaps with the display by the third symbol display device 81 and is visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the first embodiment, a single collision member 420 is adopted as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be adopted, and may be operated cooperatively or individually by different drive devices.

In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 abuts on the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not abut on the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the back surface side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 so as to be in contact with the front side transmission member 440. In this case, the contact portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is formed unevenly in such a manner that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, so that the pillar portion is arranged as the front transmission member 440 rotates. Can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (minorly displaced).

In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may enter by a slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back surface side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is separated and fits under the lid member 480 in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a protruding portion may be formed so as to project from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and this protruding portion may be configured to be in contact with the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular member 320 is locally deposited, by pushing the granular member 320 by the protruding portion, the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken due to the displacement of the lid member 480 to the approach side. .. This makes it possible to make the arrangement of the granular members 320 uniform.

The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured so that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the granular member 320 is deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the deposited granular member 320, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken.

Further, it may be configured as a pair of ridges that are arranged so as to be inclined to the left and right outwards toward the retractable tip of the advancing / retreating portion 481 starting from the left / right center portion of the approaching tip of the overhanging portion 482. .. In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 480 on the approach side, a load in the direction of pushing the granular member 320 toward the left and right outwards can be applied to the granular member 320.

Moreover, the direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the slopes may be opposite, the ridges may be formed along a single slope direction instead of a pair of slope directions, or ridges of different degrees of slope may be combined, or the slopes may be combined. A ridge without a ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the axis of rotation or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the axis of rotation) may be used. In addition, the number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

The projecting length of the protruding portion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be projected until it reaches a circle having the same coaxial diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the lid member 480 is configured so that the protruding length from the advancing / retreating portion 481 is constant. Is also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protruding portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481. It can be played by the club.

When the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the action timing of the protrusion is not limited to the time when the granular member 320 is stopped and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is housed under the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is moved in the forward and reverse directions in small steps near the state where the front transmission member 440 is rotated 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with respect to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be displaced up and down in small steps, and the granular member 320 resting on the collision member 420 can be displaced. Can be displaced up and down.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collide with the protruding portion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the rearrangement of the granular member 320 can be executed, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be collapsed.

Further, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when it is displaced ascending), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

The execution of the small forward / reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward / reverse direction, or the forward rotation may be generated at short time intervals. In this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 to be displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, so that the drive motor MT1 can be rotated in the reverse direction.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right, so that the lid member corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not a flat surface but has a shape having irregularities (wave shape), and the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 are close to each other. The distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 may be changed. Further, the approach-side end of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed so as to be formed in parallel with the axis of the rotation axis O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be arranged at the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by the posture change of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, contact member 430, transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the case where the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a timing to displace all the members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be adopted may be slightly increased in size.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 abuts on the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, a repulsive force is generated between the front side. The load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear motion member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, in the transmission protrusion 446, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the transmission protrusion 414 and the protrusion portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is disposed in the half portion in the circumferential direction. On the other hand, the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force is disposed in the circumferential half portion on the opposite side so that the repulsive force is placed at the lower end position of the linear motion member 410. Since it can be configured to occur on the side to be maintained, the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. I explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one of the circumferential surfaces of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and the driving force may be transmitted through the groove to increase the transmission target of the driving force.

In the first embodiment, the case where it may be unclear whether or not the timing at which the front transmission member 440 should be rotated in the reverse direction may be unclear due to the detection by the detection sensor SC4, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is arranged, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 indicates that the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. It may be judged whether or not it is possible. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the drive in the forward rotation direction has passed through the launch state, so reverse rotation is possible if the launch state has not been reached, and reverse rotation is not possible if the launch state is exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear motion slide).

In the first embodiment, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent a defect related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. The case where it is configured has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is higher than the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760 are balanced with the early start of displacement due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760 are simultaneously installed in all directions. It can be made to appear as if the displacement has started.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is brought into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740 to generate a load in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be arranged to apply the urging force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary plate 730 is used as both a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacementing the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b is first loaded and radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the second guided protrusion 744b to be arranged receives a load later is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b occurs at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment, the case where the telescopic displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, a first guided protrusion 743b and a second guided protrusion 744b, has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to project diagonally with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740, the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, an overhanging portion is formed on the outer side of the circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b can be extruded outward in the radial direction at the overhanging portion so that the telescopic displacement member 740 can be moved to the discrete state side. It can assist the displacement toward.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the effect member 700 at the displacement lower end position and loosens the degree of the posture change of the effect member 700 allowed at the upper and lower intermediate positions has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the degree of tolerance for the posture change of the effect member 700 may be increased toward the position of the lower end of the displacement.

Further, the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the acting force is generated with respect to the effect member 700, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip portion of the lower arm member 630 for each portion. The contact area of can be changed.

The degree of change in posture of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, the front surface of the plate of the main body member 601 arranged to face the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 and the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with irregularities to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the posture change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the plate of the main body member 601 or in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. Therefore, it becomes easy to suppress the posture change in the portion where the interval is narrow. Further, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the descending end.

In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increase / decrease device capable of increasing / decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increasing / decreasing device may be a braking device capable of increasing or decreasing the frictional resistance, a device for increasing or decreasing the displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device for projecting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. .. In the case of a device using magnetic force, it is easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arcuate hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

In the first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the effect member 700 moves downward, a large displacement is allowed as a displacement in the expansion direction, and after the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed, the effect member 700 is in the expansion direction. The case where displacement occurs has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled so that the displacement in the expansion direction occurs in the middle of the displacement of the effect member 700 in the vertical direction. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved to the left and right by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction in which the effect member 700 is reduced (displaced inward in the radial direction) while the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced. It is possible to offset the influence of the change from the long posture to the long posture up and down, and it is possible to suppress the posture change in the forward tilting direction of the effect member 700.

In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is displaced vertically has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, the effect member 700 projects to the front side of the center frame 86 in the assembled state, and the state changes to the discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. It may be configured to change to a larger state.

In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. Further, the second layer glass unit is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front side toward the upper side, so that the size of the upper plate 17 is maintained. Is preferable.

In the first embodiment, the case where the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjusting member 744 are likely to be tilted due to the positional relationship of the second long member 743 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is arranged between the second long member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744, and the posture of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exerted.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged on the upper side of the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electric wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a drive device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched by the throttle portion 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing tool such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

Further, the fastening position of the electric wiring DK2 can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the electric wiring DK2 arranged through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a throttle portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. , The fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connection position.

Further, the means for fastening the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to the use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. That is, by narrowing the width of a part of the arrangement portion 635 in which the electric wiring DK1 is arranged, the electric wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement, or the inside of the arrangement portion 635 may be configured. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixture such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electric wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be a lower arm member 630 provided with an arrangement portion 635, or an effect member 700 disposed on the tip end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in a direction (front-back direction) in which the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced on the vertical and horizontal planes and the wiring arm member 870 is displaced from the vertical and horizontal planes. Although the case of doing so has been explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front-back and left-right planes, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction, and as the direction of proximity separation, the front-back and left-right planes. It may be tilted and displaced.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b has been described in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced in a spiral shape in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged according to the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and the electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a drive device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 854, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as follows.

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging state of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the state change to the enlarged state occurs in the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, when the pinnate member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700 is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 May be configured so that the state can be changed to the enlarged state.

In this case, it is possible to avoid a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800, and it is possible to avoid expecting a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the pinnate member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is composed of the same shape as the guide path DL1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer left-right width than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. ..

In the first embodiment, the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path for the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to flow down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a route for a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63, may be used as a route for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the out port 71.

Further, since the arrangement of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, and 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow path LM1 can also be arbitrarily set. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16 or the like). Even in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section in which the ball flows down along the path in the front view of the ball flowing down in the game area.

Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the player's field of view, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left and right center sides of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 in front view may be used.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illuminated substrate may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Further, the entire range of the illuminated substrate is not limited to the one hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illuminated substrate may not be shielded, and the light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is stopped may be alternately generated.

Further, by fastening the guide hole 733 formed in a stepped shape to a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to be close to or in contact with each other at different displacement loci and different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illuminated substrates is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the horizontal board unit 166 or the vertical board unit 167 of the light guide plate effecting means 160 may be configured by a plurality of illuminated boards. Further, the portion (left and right long portions) corresponding to the horizontally long groove portion 171a of the decorative means 170 is configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of illuminated boards, and is used as the intersection. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the light may be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illuminated substrates are used. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be arranged on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at a portion. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the irradiation direction of the light can be increased. Further, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality, the number of configurations may be reduced) regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two positions of the key device A130 has been described, but the number of such protrusions A133b (the number of formations) may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangements) may be increased to two or more. ..

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, the arrangement direction (direction, posture, phase) with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration is used as a reference. You may change the order of each. The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each configuration are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is on one side of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) (first connection wall portion A220 side). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction, and the operation wall portion A210 (second region) may be arranged. It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the third connection wall portion A240 side).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering portion A270) connects the pair of protruding portions A133b (protruding portions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). , R direction) has been described, but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the operation wall portion A210 (orientation, phase). Prescribed as the arrangement direction (attitude, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the second region) and the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The key device A130 (covered portion A270) may be disposed in an arrangement direction (attitude, phase) having an angle (an angle greater than 0 ° and less than 90 °).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (covering portion A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order in which the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (guide wall A251), and the openings A260 (covered portions A270) are arranged in the reverse order of the arrangement of each of the above embodiments (that is, in order from the side closest to the first connection wall portion A220). ), Or the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. Will be).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the like. It may be formed in the site of. That is, it does not need to be formed on the lower portion of the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. As other parts, for example, a part forming the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, that is, the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, and the left wall part of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples thereof include A204 or the right wall portion A205, the back wall portion A301 of the box base A300, the upper wall portion A302, the lower wall portion A303, the left wall portion A304, or the right wall portion A305. Similarly, as other portions, for example, a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, or a third connection wall portion A240 is exemplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. It is preferable that the guide wall A251 is also provided on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 as the length dimension of the operation portion A122 is extended.

In each of the above embodiments, a recess is formed on the outer surface (front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the concave bottom surface of the recess is the operating wall portion A210 (that is, from the front wall portion A201). Although the case where the operation wall portion A210 is located at a lower position (on the side of the main control device A110) is not necessarily limited to this, the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200 is not necessarily limited to this. The portion that forms the protrusion and forms the protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be the operating wall portion A210 (that is, operated to a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (opposite to the main control device A110)). (Position the wall portion A210).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main control device 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 have been described. The stored items are arbitrary as long as the controls are operated through the openings. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a stored object has, for example, a connecting portion connected to an opening / closing lid that opens / closes a discharge port for discharging the ball from the flow path of the ball, and the opening / closing lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. A member (structure, device) for opening and closing is exemplified.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a push button switch and a key operation type selector switch are adopted as the operation means (switch device A120, key device A130) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types are not necessarily limited. The operation means of may be adopted. Examples of other types of operating means include tactile switches, rocker switches, DIP switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the controls (operation unit A122, key A140) is push-in and rotation has been described, but the operation mode is not necessarily limited to this, and is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is operably arranged through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in each of the above embodiments). Other modes of operation include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (eg, a mode in which the operation buttons are displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends, like the operation buttons of a rocker switch), tilting (eg, toggle). An embodiment in which the operating lever is displaced so as to tilt to one side with the proximal end side as a fulcrum, such as an operating lever of a switch) is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the operator, the direction connecting both ends of the operator that is displaced by the seesaw, and the tilting direction of the tilting operator are the longitudinal directions (arrows L and R directions) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operating means.

In any of the above-mentioned operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is formed only in the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the actuator (the region necessary for allowing the displacement). Is also good.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by a finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the key A140 or the key device A130 is not necessarily subjected to an external force, and at least one of the surface or the end surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portion A272, A2272 (annulus). It may be configured to be in contact with the portion A272a or the outer edge of the square portion A272b). That is, at least one of the face or the end face of the key A140 in the off position or the on position to be gripped by the finger is in contact with the end face wall portion A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

The surface and end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by the fingers and the gap between the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the gaps and the gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the upright wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the tilt of the key device A130 to be tolerated). That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the above gaps is eliminated (the key A140 or the key device A130 is abutted) before reaching an angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off or be damaged or the solder is peeled off. .. The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, still more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one place or at three or more places. Further, when they are formed at two or more places, their circumferential positions (phases) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be continuously formed in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are projected outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is projected inward in the radial direction from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protrusion is radially inward on the outer surface of the base A133a of the key device A130. A recessed portion may be provided so that the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is made continuous up to the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base A133a so that the covering portion A270 can be put on the key device A130 (the protrusion is inserted into the recess) (protrusion). An opening for inserting the portion into the recess may be formed on the end face).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in addition, the ridge A251 is connected to the guide wall A251. May be concatenated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where two ridges (first ridge A211 and second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of such ridges is not necessarily limited to this. It may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of pieces, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect the other ridges to positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212, the cross-sectional shape of the other ridges, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the erecting dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210). ) And the width dimension (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the height direction of the cross-section disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end face shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a shape in which these are combined. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and whichever is larger may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (the vertical dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210) is along the extending direction. However, the case is not limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be gradually lowered as it is separated from one end connected to the covering portion A270. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the on position and the off position) of the key A140 is set to 90 ° has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) are not necessarily limited to this. Phase difference) may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end face wall portion A272) corresponds to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (the region required to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing the displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion of the key A140 on the other side (opposite to one side) of the center of rotation is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed in a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of gyration of a portion on one side of the center of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by a finger)) and from the center of rotation. Also explained the case where the radius of gyration of the other side is different, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the radius of gyration (from the center of rotation to the end face (grasped with a finger)) on one side and the other side. The distance) to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may be openings having substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Examples of other front view shapes include a substantially square, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape having a pentagon or more, and a shape in which these are combined.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a form in which the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 is along the arrows U and D directions).

In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is a connection wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion). A240) has been described, and the rest of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but the present invention is not limited to this. The entire outer edge of the operating wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connecting wall portion.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. However, the operation wall portion A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 does not match the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (guide wall A251) and the openings A260 (covered portions A270) are arranged in substantially series (substantially one row) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include staggered arrangements, arrangements dispersed in non-regular positions, and arrangements in a grid pattern (arrangements at intersections of a plurality of straight lines orthogonal to each other). Further, when arranged in substantially series (substantially one row), the series direction may be arranged to be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portions A210 (box covers A200, A3200), and the arrangement may be substantially orthogonal to each other. It may be.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are not necessarily limited to this. One or more protrusions or ridges (ribs) may be erected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F).

In this case, the ribs (for example, the portions formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining the cross-sectional shape of a substantially semicircle or a substantially rectangular shape) are the end face walls in the front view (arrow B direction view). A form extending radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axial center of the peripheral wall portion A271) is preferable. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, even if the key A140 engages with the edge of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the extraction direction (arrow F direction) of the key A140 when the key A140 is pulled out. This is because the rigidity of the ribs can be used to prevent damage to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272.

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape in the front view continuous in the circumferential direction. A plurality of such ridges (ribs) may be arranged at different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). Although the case of being located on the separated side) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and another standing wall A208, A280, A290 may be retracted.

Further, the amount of retreat of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Further, the amount of retreat may change in the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 of 1.

In this case, it is preferable that the amount of retreat of the erecting tip surface from the reference surface is smaller as the erecting wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The area farther from the fastening hole A206a of the printed circuit board A119 is separated from the abutted erection wall when the erection wall is abutted by the amount that the regulation by the screw ASC is weaker than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. The degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened due to deformation (displacement) in the direction in which the printed circuit board A119 is formed. This is because it is possible to easily secure the close contact between the vertical tip surface of the vertical wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the vertical walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the fastening hole A206a (the erection wall A280, the erection wall A290, and the erection wall A208) (in this order). Since the distance from the erection wall A209) becomes longer, the amount of retreat from the above-mentioned reference plane is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erection tip surface of the erection wall A208). The amount of retreat from the reference plane is minimized).

Further, also in each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above may be changed as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erection tip surface of the erection wall A208, A209, A280, A290 of 1 may be configured to be an inclined surface with respect to the front wall portion A201 of the box covers A200, A3200, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode has been described, but the setting value is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of this. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84.

Further, the set value may not be displayed on any of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before the activation, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. The configuration may be such that the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to prevent the set value from being illegally acquired by an illegal means (for example, a means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 by a hidden camera installed in the hall). Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the set value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although the description is omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the center of rotation) is provided, and the inner frame 11 is provided with the inner side. When it is detected by the first detection sensor that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is permitted, and the inner frame 12 has a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the release (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be invalidated). .. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Further, a second detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational position centered on the rotation axis A410) is provided, and the board box A100 is provided with respect to the inner frame 12. When the second detection sensor detects that the A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). The input from A130 is invalidated), and if the opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is made. It may be configured to be acceptable. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are predetermined. When the opening (rotation) beyond the angle is not detected by the second detection sensor, the above-mentioned setting change may be allowed. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch in which the mechanical detection unit is displaced as the machine opens and closes.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main control device A110. That is, at least if the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected). , Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be allowed. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed by the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed by the 7-segment display of the main control device A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. If the predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, it is disconnected regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected, it is disconnected. However, even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, when a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110). It may be configured so that the setting change is prohibited. Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, as a predetermined electrical connection line, a payout control device 111 is exemplified. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being operated illegally and paying out the game ball.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ridge A2273 is extended in a streak shape has been described as a form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at a predetermined interval between the position AP1 including the position AP2 and the position AP5 and the position AP6. Alternatively, the ridge A2273 may be formed intermittently between the position AP1 including the position AP2 to the AP5 and the position AP6.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or a plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the position AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. .. Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 to have a second position (a position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010), FIG. 122 ( Although the case of being arranged in b)) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the board box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrow L, R direction) with respect to the inner frame 12, and slide displacement in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (arrow L direction). By doing so, the rotation axis A410, which is a form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position, is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrows F and B directions) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis is formed. An example is a mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) with the A410 as the center of rotation.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotary shaft A4410 is formed on each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one or both rotary shafts A4410 may be formed. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, a split body of the rotation shaft A4410 is formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300, and the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300. A4410 may be formed.

The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotary shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotary shaft A410 is formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. May be. Further, as in the case described above, one rotation shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 in a state of being connected to the box base A300.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine comprising an action means and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by being acted upon by the action means, and including an auxiliary means configured so that the displacement mode of the displacement means has a plurality of modes. A1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of a liquid crystal display area and has a displacement means that is displaced when a driving device such as a motor is driven (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be complicated by the function of the auxiliary means in which the auxiliary means has a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and it is possible to keep the player's attention in a high state.

The specific examples of the auxiliary means are not limited in any way. For example, a box-shaped space-constructing means that constitutes a space in which the displacement means can be displaced may be used, or the displacement means may be displaced by a drive device different from the acting means and the displacement means may be pushed to change the displacement mode of the displacement means. It may be a means. Further, the driving device of the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the acting means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating means can be configured to have a first state in which the first acting unit can act on the displacement means and a second state in which the second acting unit can act on the displacement means. A2 game machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the part when the acting means acts on the displacement means can be different, so that even if the movement of the acting means at the time of action is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be different.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, the operating means is provided with a contacting means that abuts against the displacement means to apply a load, and is configured to be capable of generating a load in a plurality of types via the abutting means. A3 game machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of loads generated via the abutting means, so that the displacement modes of the displacement means can be set to a plurality of types.

In the game machine A3, the contacting means is configured to be displaceable and is configured to be able to contact the first contacting portion which is configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the first contacting means which is configured to be able to contact the displacement means. A second contact portion different from the portion is provided, and the angle in a predetermined direction between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangent line of the first contact portion) is the above. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is configured to be different from the angle in the predetermined direction view between the displacement direction of the abutting means and the second abutting portion (or the tangent line of the second abutting portion).

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be changed without changing the displacement direction of the contacting means, so that there are a plurality of types of displacements of the displacement means. Can occur in the direction of.

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent line drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion so that the tangent lines parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement means can be loaded in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means is displaced with less energy loss. Can be made to. As a result, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating means configured to be able to generate a load for displacing the acting means is provided, and the load generating means loads at a position where the displacement means are arranged closer. The gaming machine A6, which is configured to generate the above-mentioned.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the acting means is supported in a support mode that allows a posture change, and the posture change occurs on the side where it is easy to maintain a balance of arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means. A7 game machine featuring the above.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by the posture change of the acting means, so that the overload is locally applied to the acting means. It can be avoided to occur.

The cause of the change in posture of the means of action is not limited at all. For example, it may be generated by the balance of the load from the displacement means, or a drive device for changing the posture of the acting means may be provided. When the posture of the acting means is changed by the balance of the load from the displacement means, it is easy to change the posture of the acting means by providing multiple lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the acting means. It is possible to generate multiple types of displacement.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guiding means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and the guiding means can guide the displacement of the displacement means in one direction. The first guide portion and the second guide portion capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in another direction are provided, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion are surfaces facing the displacement means. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the formation mode of the above is different.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the operating means is configured to be displaceable, and the arrangement of the acting means is configured to change the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means at a position where the balance of the displacement means can be easily maintained. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it can act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

The gaming machine A10, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement means comprises one or more members, which are configured not to be coupled to each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and formed into a mass. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the members.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the posture of the displacement means can be stabilized when the displacement means is arranged in the acting means.

The method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making a hole in the member may be used.

<Changes due to advancing and retreating means that advance and retreat to the displacement range of the displacement means>
An arrangement means configured to be displaceable in a predetermined range and an advancing / retreating means configured to be displaceable in an advancing / retreating direction with respect to the range are provided, and the advancing / retreating means enters the predetermined portion of the range to reach the range. The gaming machine B1 is configured so that the width of the machine can be changed, and the width can be changed in a plurality of types.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine including a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members due to the displacement of the first movable member. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing / retreating means is configured with a plurality of types of changing modes of the width of the range when entering the range, the displacement modes of the arranging means can be configured with a plurality of types. The displacement mode of can be improved.

The mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular effect member formed from a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

Further, the method of configuring the mode of changing the width of the range due to the displacement of the advancing / retreating means by a plurality of types is not limited at all. For example, the approach side portion of the advancing / retreating means may be formed by an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion having a different width to enter the range, or the displacement width of the advancing / retreating means may be changed to change the range. The width of may be variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent entry and exit of the arrangement means, and is configured to be variable, and the advancing / retreating means enters in the unchanged state of the range. The gaming machine B2 is configured to be displaceable in an embodiment, and the box-shaped means is provided with an open portion formed so that the advancing / retreating means can be inserted and the arranging means cannot be inserted.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the advancing / retreating means can enter the range through the open portion, while the displacement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

The arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged in a place where the arrangement means is difficult to reach. In this case, the possibility that the placement means accidentally falls out of the range can be further reduced. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a place where a load from the arrangement means is unlikely to occur (for example, the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent the load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing / retreating means during the displacement, obstructing the displacement of the advancing / retreating means, or causing a defect in the advancing / retreating means or the arranging means.

2.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make the player appear as if the arranging means is guided in different directions by the same advancing / retreating means. As a result, the types of effects can be increased, so that the effect of effects using the arrangement means and the advancing / retreating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancing / retreating means is configured such that the gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range is shorter than the width length of the arranging means in the state of entering the range. A gaming machine B4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even when the arranging means is arranged on the side far from the advancing / retreating means, the advancing / retreating means is used as the arranging means in the entered state. Can act.

In addition, it may be configured so that there is no gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range. Further, it may be configured so that there is a gap in a part and there is no gap in the other part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing / retreating means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the approach side, the representative tip portion farthest from the axis is said. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gap between the range and the range is minimized.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion, which tends to have the largest misalignment from the axis, first enters the range so as to enter the range from the axis. It is possible to deal with misalignment at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce the resistance of subsequent approach movements.

The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined overhanging portion, and is formed so as to incline toward the side retreating from the range as the distance from the overhanging portion is along the axial direction. Pachinko machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the arranging means can be displaced so as to be away from a predetermined overhanging portion in the approaching process of the advancing / retreating means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion in the axial direction.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing / retreating means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion. It is possible to secure the placement location of.

Various aspects are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is opened. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is opened before the advancing / retreating means enters, or the shape may be such that the range side is opened when the advancing / retreating means has entered.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a driving means capable of generating a driving force and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the advancing / retreating means are provided, and the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means are provided. The driving force is transmitted by abutting, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means can be changed, and the contact area is the entry of the advancing / retreating means into the range. The gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured to be maximum at the initial stage and then decrease.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry where a large load is likely to occur when the advancing / retreating means starts to come into contact with the arranging means. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load applied per unit area of the contact surface. Thereby, the durability of the advancing / retreating means and the transmitting means can be improved.

The mode of the advancing / retreating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means of displacing outside the game area or a means of displacing inside the game area.

<Synchronously operate the two members with the transmission cam>
The transmission means includes a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or a plurality of members, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means. The first transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first target portion of the displacement means in the first aspect, and the displacement means in the second aspect different from the first aspect. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a second transmission unit configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second target unit.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is a drive device used for displacement of the displacement means, and includes a first drive device for moving the displacement means up and down and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-20210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the first drive device and the second drive device are synchronized and the plurality of displacement means are displaced in order to execute the operation effect of the displacement means, the drive timing is deviated. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be ruled out and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a first transmission unit and a second transmission unit are arranged in the transmission means, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. Since it is configured, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

The time when the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneously transmitted) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, it is preferable to arrange the driving force so that at least a part of the driving force is generated in the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to utilize its own weight for driving force transmission.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first target portion and the driving force transmission to the second target portion are configured to occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by suppressing the maximum value of the driving resistance to a low value.

Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force, or as a load transmission generated by the displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Is also good.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The displacement locus is configured to partially intersect, and the first member is configured to be able to abut on the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the abutted state, the first member is interposed via the first member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that a driving force can be transmitted to a second member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, a case where the driving force is directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member can be configured.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member can be retracted to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to prevent the first member being displaced from coming into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs in a state where the first member arrives at a predetermined arrangement and is stopped, so that the mode of transmitting the driving force to the second member can be smoothly switched. Can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. It is possible to avoid unintended collisions or contacts of each member.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the second member is provided with an urging means configured to be able to urge the second member in a predetermined direction, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction that opposes the urging force. A gaming machine C6, wherein the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined direction with the second member arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to form a timing in which the second member is displaced against the urging force and a timing in which the second member is fastened against the urging force due to the displacement of the transmission means.

In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is configured such that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmitting portion of the transmission means is displaced toward the predetermined direction side. ..

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, a part of the load required for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the urging force can be used as an auxiliary.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission unit can form a non-contact state that is non-contact with the second member, and in the non-contact state, the displacement of the second member. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so as not to interfere with the second transmission unit.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member is a displacement state pushed by the second transmission unit and a displacement state separated from the second transmission unit. And can be configured.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from the contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means to be in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulatory section that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmitting means via the first member is blocked by the regulating unit to reach the driving means. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

The mode of the regulatory unit is not limited in any way. For example, a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to the slide displacement by restricting the displacement may be used, or a shaft branch portion that limits the displacement to the rotational displacement may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives a first state of being displaced or stopped by receiving the driving force of the driving means, and a load from the second target portion. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the state can be changed in the second state of being displaced or stopped.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<The load transmission is cut off by limiting the generation of the load when it is far away>
A gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, and a contact with the displacement means. A first means configured to be able to change the state between a state and a non-contact state that is non-contact with the displacement means is provided, and an object for transmitting a load given from the outside to the first means is switchably configured. The gaming machine D1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine in which a displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by the driving force of the driving means can come into contact with another movable body at the displacement end position (upper end position) and receive a load. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacement means, and the state of the driving means by control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) and Since there is a possibility that the state of the driving means may differ from the actual state, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

Further, it is conceivable that the operating resistance of the drive means may be unstablely increased or decreased due to the load applied to the drive means, and the deterioration of the drive means may be accelerated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, so that the drive state of the drive means can be stabilized. Further, by suppressing the unstable increase / decrease in the operating resistance of the drive means, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

The method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed at the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means (for example, the first means receives an external force) that causes the load may be the displacement of the first means. It may be configured to occur only in the non-contact state.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side in the gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face the opposite side.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an arrangement means that is arranged so as to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured so that the transmission means and the displacement means occur in a non-contact state. A gaming machine D3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-contact state of the transmitting means and the displacement means, so that the load transmission is performed between the transmitting means and the displacement means. It can be blocked.

The collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means or may occur in the non-contact state. When the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be blocked, so that the arrangement of the transmission means (presence or absence of contact between the transmission means and the displacement means) ), The load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load generated by the contact (the contact portion). The gaming machine D4 is characterized by being flexibly configured to the extent that it can be deformed.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be abuttable, and the second means of at least one of the first means or the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the contact portion is formed of a shock-absorbable material.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is provided with an urging means for urging the displacement means, and the standby position of the displacement means is set at the end of the displacement range in the urging direction of the urging means. The gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to prevent the standby position of the displacement means (the position waiting for the load generation from the transmission means) from shifting. 1 It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the means and the displacement means are separated from each other. Thereby, the driving means can be easily and appropriately controlled.

Further, by reducing the degree of freedom in arranging the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to prevent the first means and the displacement means from inadvertently coming into contact with each other.

A gaming machine D7, wherein in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the first means is allowed to change its posture due to a collision of the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging means can be used to change the posture of the first means, so that the load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the urging force of the urging means. The urging state to be received and the transmission means are in contact with the displacement means, and the displacement means is displaced to the opposite side in the direction of the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the state can be changed between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the means is invalid and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6 or D7, a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease of posture change with respect to a collision of the arranging means) can be configured.

<Conditionally regulate one of the forward and reverse rotations>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable by a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point at which the displacement mode changes, and there are a plurality of types from the reference position. The gaming machine E1 is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the above-described embodiment.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable accessory to perform different operations in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, different operations correspond to the presence or absence of switching of the drive direction of the drive device, so that the type of effect can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the effect to be executed from now on. Since the player can predict about the above, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the effect to be executed from now on by the discriminating involvement means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, different effects may be produced in which the displacement means is displaced between the correct effect and the displacement effect. In this case, if the displacement means of the displacement means is displaced to a predetermined position in the same manner, the displacement from the predetermined position occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated), and it is possible to know whether or not the displacement means is correct. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the displacement is correct even if the displacement occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The gaming machine E1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force for displacement of the displacement means and a regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means, and the driving means generates the driving force in the regulating means. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a non-existent state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be muted when the displacement means is regulated. It can be difficult to determine whether it is in the opposite direction.

Further, unlike the case where the driving force continues to generate the driving force when the effect for a long time (long reach or the like) is executed with the displacement of the displacement means regulated, it is possible to suppress the heat generation of the driving means.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the regulating means is displaced to a position where the displacement means can be acted upon by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of arranged driving means can be reduced as compared with the case where the driving means for driving the regulating means is separately provided.

A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is provided with a discrimination-involvement means configured to have a section in which it is difficult to determine which aspect of the plurality of modes is displaced. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to configure the discriminating means so that it is difficult to discriminate the displacement mode of the displacement means in the predetermined section. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of displacement of the displacement means up to now, which is difficult to determine the displacement mode, as compared with the case where the displacement mode is difficult to discriminate only in.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section of the gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. This makes it possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being discovered from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the drive means before notifying the result.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detecting means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means is provided, and the detecting means determines the switching of the feasible displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. The gaming machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used in combination, so that the detection sensor can be used. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<A sense of unity of multiple members>
In a gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are displaceable, the mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. The gaming machine F1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the first member and the second member, which are configured to be displaceable, to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacements of the first member and the second member occur on the same straight line, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member will revert after contacting each other depending on the speeds close to each other. Yes, it can look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different. For example, the displacement modes of the first member and the second member are not set to be close to each other on the same straight line, but the directions of the first member and the second member are changed so as to approach each other after the proximity on another straight line. It is possible to avoid reversion and facilitate the maintenance of the effect mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for abutting each other, and the first member and the second member The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the postures in the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the gaming machine F1 or F2 includes a load generating means capable of generating a load toward the side that maintains the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a certain direction or a load having a certain size. For example, when the load that is easily received (for example, an effect mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (for example, the gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Further, it is not necessary that the load generated by the load generating means is always generated. For example, the generation of the load and the elimination of the load may be switched according to the change of the above-mentioned situation. The load generating means may be an external one.

The gaming machine F3 includes a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is the displacement. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being integrally configured with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be appropriately maintained, and the timing is deviated. It is possible to prevent the load from being generated.

Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least a part of the first member comes into contact with the second member.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily execute an effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than a predetermined state.

A gaming machine F7, wherein in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate a load at a plurality of places with respect to the first member or the second member.

According to the gaming machine F7, in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of places, the load is not limited to the maintenance of the state with respect to the displacement in one direction. , It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against a change in posture. As a result, even when the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid conspicuous misalignment.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded portions are the first loaded portion and the first loaded portion thereof. A second loaded portion having a larger displacement with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion is provided, and the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be gradually applied to the first member or the second member. Further, the roles of the loads given to the first loaded portion and the second loaded portion can be separated. For example, the first loaded portion can be used in the role of arranging the first loaded portion at a predetermined position, and the second loaded portion can be used in the role of adjusting the posture.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, in the load generating means, the portion that applies a load toward the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is the first member as compared with the other parts. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the pick-up length of the facing surface facing the second member is formed to be long.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the hanging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, for the other portion, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved, and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the gaming machine F10 is characterized in that the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other. ..

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load generated in the assembling work. That is, since it is easier to avoid load transmission between the first member and the second member as compared with the case of assembling in the contact state, it is possible to assemble the first member and the second member without any loss. can.

As a result, the contact surface as designed can be provided on the first member and the second member, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a misalignment is likely to occur due to a load by the load generating means such as when a gap is generated. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling states of displacement means>
The gaming machine G0 includes a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, and the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to enable a displacement composed of a change in arrangement and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means arranged at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, the posture of the displacement means is due to the need to provide a gap to secure the displacement. There was a problem that the countermeasures against the change were not sufficient and there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the posture change of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. As a result, even when the space where the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid a collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting may be performed with a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, etc.) as the axis, or horizontal swing may be performed with the straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.) as the axis.

The gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the acting force for suppressing a posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means can be changed according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the space for arranging the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the effect of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means reciprocates, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, when the displacement means itself is displaced by expansion / contraction or rotational displacement due to the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse, so that the driving force generation position. By increasing the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine G0 or G1, the gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to support the displacement means by a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0 or G1, the displacement means is supported by a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, so that the displacement means is prevented from tilting. It can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the operating means includes an auxiliary supporting means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main supporting means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the displacement means is supported by three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line by the main support means and the auxiliary support means. Posture changes can be suppressed in all directions.

In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means also functions as a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding the displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that the area in a predetermined direction is increased or decreased, and the acting means is configured so that the acting force generation position is maximized at the displacement end position of the displacement means. The gaming machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , The change in posture of the displacement means can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement. Therefore, if the position where the acting force is generated is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases. , The problem that the drive device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by configuring the position other than the displacement end position to reduce the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to prevent the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid increasing the size of the drive device.

<Wiring guidance for propeller unit>
The displacement means, the electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and the electric wiring displacement means configured to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring are provided, and the displacement means is the predetermined portion of the electrical wiring displacement means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is configured to be displaceable on the side avoiding the displacement means when the displacement is made toward the side approaching.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member linked to the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). See publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring for the purpose of avoiding contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, and it is more difficult than the displacement termination of the displacement means. Since a space for arranging the electric wiring is required on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the predetermined portion of the electric wiring can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacement means by the electric wiring displacement means, the contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring is positive. Since it can be avoided, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

It should be noted that the case where the displacement means approaches a predetermined portion is not limited in any way. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there may be a risk of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be closer than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least the first direction and the second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in the first direction and the third direction orthogonal to the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid that the displacement amount of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction is limited to the electric wiring.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set to be in the direction along the predetermined directional view. The effect on the appearance can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the stopping means for stopping the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion is provided, and the electric wiring displacement means is the said. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured so as to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

The configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the stopping means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

In the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means, the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. As a result, the capacity of the electrical wiring of the stopping means can be increased, so that the displacement amount of the displacement means that compensates for the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement means is integrally configured with the displacement means, and includes a corresponding changing means for changing the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. The gaming machine H6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the corresponding changing means.

<Flower path of a sphere through which an electric chew is passed>
A game area and a flow-down means for flowing down a game ball discharged from the game area are provided, and the flow-down means is characterized by including a section configured so that the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. Pachinko machine I0.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the base plate constituting the gaming area is formed of plywood (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate and the player cannot visually recognize the gaming ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if he / she does not pay attention to the discharge timing, he / she may suddenly get the impression that the game ball has disappeared from the game area.

In addition, even if attention is paid to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning opening and the out opening are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out opening, the winning opening is used. It may be mistaken for a ball that has entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility of distrust that the prize ball is not paid out. That is, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming ball from the gaming area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the flow-down means is configured to include a section in which the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area can be visually recognized, so that the player visually observes the gaming ball flowing down in the section. This makes it possible to confirm how the gaming balls are arranged from the gaming area. This makes it possible to improve the discharge of the game ball from the game area.

The discharge of the game ball from the game area means the whole aspect in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through the prize ball opening, or may be discharged through the out port without the prize ball.

In the game machine I0, a game ball that has flowed down the game area is arranged so as to be able to pass through, and a profit-giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball is provided. The means are arranged above the profit-giving means and on the downstream side of the first component, which is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side approaching the profit-giving means, and the profit. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a second component portion configured to be able to guide the gaming ball to a side away from the profit-giving means on the upper side of the granting means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flowing means, the player can grasp how the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area, and at the same time, the player can grasp it. It is possible to prevent the gaming ball from approaching the lower profit-giving means. As a result, the game ball that has already been discharged from the game area and the game ball that is still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit-giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. You can try to do it.

The predetermined profit is not limited in any way. For example, the prize ball may be paid out, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol and the second symbol may be performed, or other profits may be used.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1, the attention means formed inside the gaming area and the frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means are provided, and the flow-down means has the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to flow down to the inward side of the means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing means allows the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player paying attention to the means of interest. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the means of interest, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has been discharged from the game area.

The means of interest is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means in which a pattern is variablely displayed, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a drive means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

In the game machine I2, the flow-down means is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to extend the period in which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the means of interest.

<Ingenuity around the board design and light guide plate>
The predetermined substrate is provided with a predetermined substrate provided with light emitting means and the placed means arranged on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction view, and the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined direction view. The gaming machine J0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light emitting means is arranged so as to be smaller than the visible area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated board having a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a game area on the front surface, and the plate surface of the illuminated board and the plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There are gaming machines in which the LEDs are arranged substantially in parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the area of the illuminated substrate that can be visually recognized in the front view is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate is irradiated with the LED light, the visible area is illuminated. There is a possibility that the decorative board may enter and the decorative member and the illuminated board may be visually recognized as overlapping in the front and back.

Only the configurations necessary for functions such as circuits and resistors are arranged on the surface of the illuminated circuit board, and the design is not usually high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illuminated board overlap each other and are visually recognized, the appearance is poor and the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the effect of the predetermined substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, since the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light, at least the predetermined substrate is predetermined. It is possible to form an area where only light can be visually recognized without overlapping with the substrate. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the predetermined substrate.

The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited in any way. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding it, or the visible area may not be visible by being totally shielded.

The optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be oriented in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be oriented in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. It may be something that can be done.

The light transmission of the arrangement means is not limited in any way. For example, the light transmission may be configured to be good, the light transmission may be configured to be low, or the degree of light transmission may be changed for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means is provided on both sides of the predetermined substrate and includes a plurality of direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, and is between the plurality of direction changing means. In addition, a low transmittance means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means is arranged, and the predetermined substrate is characterized in that at least a part thereof is arranged inside the low transmission means in a predetermined direction view. The gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. This makes it possible to narrow the visible range of the predetermined substrate.

The means for changing the direction is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a drive device, a game area or a flow path through which a game ball flows, a case member or a decorative member to be fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the low transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion constituting the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means can be mixed with the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The shape of a predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, or it may be a bone that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the outer peripheral portion of rotation. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, the title logo).

A gaming machine J3, wherein in any of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the predetermined substrate is arranged with the end face of the plate facing in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, the area of a predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction can be minimized.

The gaming machine J3 includes a display means for executing a display effect that can be visually recognized in a predetermined direction, and a gaming area arranged in front of the display means. The predetermined board includes a display area of the display means and the display area. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a gaming area in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined board at the boundary, light is emitted from the back surface of the gaming area to the front side, and unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board is used. It is possible to perform an effect of irradiating light on the pachinko machine or an effect of irradiating only the game area side with light.

In the gaming machine J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board constituting the gaming area on the front side.

According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the gaming board, for example, the light emitting means is arranged as compared with the case where the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the rear case where the movable accessory or the like is arranged. The degree of freedom can be improved.

Further, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the rear case through the back surface of the game board, the rear case side can be visually recognized from the window portion of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see the back of the game board without looking around in a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the electrical wiring.

Further, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the rear case, the space for arranging the predetermined board is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If there is, a predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of accessories at the time of shipment>
A displacement means and a limiting means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limiting means includes a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. The gaming machine K1 is configured to be state-changeable, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fixing and releasing the arrangement of the displacement means.

That is, while the gaming machine is configured to be able to operate normally after it is installed, the movable accessory can be fixed even in situations where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a measure to fix the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the cushioning material is suppressed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, in the case of a configuration in which the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the limiting means, so that the arrangement and the release of the displacement means can be improved.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is removed, since the limiting means is not removed, it is difficult to continue the game if the state is easily changed by an external force that may occur during the game. On the other hand, by configuring the limiting means to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect during the game.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be capable of changing the state between the first state and the second state when the power is off.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. This makes it possible to prevent the worker from becoming difficult in the power failure state and the recovery work from the power failure state.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes an urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is such that the operating portion is displaced by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operation unit is configured to change its state in accordance with the above, and the operating unit can be displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state, the operation unit is displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a separated position away from the ground.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at a position away from the reference position in the second state, it is given to the gaming machine after installation such as opening and closing the door. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiting means from occurring due to the external force that can be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing the state from the second state.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means constituting the displaceable region of the gaming machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit is arranged outside the area forming means, so that even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operating means. It is possible to prevent the displacement means from coming into contact with the operator.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, an urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means has a predetermined amount from the reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The limiting means is configured to change state with displacement, the limiting means includes a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the operating unit in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to secure a displacement allowable width (posture change width) of a portion.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the displacement of the operating means is configured to be possible in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction, so that the direction is directed toward the operating unit. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent the operation unit from being displaced in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation unit from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing its state due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating portion includes an engaging portion configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the urging means is arranged at the center of the operating portion, and the engaging portion is the operation. A gaming machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the section.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced with the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change from occurring by merely performing (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to an external force such as opening and closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipment, or the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back surface side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable by the support shafts on the left and right position sides, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shafts. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the clerk of the gaming hall opens the front door. It is possible to facilitate the operation when operating the control means. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width becomes large (opposite the support shaft), so that the operating position of the limiting means can be set to the front side.

In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area forming means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, the limiting means are arranged on the support shaft side, so that the operator who works with the front door open prevents accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

In addition, since the load applied to the limiting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced as compared with the case where it is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft, the limiting means is in a state due to the impact caused by the opening and closing of the front door. It can be prevented from changing.

A gaming machine K9 in any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, wherein in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the limiting means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the limiting means acts on the displacement means with the displacement guiding accuracy of the limiting means alone lowered. Can be improved.

The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that, when any of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is energized in the first state, the gaming machine K10 is provided with a preventive notification means for notifying the continuation of the energized state.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notifying means can notify the state of the limiting means to be switched from the first state.

The mode of notification is not limited in any way. For example, an error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, a notification sound may be output by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting means may be illuminated (or maintained in an extinguished state). You may notify by.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object includes an operating means disposed on the object and operably formed, and the accommodating body is formed with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means. The gaming machine L0 characterized by this.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the control board is provided with the operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

According to the gaming machine L0, an operating means arranged on an object and formed to be operable is provided, and an opening is formed in the accommodating body at a position corresponding to the operating means, so that the operating means can be provided through the opening. Can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the housing when operating the operating means. Therefore, the time and effort can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covered portions A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes an facing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes an facing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and being displaced by the operator, and the facing portion is at least in a range excluding the displacement locus of the operator on the first surface of the operating means. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is disposed so as to face a part thereof.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the facing portion is arranged so as to face at least a part of the first surface of the actuator except for the displacement locus of the actuator. , Foreign matter such as wire can be sent from the opening to the inside of the housing by the amount that the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator. It can be suppressed from being inserted.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which a base end is fixed and one end is free.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, so that the shape is simplified and the formability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that a protrusion is provided on the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, a protrusion is provided on the facing portion, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be increased and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

The protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

In the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion is projected from a surface of the facing portion on the side facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M4, the protrusion is projected from the surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, so that the facing portion and the operating means first. The gap between the surface and the surface can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing through the gap.

In the gaming machine M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means. By eliminating the gap between them, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

Further, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the facing portion is pushed in the insertion direction by the operating element when the actuator is inserted into the operating means, the facing portion in the insertion direction. Can be suppressed from being deformed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side of the facing portion from being damaged.

Since the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, the elastic deformation of the facing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusions are in contact with each other. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire).

A gaming machine M7, wherein in any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by inserting and displaceting an operator, and the facing portion has an edge portion abutting on the operating operator inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator laterally or carelessly opens and closes the member on which the housing is arranged. When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the portion connected to the object) becomes large. Further, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the actuator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operating means (the portion connected to the object) is large. Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. The operator (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) can be brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion to suppress tilting or excessive displacement of the actuator. As a result, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that a gap between the operating means and the covering portion is provided. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

Here, when the operating means is operated by inserting and displacementing the operator, when the operator inserted in the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly prepares the operator). When the operator is operated laterally or the member on which the housing is arranged is inadvertently opened and closed and the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also tilted and operated. The load on the root of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

The gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the outer shape of the operating means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion, so that the base end side of the operating means The gap between the and the covering can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the covering portion or the other of the operating means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the coverings or operating means comprises a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the coverings or operating means. Since the receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M11, the gaming machine M12 is characterized in that the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M12, the gaming machine M13 is characterized in that the accommodating body is erected from an inner surface thereof and includes a erection wall in which the erection tip abuts on the object.

According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M1 to M12, the accommodating body includes a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through an opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means. The gaming machine M14.

According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M13, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the path for entering the inside of the housing can be blocked. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and a surface for connecting the electronic components to the circuit of the control board by soldering is a side on which the operating means is arranged. Is a gaming machine M15 characterized in that it is set on the opposite surface.

According to the game machine M15, in addition to the effect of the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit of the control board by soldering is an operating means. Since it is set on the surface opposite to the side on which the solder is placed, it is easy to bring the erecting tip of the erecting wall into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the erecting wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the erecting wall can be reliably functioned as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts, and foreign matter such as a wire can be suppressed from being inserted into the inside of the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erection wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced.

According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erection wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced, so that the erection wall is brought into contact with the object. It is possible to increase the surface pressure at the standing tip to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted between the object and the standing tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M16, the erection tip of the erection wall is characterized in that the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing while improving the moldability. That is, by using a tapered surface, the shape change can be made gentle and the fluidity of the resin in the molding die can be ensured. On the other hand, when the erecting tip of the erecting wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be difficult to pass between the erection wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the accommodating body is formed with an outer surface on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is projected from two regions.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the housing is one from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion is projected from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the region covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the region that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and the region that abuts on the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing and the prevention of the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, and the opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the housing to reach the opening. The method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the accommodating body, the tip of the foreign substance such as the wire is brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion, and further. Can stop the progress of. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that regulates the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate box A100 (standing wall A280, A290) as an example>
The gaming machine L0 is characterized in that the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and the housing is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the operating means or the outer surface of the operating element. Gaming machine N1 to play.

Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator laterally or carelessly opens and closes the member on which the housing is arranged. , When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the accommodating body is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operator. It can be received and the displacement of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the housing is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object.

Here, if the accommodating body is configured to receive the displaced (tilted) operating means, the accommodating body may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the accommodating body is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object. Supports and can suppress deformation of the housing. As a result, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

At the same time, the support of the erecting wall suppresses the deformation of the housing, so that the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the erection wall can be tilted in any direction of the operating means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

In addition, the erect wall can block the route for entering the inside of the housing. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N3, the erection wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the accommodating body on which the erection wall is erected.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the erecting wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the accommodating body on which the erecting wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the accommodating body is increased. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the erection wall by utilizing the above, and it is possible to increase the rigidity of the entire housing by connecting the inner surfaces to each other. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) of the standing wall that suppresses the deformation of the housing when the operating means is tilted. As a result, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5, wherein in any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, the tilt of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes a ridge projecting from the outer surface thereof and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge is said. A gaming machine N6 characterized by being connected to a covering portion.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, and the housing is provided with a protrusion protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge can function as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means and the damage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, since the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the region covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the region that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and the region that abuts on the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing and the prevention of the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N6, the housing is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the accommodating body is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge. Therefore, the function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit can also be used for the ridge. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the operating means is operated by the operator being inserted into the first surface and displaced, and the accommodating means is operated. The body is provided with an facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body is an opposed portion facing the first surface of the operating body. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing.

Further, since the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means, the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) is placed on the edge of the facing portion. By contacting the portion, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operator. As a result, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is arranged so as to face at least a part of a range excluding the displacement locus of the operator in the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is arranged in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement locus of the operator in the first surface of the operator. Foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing by the amount that the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator. It can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to increase the area of the facing portion that abuts on the displaced operator so that excessive displacement of the operator (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be easily suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to the first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. The gaming machine N10 is characterized in that the child and the facing portion are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is the first position. The gaming machine N11 is characterized in that the operator and the facing portion displaced at two positions are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effect of the game machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion. Since the position to be moved is the position where the operator displaced to the first position or the second position and the facing portion come into contact with each other, the operator displaced to the first position or the second position hits the facing portion. It is possible to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other by using the ridges.

<About the concept of the invention using the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall portion A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the accommodating body has an outer surface formed on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. The gaming machine O1 characterized in that

Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the housing when operating the operating means. Therefore, the time and effort can be suppressed. However, there is a risk of fraudulent insertion of foreign matter such as wire through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the accommodating body has an outer surface formed on one side from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region is formed. Since the opening is formed in, the opening can be arranged at a position deep from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and a step (connecting surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This makes it possible to increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraud.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region. O2.

Here, the housing (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board). On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, the operability deteriorates. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily secure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing. .. However, when operating the operating means, the hand of the operator (operator) interferes with the step (connecting surface) between the first region and the second region, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a risk that the operability when operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region. In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second region can be expanded by the amount of the downward inclination, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine O2, the second region is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to one direction, and the operating means is operated. The gaming machine O3 is operated by inserting and displaces the child, and the posture of the operator when it is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is set to a posture along the other direction. ..

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the second region is a region having a substantially rectangular front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displaceting the operator, and the posture of the operator when it is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is set to be a posture along the other direction. A space can be secured on the side where the gripping surfaces face each other with the surface for gripping the child oriented in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the operator is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the finger holding the operator from interfering with the accommodating body. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is from the first region to the second. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is tilted downward toward an area.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is the second. Since it is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to prevent a finger different from the grasped finger from interfering with the container when the operator is gripped and displaced. For example, when the operator is gripped with the index finger and the thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region can be obtained. It can be secured as a space for moving the little finger side, and interference between the little finger side and the housing can be suppressed. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, so that the connection surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction is used for operation. The means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress interference with other members during manufacturing and prevent damage to the operating means. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening and prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing.

Further, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded by that amount, that is, in order to cope with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the enclosure can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. A gaming machine O6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connecting surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and a connecting surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped and operated (inserted into the operating means, pulled out from the operating means, or displaced (for example, rotation) of the operator), the grasped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) are used. The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing the fingers different from the above. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surface is the first. A gaming machine O7 characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to a region and the second region.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the like. Since the connection surface of the above is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, the accommodating body for dealing with heat dissipation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of inclining the connection surface downward. The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the volume of the internal space of the accommodating body by inclining the connecting surface downward.

In the game machine O4 or O5, a base body on which the accommodating body is arranged and a rotation axis that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotation axis. It is characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Game machine O8 to play.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effect of the game machine O4 or O5, a base body on which the accommodating body is arranged and a rotation axis that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is provided. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotation axis and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when operating the operating means in the space formed by rotating the base body around the axis of rotation, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing the operator's (operator) hand to access the operating means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, comprising a display device arranged in a gaming area and an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, the present invention relates to the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, a display device arranged in the game area and an operating means arranged in an object and formed to be operable are provided, and information on the operation of the operating means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operating state of the operating means based on the display of the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine P1, the housing is formed so as to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the accommodating body is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), so that the operability can be improved and the operation error can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state where the operating means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the accommodating body can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the accommodating body is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time. P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, the housing can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display of the display device. As a result, improvement of operability and suppression of operation mistakes can be achieved more reliably.

In the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operating means is arranged on a side farther from the pivotally supported position than the center of the housing.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the accommodating body is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operating means is arranged on the side farther from the axially supported position than the center of the accommodating body. In a state where the housing is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time, the operating means is positioned farther from the outer edge of the game machine main body. Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means are composed of a plurality of the operating means, and the second operating means having a higher operation frequency than the first operating means is on the side farther from the position where the axis is supported than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5, characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the operating means are composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means having a higher operation frequency than the first operating means is more than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the position where it is supported by the shaft, the operating means (first operating means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body when operating the operating means (first operating means) having a high operation frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, the gaming machine is provided with an operating means arranged and operably formed on the object, and one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that the operable or non-operability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the object.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in whether or not the operating means can be operated. That is, if the operation is allowed regardless of the connection state of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operating means may be easily operated illegally, while the connection of one or more electrical connection lines. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, the workability of the work associated with the operation of the operating means may be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, an operating means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operating means is changed according to the state, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable in the gaming machine Q1.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the accommodating body can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in a state where the operating means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when the accommodating body is displaced, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so that the operationability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in controlling fraud and improving workability.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connecting line among the electrical connecting lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if the other electrical connection lines are disconnected (pulled out) from the object, the operating means By allowing the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the containment body is formed to be displaceable, other electrical connection lines released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the containment body (that is, arrange it in an easy-to-operate manner) are attached to the accommodation body. After the displacement, for example, in order to allow the operation of the operating means, an extension wire is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection wire, and the other electrical connection wire released (pulled out) is provided. You can avoid the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connecting lines is disconnected from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections). Since the operation of the operating means is prohibited (unless the wire is connected to the object), it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated illegally.

In the configuration in which the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the accommodating body (that is, arrange it in an easy-to-operate manner) is attached to the accommodating body. After the displacement, for example, if an extension wire is interposed between the object and another electrical connection wire, and the other electrical connection wire that has been released (pulled out) is reconnected to the object, the operation can be performed. Since the operation of the means can be allowed, the work by the operation of the operation means is possible. <About the concept of the invention using the board boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, the accommodating machine is provided with an operating means arranged and operably formed on the object, and the accommodating body is formed displaceably and is arranged at the time of a game. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operating means can be easily operated rather than a position.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the gaming machine R1, the operating body is provided with an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, and the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position arranged at the time of the game. Since it can be displaced to a position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably pivotally supported, and the housing is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion as a rotation center.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the accommodating body is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion as the rotation center, so that the accommodating body is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine R3, wherein in the gaming machine R1 or R2, another member faces the operating means at a position where the accommodating body is arranged at the time of the game.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the housing is arranged at the time of the game, another member is faced with the operating means, so that the operating means is illegally operated. It can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operator, and in a state where the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the other member, whereby the operator is said to be in contact with the other member. The gaming machine R4, characterized in that the accommodating body cannot be displaced to a position where it is arranged during the game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacementing the operator, and when the operator is inserted, the operator hits another member. By being in contact with the container, it is impossible to displace the housing to the position where it is arranged during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from forgetting to remove it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being used illegally.

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 In any of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 A gaming machine X2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 In any of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine X3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (part of area construction means)
18 Hinge (part of support shaft)
19 Hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specific winning opening (part of profit-giving means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 Ball flow unit (part of flow means)
152 First receiving channel (1st component, 2nd component)
153 Second receiving flow path member (second component)
154 Protruding part (part of deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of the means of interest)
166 Horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 Decorative means (placed means)
171a Horizontal groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflective shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement control device (restriction means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guiding means)
183 Operation member (operation unit)
183f Engagement part 184 Coil spring (urging means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 Section member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-shaped means)
312 Curved plate part (first guide part)
314 Lower part of the back section (second guide)
315 Deformed penetration (open part)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of placement means)
362 Shaft part (Regulatory part)
410 Linear moving member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protrusion (second contact part)
414 Protruding part (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Cushioning member (second contact part)
430 Abutment member (part of displacement means, first member, regulating means)
432 Protruding part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, discrimination involvement means)
446 Transmission protrusion (first transmission part, contact part)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Closure member (part of action means, contact means, advancing / retreating means)
482 Overhanging part (representative tip part)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Rear case (part of area construction means)
630 Lower arm member (part of the means of action)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 Directing member (displacement means)
730 rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b 1st guided protrusion (1st loaded portion)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a Wall (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electrical wiring DK2b Lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of flow-down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, urging means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Board box (accommodation)
A110 Main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 switch device (operation means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b protrusion (first side)
A130 key device (operation means)
A133b protrusion (reception part)
A133c end (first surface)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (containment body)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposing part)
A211 1st ridge (ridge)
A212 2nd ridge (ridge)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 2nd connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 3rd connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 Opening A260 Opening A270, A2270 Covering part A271 Peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a Base (cover)
A271b Protrusion (bulging part)
A272, A2272 End face wall part (covering part, facing part)
A272a Annulus part (opposing part)
A272b Square part (opposing part)
A2273 ridge (protrusion)
A280, A290 Standing wall A280a, A290a Tapered surfaces A281, A291 First standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 2nd standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 3rd standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (containment body)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a gaming machine in which the base plate constituting the gaming area is composed of plywood (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-80178

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming ball from the gaming area. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the ejection of gaming balls from the gaming area.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a gaming area and a flow-down means for flowing down a game ball discharged from the gaming area, and the flow-down means is discharged from the gaming area. A section is provided so that the game ball can be visually recognized.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the discharge of the gaming ball from the gaming area.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in line XIIa-XIIA of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and an operating unit in the XIV-XIV line of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement control device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement control device. (A) is a rear view of the contact member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board and the operation unit in the line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a firing effect unit. (A) is a side view of the first light irradiation device in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 25. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and a launching unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of FIG. 36 (b). (A) is a plan view of the front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of a rear transmission member, a transmission arm member, and a lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of. It is a front perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a directing member. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a directing member. It is a front view of the function plate part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of the function plate part. It is a front view of the function plate part. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the effect member. It is a rear view of a directing member. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction view of the arrow LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction view of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 75 (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect member in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lateral slide member. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7. It is a perspective view of the wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of the path forming member of a wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIb-LXXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. It is a partial front enlargement view of the 1st decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit in the third embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and a launching unit according to a sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the substrate box in 7th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a board box. (A) is a front view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a rear perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover in the direction of arrow CXa of FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover in the direction of arrow CXb of FIG. 109. (A) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main control device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 112 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in the partial CXIII. (A) is a front view of the main control device in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), and (b) is a side view of the main control device in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114 (a). (C) is a side view of the main control device in the direction view of the arrow CXIVc of FIG. 114 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box in a state where the key is operated in the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box in a state where the key is operated in the on position. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box in the arrow CXVIa direction view of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box in the arrow CXVIb direction view of FIG. 115 (b). be. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. It is a figure. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of FIG. 115 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. It is a figure. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121 (a). (A) is a front view of the substrate box according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the substrate box in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of a pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back surface side (or front surface side).

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate which is provided with a rotating shaft at the lower end portion and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate is the game area and the first. By closing the space between the two winning openings 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) visible through the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, above. The middle and bottom three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

It should be noted that the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, left or right or below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 in the front view, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the front view of the first winning opening 64, or may be on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the game area.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second by "left-handed". You can also aim for the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that the first winning opening 64 cannot be aimed at by "right-handed", and the ball fired by "left-handed" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding a game property that changes the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 640.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a are provided in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening / closing drive and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. ..

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5 and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. In FIGS. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The rear case 510 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning convex portion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened to.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, window portion 60a opened in base plate 60 (see FIG. 90) can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 composed of a shape, a ball flow unit 150 configured to allow a ball discharged from a game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) launched toward the front side of a third symbol display device 81. It is configured by assembling a firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral edge portion is arranged and fixed facing the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the player can easily see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even when the ball flow-down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so that the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 can be visually recognized. .. In the present embodiment, the ball flow unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect of the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, a sticker member having low light transmission (or light transmission) may be attached.

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The firing effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 for partitioning the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is centered. It is possible to fire toward the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible to effectively make the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86 visually recognize the granular member 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the inner left and right portions of the rear case 510. Equipped with.

Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged at the position above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged at the left and right positions of the opening 511a on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, respectively. First, an outline of the operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. Note that FIG. 7 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 8 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the overhanging state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state. In FIG. 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the enlarged state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 10, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the effect standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect upper end state are illustrated. In FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state, and the displacement rotation on the right side. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the effect.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap each other in the front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state from the effect standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state can be executably controlled on condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 can be controlled. By controlling the state change from the effect standby state executably on the condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 overlap in a front view. Can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved (the front-rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be capable of downward displacement with the effect members 700 collectively arranged in one place, and is in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after the downward displacement. The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the above position, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognizable in the front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), are displaced ascending in a state of being collectively arranged at one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

The state change shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured so that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the effect standby state in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along the path curve S1 set by the mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc portion S1a having an arc shape centered on each center point C1 and an advancing / retreating path portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc portion S1a to the left, right, outside, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, while the right side. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

Therefore, when the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is controlled to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 11, the lateral slide member 840 is as if the third symbol display device 81. The player can visually recognize the player as if the player is rotationally displaced around the center point C1 arranged near the center.

That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of the effect of the effect using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the line XIIa-XIIA of FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 on the XIIIa-XIIIa line, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 on the XIV-XIV line of FIG.

Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the state in which the game board 13 is assembled to the front side of the operation unit 500 is shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 (see FIG. 2).

Further, FIGS. 12 (a) and 13 (a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12 (b) and 13 (b), the granular member 320 is launched and scattered. An example of the state is illustrated.

In the effect standby state shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the central portion of the collective arrangement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged above the section member 310 of the launch effect unit 300, and the section member is arranged. Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is visibly configured through 310.

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the effect member 700 is arranged close to the partition member 310 of the launch effect unit 300 and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is invisiblely shielded.

Since the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partition member 310, the launch effect unit 300 is set so as to execute the operation effect of firing the granular member 320 on the partition member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is launched by a path that ascends and inclines toward the front. , It is struck against the front wall portion of the partition member 310, and rises while bouncing within the range formed by the partition member 310.

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it were coming toward one's own side, so that the attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

Further, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the constituent members arranged in the game area such as the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) can be arranged. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of placement.

In other words, as a standby position of the granular member 320 to be launched toward the partition member 310 of the present embodiment, a position directly below the partition member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the firing effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the guide path for flowing the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. It becomes difficult, and there is a possibility that it will be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the partition member 310 at the frontmost position and arranging the standby position of the granular member 320 diagonally rearward, it is possible to secure a space on the back side of the first winning opening 64. The guide path of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first winning opening 64 cannot be freely arranged.

When the control to launch the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 12 (a), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the granular member 320 and the third symbol display device 81 scattered inside the partition member 310. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that is three-dimensionally displaced.

When the control to launch the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13 (a), as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the granular member 320 is scattered inside the partition member 310 and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It can be shown to the player in combination with the changes. In this case, for example, by matching the timing of scattering of the granular member 320 with the timing of displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 is on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 whose state changes. It is possible to visually recognize how the elements are scattered, and it is possible to enhance the power of the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

Here, as a method of producing the effect together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be considered.

However, as in the present embodiment, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is considered that the display is difficult to show and it is difficult to effectively produce the display.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partition member 310 that forms a range in which the granular member 320 that produces an operation in accordance with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult to show the granular member 320 to the player.

Further, by forming the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the case where the granular member 320 is made of a large member.

Therefore, even when most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be improved.

Further, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

That is, the displacement rotation unit 800 is in a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and is arranged in the same manner as the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (effect standby state, see FIG. 7). Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed depending on the state in which the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower end state of the effect, the upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11), the state can be changed according to the state. , The effect of combining the scattered granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 for visual recognition, and the effect of combining the scattered granular member 320 and the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 for visual recognition are executed. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can effectively produce the effect by scattering the granular member 320 according to the displacement of the mode in which the effect member 700 is dispersed, but the displacement rotation unit 800 can rotate. By scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the rotation of the pinnate member 854 arranged in the pinnate member 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the pinnate member 854 (the pinnate member 854 is so large that the air flow is generated). It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing it in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. Can also be used for.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the firing effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit There is a possibility of collision with 800.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advance / retreat path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid a collision between the launch effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the injection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 can be set. In addition to improving the degree of freedom of setting, it is configured to be able to be displaced upward beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the space between the effect member 700 and the section member 310 is arranged to such an extent that a space can be secured between the effect member 700 and the section member 310. Not considered. Therefore, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range during transportation so that the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 are not arranged in close proximity to each other.

It will be described back to FIG. The operating unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510. The displacement regulating device 180 is configured so that the state can be changed by manual operation from the back surface of the rear case 510, and regulates the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state to the downward displacement in the regulated state.

By adopting the displacement regulating device 180, even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped or transported.

More specifically, conventionally, the cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) is packed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. As a result, it may be possible to prevent the movable accessory from being displaced at the time of shipment or transportation. However, when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no penetration point for removing the cushioning material, so that the game board 13 and the back case 510 If the cushioning material is not disassembled, the cushioning material cannot be removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure, the displacement forming device 180 is adopted in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be changed between the regulated state of restricting the ascending / descending displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the deregulated state in which the regulation is released without releasing the fixing of the game board 13 and the rear case 510. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15 (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15 (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15 (c) is a front perspective of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a figure.

Note that FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) show the displacement regulating device 180 in the deregulated state, and FIG. 15 (c) shows the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state. As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the displacement regulating device 180 switches between the regulated state and the deregulated state by the cylindrical portion 183d appearing and disappearing from the contact member 181. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to extend to the inside of the rear case 510 and engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, which will be described in detail later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18A is a rear view of the contact member 181. 18 (b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18 (c) is a front view of the operation member 183.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 has a contact member 181 arranged in contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6) and a contact member arranged on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guide member 182, and an arrangement between the operation member 183 and the contact member 181. The operation member 181 is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 that is configured to be able to apply a urging force toward the back surface side.

As the operating member 183 is formed from a long, substantially elliptical shape on the left and right in the rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 that accommodate the operating member 183 also have a long, substantially elliptical shape on the left and right in the rear view. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right when viewed from the rear.

The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and for holding the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the back side. The wall portion is extended, and the insertion hole 181a is formed at the left and right ends and the fastening portion protruding from the rear case 510 is inserted, and the coil spring 184 is a double tubular shape that can be arranged in the gap on the back surface. It includes a tubular holding portion 181b projecting to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183.

The guide member 182 is an elliptical annular body extending in the front-rear direction along the outer circumference of the contact member 181 and a screw into which a fastening screw screwed into a fastening portion inserted into the insertion hole 181a is inserted. The insertion portion 182b, the fastening portion 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the abutting member 181 is screwed, the retaining portion 182d protruding inward in the radial direction at the rear end of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. It is provided with a ridge 182e projecting inward in the radial direction in the upper and lower inner portions in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 and can be held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled is limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side (the side covered by the back case 510) of the contact member 182. Therefore, when the displacement regulating device 180 is attached to the rear case 510, the fastening screw cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the rear case 510.

Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the rear case 510 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 182b from the rear side of the guide member 182, the rear side of the rear case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). It can be easily touched in (see), making it easy to remove the displacement limiting device 180 from the rear case 510.

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape in which the rear view outer shape is formed in an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 and the front side is opened, and the front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. A flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the center, a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d projecting cylindrically from the center of the bottom of the main body portion 183a to the front side, and a cylinder thereof. A position where the arc-shaped ridge portion 183e projecting to the front side in an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 around the portion 183d and the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181 can be engaged. It is provided with an engaging portion 183f which is projected from the above and is capable of constructing a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An oval-shaped sticker is attached to the back surface of the plate of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one end in the lateral direction (see FIG. 15A), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent mistakes in vertical posture during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operation member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by abutting with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

The flange portion 183b is formed larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 in the rear view, whereby the operating member 183 can be prevented from falling out of the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the abutting member 181 and the guide member 182.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the ridge 182e of the guide member 182, and has a role of smoothly performing the front-back displacement of the operation member 183. In the present embodiment, the ridges 182e are formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side, and the groove portions 183c are also formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side. This makes it possible to prevent erroneous assembly of the operating member 183 by mistake.

The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion inserted through the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be inserted into the central opening of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. In a state where the cylindrical portion 183d projects from the central opening of the abutting member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to regulate the vertical displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be shared by both the portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is arranged to face the large diameter side tubular portion of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped ridge portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portions, so that the load generation area can be increased and the load generation area can be increased locally. It is possible to prevent a load from being generated.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is formed not in a circular shape but in an arc shape in which the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 183f from being too far apart from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

The state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is urged to the back side by a coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed toward the front side against this urging force, it is composed of an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time the latch mechanism is pushed in at the minimum stroke or more on which the latch mechanism acts, the above-mentioned restricted state and the restricted state are switched alternately.

As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operating member 183 is the minimum described above by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10 not only when the operating member 183 is intentionally operated. If the displacement is increased by the stroke, the displacement regulating device 180 may unintentionally change its state.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is unintentionally changed due to an impact at the time of shipment or vibration during transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state (effect member 700). Is placed at the upper displacement end). When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13) and receives an impact at the time of shipment or vibration during transportation, the effect member 700 causes the effect member 700 to launch the partition member of the effect unit 300. There is a risk of collision with the 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (eccentric to the right) away from the position (center position) where the urging force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member is arranged. The gap between the groove 183c of the 183 and the ridge 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the posture of the operating member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operating member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement in which the operating member 183 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operating unit 500 will be described. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 is open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500, with FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). Is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the XXIa-XXIa line of FIG. 20.

Note that FIG. 21 (a) illustrates the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21 (b) illustrates the deregulated state of the displacement regulating device 180.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening / closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the operator can reach out by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is configured to be touched. Since this position is on the opposite side of the side (opening / closing tip side, right side) where the worker who works by opening the inner frame 12 enters, the worker unintentionally displaces the displacement regulating device when the inner frame 12 is opened. It is possible to avoid touching 180.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the above-mentioned latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load for pushing the operating member 183 is used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but also for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side portion moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side portion may not be sufficiently pushed in.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to push the forming portion of the latch mechanism pinpoint to cause the displacement required for the displacement regulating device 180, and the displacement is displaced. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulating device 180.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to restrict the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform the operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism with a pinpoint.

Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed occurs in a mode in which the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed to the pushing side. Therefore, as the pushing amount increases, the pushing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to regulate the displacement of the transmission gear 650. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction centered on the front-rear axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (front-rear direction) are orthogonal to each other, the operation member 183 applies a load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It is possible to prevent receiving. As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated even if the forming portion of the latch mechanism is not rigidly configured.

As described above, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state, the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained. Therefore, the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the time of transportation. For example, after installation in a gaming machine store, maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state at the time of maintenance.

That is, when the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 during the maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement control device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding with each other. Can be done.

If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched to the deregulated state by pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180. (See FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement regulating device 180 is released from the regulation by looking into the open tip side (right side). Explain that it is configured so that it can be confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 21A, in the restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged in front of the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the direction is viewed from the right side. The operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the state of deregulation of the displacement regulating device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged so as to project from the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 to the rear side. In the directional view looking from the right side, the operation member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

Therefore, as a confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, but the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly with respect to the outer frame 11. It can be confirmed that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the deregulated state by visually recognizing that the operating member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 in the direction view when the operation member 183 is opened and viewed from the right side.

In this embodiment, since the back case 510 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and the operating member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, the visibility of the operating member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case where the power is turned on with the cylindrical portion 183d inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A) will be described. .. In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the scaling unit 600 does not change its state during the operation when the power is introduced. It is determined from the output of, and the position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

By showing this position detection error display to the clerk of the gaming machine store, it is possible to make them aware that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not be changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued by using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement / reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. Can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, the operating member 183 is configured to be inoperable to be pushed in while the power is turned on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation member 183 may be configured to be operable even while the power is turned on.

Further, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the push-in operation may be disabled due to the friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the plate of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in the front-rear direction to limit the displacement of the operating member 183.

As a different situation, an example of a case where the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a gaming machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 coincides with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front-rear direction.

For example, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 8) during maintenance, the displacement regulating device 180 changes to the regulated state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, when the driving force is generated after the maintenance and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by displaying an error (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. It is possible to notify the clerk of the gaming machine store that this is the case, but the details will be described later.

Thereby, even if a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is not separately provided, the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted to determine the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

The operation of the displacement regulating device 180 can be performed before or after assembling the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 to the inner frame 12, so if possible, displacement regulation before assembling to the inner frame 12. It is preferable to operate the device 180.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. These effect devices will be described in order from the launch effect unit 300.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the firing effect unit 300, the partition member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of superimposing the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 on the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161.

Since the partition member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can visually recognize the range surrounded by the center frame 86. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of superimposing and visually recognizing the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular member 320.

FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. In FIGS. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 is a partition member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open lower side, and a partition thereof. A plurality of granular members 320 displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged in a manner of closing the lower open portion so that the granular member 320 does not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partition member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-shaped portion arranged in the foreground and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And, the bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged to face the back side of the front plate portion 311 and has a closing wall extending to the front side from the left and right and the upper part of the bottom plate portion so as to close the gap. The back compartment 313 and the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) that is integrally formed below the back compartment 313 and is formed between the front plate portion 311 and the back compartment 313 are communicated with each other. It is provided with a back surface section lower portion 314 in which a path can be configured between the curved plate portion 312 and a modified penetrating portion 315 formed through the back surface section lower portion 314.

The size of the partition member 310 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the front view of the partition member 310 are about the same. It is formed so as to be. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed so as to have substantially the same shape.

As a result, the constituent member for hiding the edge portion of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for the purpose of hiding the edge portion of the partition member 310. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the edge of the partition member 310 is visually recognized so as to overlap the display by the third symbol display device 81 while reducing the number of members. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the display device 81 is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 are scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 is very large for a powerful effect. There will be a lot of need. Therefore, it is possible to perform a powerful effect by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with a high density by forming the space as a narrow space to some extent.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is secured to be about the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear compartment lower portion 314. Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and sudden deceleration at the time of injection.

Further, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the rear compartment lower portion 314 than the left and right central portions 312b, the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b is compared with the movement path of the granular member 320 in the vicinity of the left and right central portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 in the above can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is ejected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement paths of the granular member 320 can be concentrated in the vicinity of the left and right central portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is the internal space IE1. It can be easily reached near the central part. This makes it easier for the player to see the granular member 320.

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize the granular member 320 as if it exploded and scattered in all directions from the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, so that the operation effect of the granular member 320 is powerful. Can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion for receiving the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 ejected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the back surface side and downward toward the center of the left and right sides.

As a result, regardless of where the granular member 320 is arranged in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 that is downwardly displaced by its own weight can be displaced downward on the back surface side while being moved toward the left and right center side.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the curved plate portion 312 in the left and right portions 312a is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right center side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the back surface side. As a result, as the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, the displacement toward the left-right center side can be generated in preference to the displacement toward the back surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400 described later, the granular members 320 try to be displaced toward the back surface all at once at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of the downward displacement. Can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination of the curved plate portion 312 toward the back surface side in the left and right central portions 312b is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central sides of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. This makes it easy to prevent the granular members 320 from congesting in the middle of the flow.

On the other hand, in the rear compartment lower part 314, the plate portion arranged to face the back side of the curved plate portion 312 is about the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape having an inclination angle of a mode in which the distance from the left and right central portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large).

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the lower portion 314 of the back surface section with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (slightly larger) the inclination angle of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 with respect to the vertical direction in the displacement direction.

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the lower surface section 314 is the same regardless of the injection direction of the granular member 320 that can change from side to side, so that the resistance given to the granular member 320 from the lower surface section 314 is almost uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which a lid member 480 can be inserted, and has a short portion extending vertically at both left and right ends and a long portion extending vertically curved in a manner connecting the upper ends of the short portions. To prepare for. The penetrating direction is formed so as to be inclined diagonally upward from the back side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the lower portion 314 of the back section (see FIG. 12A). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the lower portion 314 of the back surface section (the lower portion of the deformed penetrating portion 315 in FIG. 12A) constituting the deformed penetrating portion 315 is not arranged to face the injection direction of the granular member 320.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the acute-angled portion when the granular member 320 is ejected, so that it is possible to avoid a local load on the granular member 320 and the lower portion 314 of the back surface section, and the granular member 320 can be prevented from being subjected to a local load. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the lower portion 314 of the back surface section from being cracked or chipped.

The granular member 320 has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons) from a resin material that is relatively flexible (at least more flexible than the resin material that forms the partition member 310), as shown enlarged in FIGS. 24 and 25. It is a 32-sided body composed of a regular hexagon and a quasi-regular polyhedron), and has a non-penetrating recess 321 which is recessed along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

The non-penetrating recess 321 makes it possible to reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and to deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the shape center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased to the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. ..

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received on the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, it is possible to easily avoid damage or chipping of the granular member 320. .. Further, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when the load is received from the injection device 400 and the injection is performed, the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed is made to collide with the front plate portion 311. Can be done. As a result, the load at the time of collision with the front plate portion 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixing plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back compartment portion 313, an illuminated substrate 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the illuminated substrate 332. It is provided with a lid portion 333 which is arranged on the right side and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 331 so as to be able to accommodate the illuminated substrate 332 between the fixed plate portion 331 and the fixed plate portion 331.

The illuminated substrate 332 is provided with light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmission, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portions 332a. As a result, the light can be visually recognized as being divided into granules.

Of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 332, the light emitted to the right side illuminates the right path (right-handed channel) of the game area in which the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. It serves as one purpose. The light emitted to the left side will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmission (or light opaque), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation parts 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as the light divided into granules, and the illuminated substrate 332 has the fixed plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 332a. It is shielded by the light and can be avoided from being visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixing plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back compartment portion 313, an illuminated substrate 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixing plate portion 341, and the illuminated substrate 342. It is provided with a lid portion 343 arranged on the left side, fastened to and fixed to the fixing plate portion 341, and formed so as to accommodate the illuminated substrate 342 between the fixing plate portion 341 and the fixing plate portion 341.

The fixing plate portion 341 is formed of a resin material having low light transmission (or light transmission impervious), while the lid portion 343 is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the illuminated substrate 342 can be seen when visually recognized from the left direction, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is long overhanging to the left. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and it is possible to avoid seeing the left side surface of the illuminated substrate 342 in front view.

This makes it possible to irradiate light through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the visible illumination substrate 342.

The illuminated substrate 342 is provided with light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides. Light having an optical axis pointing in the forward direction is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side portion of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left side path of the game area.

Here, it is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, that is different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the illumination substrate 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area. The game is played by left-handed, and the game is played by right-handed during probabilistic change, time saving, and jackpot game). This will be described below.

Since the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the flow path of the ball on the left side of the gaming area, the firing intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball flows down on the desired path during normal gaming. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity in the left side portion of the game area is set too high, the visibility of the ball deteriorates, which hinders the adjustment of the firing intensity of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when launching a ball to the right side of the game area, the player basically launches the ball with the maximum firing intensity. The momentum of the fired ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, the degree of freedom in selecting the flow path of the ball on the downstream side thereof is significantly reduced, and the ball follows the same path exclusively.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed with a width through which one ball passes on the downstream side of the second winning opening 640, and enters the second winning opening 640. All the balls that did not hit pass through the guide path DL1 and head toward the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

In this way, since it is not necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball deteriorates in the right side portion of the game area (particularly, the place where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game is hindered. Since it is unlikely to occur, it is possible to perform an effect with high emission intensity in this range.

Due to such circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the illuminated substrate 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation unit 332a is arranged so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illuminated substrate 342 arranged on the left side is arranged. Then, the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective light emission effect while suppressing the occurrence of dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis pointing to the right is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as granularly divided light, and the illuminated substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. It can be avoided to be visually recognized. The object illuminated by the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface will be described later.

26 (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, and FIG. 26 (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 25. It is a figure. In FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiation unit 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 has an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310 and light on the back side of the partition member 310. It is equipped with an LED through which the shaft passes.

As a result, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also the light is emitted to other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is possible to execute the effect of irradiating.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 does not have an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and has a back side of the partition member 310. It is composed only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310, the irradiation intensity of light toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 or displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 310 is increased. Can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, the comfort of the game in the normal state can be improved by suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310. That is, in the game in the normal state, the line of sight of the player is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning opening 64. Often looking at the area to the left of the center of the game area.

In this case, when the inside of the partition member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position as close to the front as the game area, so that it is backlit for the player who visually recognizes the left side of the game area. Therefore, there is a risk that the visibility of the game area will deteriorate for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is moved toward the back side, and the game area and the light irradiation unit 342a are separated from each other. Can reduce the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 with high intensity while reducing the degree of illuminating the game area. You can perform the production. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect of illuminating the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the back side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertical substrate unit 167 described later that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the light irradiation unit 342a from being incident on the light guide plate 161 and perform the light emission effect. Therefore, the light effect performed by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 are illuminated. It can be separated from the production.

When the light guide plate 161 is adopted as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the irradiation path of light, which may reduce the effect of the effect. In particular, since the light emitted around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) easily illuminates the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which causes a decrease in the degree of freedom in production. Was there.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to avoid the light guide plate 161 and travel, the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the light emission effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 24 and 25. The injection device 400 is a device that is disposed below the partition member 310 and on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 rides on the injection device 400.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. In addition, FIG. 28 and FIG. 31 show the configuration of the injection device 400 as an outline, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the front side. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the back surface side. Further, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 is fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24) as a member to be fixed, and is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 that can form a space that can accommodate other movable members between the fixing member 350 and an electrical wiring or transmission arm member 470 that is fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360, which will be described later. It is provided with a limiting member 370 that limits the displacement in the front-rear direction, and an intermediate member 401 that is disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed in the central portion.

The fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). The base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350 so that the screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. This prevents the fixing member 350 from being accidentally removed from the partition member 310 and the granular member 320 being discharged from the fixing member 310 while the launching unit 300 is attached to the game board 13. be able to.

The injection device 400 is configured so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front surface side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted and linearly displaceable as a member displaceably arranged between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350. The linear motion member 410, and the collision member 420 which is arranged above the linear motion member 410 and is displaceably supported along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 and has an arch-shaped collision surface at the upper part. A contact member 430, which is arranged under the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change the state between a state in which contact is possible and a state in which contact is not possible in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, is provided.

The injection device 400 is formed so as to be able to transmit a load to the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 as a member displaceably arranged between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is rotatable to the space forming member 360. The front transmission member 440, which is pivotally supported and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface, and the drive that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. It includes a gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 that is arranged on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

The injection device 400 is rotatably supported by a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 as a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and is pivotally supported from the rear transmission member 460. It includes a transmission arm member 470 that can be displaced by action, and a lid member 480 that is pivotally supported and displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 with a straight line pointing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis.

The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360. Within the arrangement range divided in this way, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range in which the drive gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is generated in the front side range and the rear side. By transmitting to each of the ranges of, displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

From such a design concept, openings for driving force transmission are bored in the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 drilled in the shape of a keyhole, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 drilled in the shape of a lemon (substantially elliptical shape).

Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the front range and the rear range. , The details of the configuration of the intermediate range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

First, the front range will be focused on. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 has the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side in a columnar shape, and the columnar protrusions 403 thereof. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper end is supported, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged at symmetrical positions so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 can be fixed, and a columnar protrusion toward the front side near the lower end. The support column portion 405 is provided, and the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed on the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed so as to be shorter than the distance between the columnar protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always urged by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the urging force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged diagonally below the linear motion member 410, with the aim of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 tends to accumulate.

The linear motion member 410 includes the above-mentioned claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted, and a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 projecting from the upper end portion in the center of the left and right in a trapezoidal shape. A linear ridge 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower ridge portion formed as a ridge shorter than the ridge 414 on the lower side of the ridge 414. It includes a 415 and a displacement regulating portion 416 projecting from the lower end portion in the center of the left and right toward the front side.

The trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal protrusion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal protrusion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. To.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive a load from other components during load transmission, and the details will be described later.

The displacement regulating portion 416 is a portion that abuts with the cushioning member 352 of the fixing member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by this abutment (the ascending side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 is a flat plate extending parallel to the displaced plane of the linear motion member 410 from the curved plate portion 421 forming the arch-shaped collision surface and the rear end portion of the curved plate portion 421. The plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 drilled in an elongated hole shape extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 at the lower ends of the left and right center portions of the plate portion 422. It is provided with a cushioning member 424 fixed at a position where it is arranged to face each other and arranged so as to be in contact with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413.

A columnar protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423. That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is also used as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 may be damaged or chipped. It can be suppressed.

The abutting member 430 is formed in the shape of a substantially triangular long plate, and has a support hole 431 formed at one end of the long plate as a circular opening through which a support pillar portion 405 can be inserted, and the other end of the long plate. A projecting portion 432 projecting to the back surface side with a circular cross section, and a hook-shaped projecting portion 433 projecting to the front side in a hook shape at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting portion 432. Be prepared.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support pillar portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support pillar portion 405 so as to be rotatable and displaceable.

The projecting portion 432 and the uncinate process portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members during load transmission, and details thereof will be described later.

The fixing member 350 can accept the motor fixing portion 351 in which the above-mentioned drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, the cushioning member 352 arranged so as to be in contact with the displacement regulating portion 416, and the tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses and having a fastening screw inserted from the front side into a through hole inside the recess and screwed into a female screw formed in a circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed. It is provided with a guide portion 354 that guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24), which is composed of an inclined surface in a mode of shrinking from the front side and three directions of left and right.

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement regulating portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of damage or chipping of the displacement regulating portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the cushioning members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the displacement end in the urging direction. As a result, as will be described later, even in a displacement mode in which the linear motion member 410 is displaced ascending at high speed due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load received by the linear motion member 410 at the time of sudden stoppage. Can be absorbed by deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release the connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connecting recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). It is configured so that it cannot be done.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened while the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled. Can be done.

Next, the explanation will be given focusing on the range on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-mentioned opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape from a substantially central position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a back portion. Upper end position of the face plate portion A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending to the front side at the left and right end portions, and arranged below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right projecting support portions 364 projecting from the back plate portion to the front side and a lid member 480 formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right ends and arranged on the same line are formed in a size capable of axial support. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 to generate an urging force toward the side where the lid member 480 is retracted, and a columnar protrusion on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. It is provided with a columnar protrusion 366 to be formed.

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. Along with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. This wall portion can cover the internal front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surface of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the flowing granular member 320 is on the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

The protrusion support portion 364 is formed so that the tip of the protrusion is in contact with the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. On this flush surface, the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 are supported in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The shape of the support pillar portion 365 is different on the left and right. That is, on the right side, it is formed in the shape of a small-diameter cylinder that protrudes toward the left and right outside, and on the left side, it is formed in the shape of a cylinder having an inner diameter that can accept the tubular portion of the left cover member 489.

The columnar protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw having a large diameter to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is a long member formed in a shape substantially in the shape of an appearance, and is formed with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 366, and the support for inserting the columnar protrusion 366. The hole 471, the columnar protrusion 472 projecting parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 471 from one end in the elongated direction toward the front side, and the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the elongated direction are orthogonal to each other. It is provided with a transmission protrusion 473 that is projected in a columnar shape along a plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 passes through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and projects to the front side, and is formed so as to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 changes as the posture of the rear transmission member 460 changes, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes, but the details will be described later.

A limiting member 370 is arranged on the back surface side of the columnar protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and presses the covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the columnar protrusion 472 from the back surface side and the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back surface side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the columnar protrusion 472 to the back surface side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, and thus it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from being disengaged from the rear transmission member 460. can.

The presser claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing the electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the back side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electric wiring from shaking (for example, the arrangement of the electric wiring is changed due to vibration or the like), and it is possible to secure the entry path of other constituent members. Therefore, as described above, the injection is performed. The lateral slide member 840 and the pinnate member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced by a path including a position close to the device 400.

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 and transmits a driving force to the lid member 480.

The lid member 480 is a member configured so as to be able to advance and retreat in and out of the partition member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310, and the advancing and retreating portion formed in the shape of a curved plate. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from the left and right ends of the advancing / retreating portion 481, and a plurality of extending plate portions 485 that are received coaxially with the support column portion 365 at the extending end portion. 486, a transmission hole 487 that is drilled in a curved elongated hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left side and through which a transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape that surrounds the reception portion 486 on the right side. It is formed in the shape of a disk with a portion, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support pillar portion 365 is inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486. The right cover member 488 is prevented from coming off, and the left cover member 489 has a cylindrical portion inserted into the receiving portion 486 on the left side and a long hole-shaped portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487.

The left cover member 489 is not formed like a drill hole along the axial direction, but is formed with functionally formed contact surfaces 489a to 489c, which will be described in detail later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured to go toward the axis, it is not simply a shape in which the pipe is divided, but the radius and formation length of the arc are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be described.

First, the advancing / retreating portion 481 includes an overhanging portion 482 that travels to the approach side at the center position on the left and right. The overhanging portion 482 is formed so that the overhanging width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end face on the approach side is formed so as to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another constituent member (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, a load directed to the left and right outward with respect to the constituent member. Can be given, and the constituent members can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured so as to be able to enter the partition member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, and the overhanging portion 482 precedes the partition. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center positions where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the portion where the irregular penetration portion 315 starts to enter (the center of the left and right of the overhanging portion 482), so that the advance / retreat portion 481 cannot enter the irregular penetration portion 315. Can be suppressed.

Thirdly, the arc radius is lengthened in the vicinity of the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retreating portion 481 as opposed to the left / right center position of the overhanging portion 482. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays closer to the left and right outside due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

This way of staying is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may be non-uniform on the left and right. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, the unevenly stayed granular members 320 may collide with the advancing / retreating portion 481. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is lengthened in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where many granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, the distance between the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 can be secured sufficiently long in advance, so that even if the method of staying of the granular member 320 becomes non-uniform, the granular member 320 and the advancing / retreating portion 481 You can avoid collisions.

Explain other design concepts. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the approach side is formed recessed toward the retracting side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the extending plate portion 485 from colliding with the stagnant granular member 320.

In addition, even when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the approach side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 is still provided with the concave forming portion of the extending plate portion 485 and the curvature of the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be collected on the upper part of the collision member 420 by being configured to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The receiving portion 486 has a different shape on the left and right. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular tubular shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape), which is designed in consideration of assembly.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 28 and 31. Since the support pillar portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction particularly on the right side, the lid member 480 is supported when both the receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular tubular shape. It is necessary to divide the advancing / retreating portion 481 in order to assemble it to the pillar portion 365.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the lid member 480 can be moved back and forth on the partition member 310, while the granular member 320 can be prevented from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the deformed penetrating portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed penetrating portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to the extent that it cannot pass through the deformed penetrating portion 315, advance / retreat displacement becomes impossible, so accuracy is required for the shape. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by connecting a plurality of members, the shape may be deformed due to factors such as an assembly error.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is different on the left and right so that the advance / retreat portion 481 does not need to be divided. In the assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the outer side (left side) in the axial direction of the support pillar portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving portion 486a while being inserted into the support pillar portion 365. As a result, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support pillar portion 365.

At this time, in the right receiving portion 486b, the support pillar portion 365 is arranged to face each other on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extension plate portion 485 by inserting a fastening screw through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing it into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

After that, if the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction and is supported by the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support pillar portion 365 so as not to fall off, the lid member 480 is spaced. It can be rotatably supported with respect to the forming member 360.

With reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described. In FIGS. 34 to 36, the displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are shown in chronological order.

34 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 34 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 34 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of FIG. 34 (b).

35 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 35 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b).

36 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 36 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 36 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of FIG. 36 (b).

In FIGS. 35 and 36, a process is shown in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side. In detail, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the approach side end within the displacement range, and FIG. 34 shows the lid member 480 at the retracted end within the displacement range. The arranged state is shown, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at an intermediate position in the displacement range is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel to each other. More specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane shown in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane shown in FIG. 34B). ) Is orthogonal.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 that comes into contact with the left cover member 489 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the elongated direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34 (a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts at the position closer to the right side of the left cover member 489 (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts over the width direction of the left cover member 489. Be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c) and 36 (c), the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponds to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed so that the left cover member 489 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can come into contact with each other in the left-right width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 is compared with the first contact surface 489a that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a thereof. The second contact surface 489b, which is formed to have a small inclination in the left-right direction, and the lid member 480, which is formed to have a small inclination in the left-right direction as compared with the second contact surface 489b, are arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. A third contact surface 489c that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in the state is provided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left cover member 489 in the shape of the upper side surface of the opening in the left-right direction is gradually reduced as it approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480 with the first contact surface 489a as the maximum. Designed to.

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination of the left cover member 489 at the contact position with the upper side surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be secured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is in the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489) at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing when the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity. Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area responsible for the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the approach side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489), so that the transmission protrusion In addition to the small contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximum, which may cause an overload on the transmission protrusion 473. be.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the ratio of the weight of the lid member 480 loaded on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the advancing / retreating portion 481 occupying most of the weight of the lid member 480 is the rotation shaft of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the approach side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the urging force of the torsion spring SP2, at least the urging force is at least. A part can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is compared with the case where most of the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. Can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation shaft O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, the distance between the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the position on the retracting side to the position on the approach side is the lid. It is configured to be the longest when the member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side.

In addition, in the first contact surface 489a, the normal at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 in the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 becomes an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to be along (the inclination angle becomes small), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can be generated along an arc.

As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, so that the load required to rotate the lid member 480 is reduced. can do.

As a device for the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove portion 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove portion 473a along the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side to the back side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b) and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right sides. Will be done. Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the overhanging portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center side in the left-right direction.

The radius of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the center position on the left and right is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotating shaft O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overhanging portion 482 having the maximum approach width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 slightly over-rotates (to the extent that it is caused by a design error for each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding with each other and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, the description will be given focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, the front transmission member 440 and the rear side are fixed as the drive gear 450 rotates. The transmission member 460 is integrally rotated about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction in the front view (front view of the transmission member 440 side view) will be described as a forward rotation.

The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are configured to secure relative positions and rigidity with respect to each other on the sides facing each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite surfaces. The shape portion is formed. The details of the shaped portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28. .. The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front transmission member 440 projects axially on the central side of the substantially disk-shaped main body plate portion 441 and the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove is formed inside the main body plate portion 441. A groove forming portion 442 to be recessed, a support hole 443 which is a circular opening formed in a center portion of the main body plate portion 441 so as to allow a shaft portion 362 to be inserted, and a gear formed in the main body plate portion 441. The flange portion 444 that is overlaid on the teeth, the detected portion 445 that extends radially outward from the flange portion 444 and is formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and the groove formation. A transmission protrusion 446 is provided so as to project parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric with respect to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442.

In the groove forming portion 442, a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 is recessed so that the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is such that the front transmission member 440 rotates in a forward direction with the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b to which the projecting portion 432 is guided and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a diameter larger than the reference arc of the first groove portion 442a. A third groove portion 442c formed along the above, and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a are provided.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller formation angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is rapid. Designed to be.

The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove portion 446a formed linearly along the protrusion direction connecting the central portion and one point on the outer diameter side. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when the load is input from the direction orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the groove portion 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 has a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the main body plate portion 461 thereof. A groove forming portion 462 in which a groove is recessed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 462, and a shaft portion 362 formed at the center of the main body plate portion 461 with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the base side outer diameter of the shaft portion 362. It is provided with a non-contact opening portion 463 formed so as to avoid contact with the above.

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a in which the groove portion to be recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and is expanded in the radial direction in a range not functioning as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjusting portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as an integral body, and the weight portion 461a is arranged and modified for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity to the shape of a rotation axis. The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. ..

The groove forming portion 462 is recessed with a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the columnar protrusion 472 so that the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is formed by the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the first groove portion 462a formed along the first arc shape and the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 are arranged in the first groove portion 462a. The second groove portion 462b to which the columnar protrusion 472 is guided by rotating in the forward direction (clockwise rotation in the rear view) and the first groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. It includes a third groove portion 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove portion 462d connecting the third groove portion 462c and the first groove portion 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger formation angle range (about 180 degrees) than the second groove portion 462b, and the groove and the non-contact open portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. It is designed so that the change in distance between them is slow.

Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. In FIGS. 38, 39, 40 and 41, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. Further, for easy understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a schematic diagram to the extent that the change in length can be grasped.

In FIGS. 38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows the effect standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. 40 shows the injection standby state. The launch standby state, which is the state of waiting for the launch timing of the device 400, is shown, and FIG. 41 shows the launch state, which is the state immediately after the injection device 400 executes the launch effect. Note that FIG. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, but immediately after this, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the linear motion member 410, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the displacement on the approach side will be described as an effect standby state (see FIG. 39) of the injection device 400.

In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, and the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged below the granular member 320.

In the launch standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended so that the columnar protrusion 403 comes into contact with the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. .. In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the columnar protrusion 403 is a guide hole. It stops at the position where it comes into contact with the lower inner surface of 423. After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward due to its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG. 38.

The flow of the granular member 320 that is bounced off and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being moved to the left and right center side by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, so that the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixing member 350 and the collision member 420. The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the above is set to be shallow.

Therefore, in terms of shape, it may not be possible to receive the plurality of granular members 320 in a biased manner. In the present embodiment, the partition member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be biasedly received.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of granular members 320 start to return to the right side of the collision member 420 in a biased manner, when the granular member 320 returns after that, the granular member 320 that has returned earlier causes the collision member 420 to return. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side portion, the granular member 320 that has returned later flows to the left side along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner of flowing on the granular member 320.

As a result, the left-right bias of the granular member 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias (difference in scattering mode) of the arrangement of the granular member 320 in each firing effect is reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged at a position in the middle of the displacement section, and the lower linear motion member 410 is one point with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413. It is just in contact with. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the columnar protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. That is, it is permissible to change the posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one of the columnar protrusions 403.

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420 in a biased manner, the collision member 420 changes its posture in such a manner that the right side portion is lowered as compared with the left side portion. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right side.

Therefore, it becomes easy to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left and right center positions of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 coincide with each other in front view, and the furnishing left-right center position of the guide portion 354 is set. It is considered that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right is almost uniformly distributed to the left or right depending on the difference in the contact points between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

On the other hand, when the posture of the collision member 420 is changed, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left and right center positions of the guide portion 354, and the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right side, and flows down the furnishing left and right center positions of the guide portion 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left side along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421. As a result, it becomes easy for the granular member 320 that has returned later to flow down to the side where the accumulated granular member 320 is small, so that the granular member 320 can be easily distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the posture change of the collision member 420 is not always allowed as well. For example, in the launch standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper ends of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower ends of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is restricted, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is an urging force generated by a pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the elongated direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easy to stabilize.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the collision member 420 from the launch standby state to the launch state. As a result, when the retention state of the granular member 320 (bias of the number of grains to the left and right) is the same, it is possible to stabilize the scattering method of the granular member 320 which is scattered by receiving a load from the collision member 420.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular member 320 scatters and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. It returns to the upper surface of, and returns to the production standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for making this state change feasible will be described in detail below.

42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the front transmission member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. It is a plan view of 440.

In FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the outer shapes are shown. Except for the parts related to mutual load transmission, the ridges 414 and lower ridges 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430, and the uncinate process. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown. Is illustrated without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) accompanying the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440. ) Changes in arrangement are shown in chronological order. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 is shown. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected by the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting the change from the state in which the unit 445 is not arranged to the state in which the detected unit 445 is inserted, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42B illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the protrusion 414 of the linear movement member 410 and starts pushing down the linear movement member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, between FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, so that direct load transmission between the members is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration and the load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be shut off.

FIG. 42 (c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally lowered and displaced. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , Can be indirectly transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, the load generated by the collision of the granular member 320 with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410, which is a transmission point where the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the transmission member 440. It is a direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotation displacement of the transmission member 440.

The effect on the forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, an effect that causes the speed that is driven and controlled as a rotational displacement to differ from the actual speed, and an effect that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat are exemplified.

In FIG. 42 (d), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 starts to tilt is shown. Will be done.

The contact member 430 is a member whose posture changes according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442 without being given an urging force by other urging means. From FIG. 42 (d), the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is the direction of displacement by its own weight. Therefore, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 has little change from the state before FIG. 42 (d) in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

FIG. 42 (e) illustrates the arrangement of each constituent member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), in the state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 42 (f), the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 is completely tilted is shown. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is used. Is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (the posture change is prevented).

Therefore, with respect to the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, the contact is as compared with the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are in contact with each other at a speed in the opposite direction. The aspect can be softened.

In FIG. 43 (a), a diagram in the same state as in FIG. 42 (f) is shown for ease of understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), the linear motion member 410 is displaced ascending as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 and the contact member. The arrangement of each component in a state where the uncinate process 433 of the 430 starts to come into contact with the 430 is illustrated.

The state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the launch standby state (see, for example, FIG. 40).

The lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate process portion 433 are provided with an overhanging portion that projects toward the side facing each other at the tip portions on the sides facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent slippage from occurring at the contact position between the lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate process portion 433, and the lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate process portion 433 can be stably contacted with each other. Can be touched.

In the state shown in FIG. 43B, the terminal position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected unit 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and the switching of this state is switched to the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). It is output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected by the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting the switch from the state in which the unit 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected unit 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, it is controlled to determine that the injection device 400 has shifted to the launch standby state. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43B, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the contact member 430. A urging force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load in the direction of erecting the contact member 430 is applied to the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 is a protrusion. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is regulated by being hindered by the groove forming portion 442.

The contact between the protrusion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is a contact between a circularly curved surface (outer surface of the protrusion 432) and an arcuate surface (inner surface of the third groove 442c). The load generated at that time goes toward the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load given from the protrusion 432 is on the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and it is possible to regulate the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

Therefore, in the launch standby state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) can be maintained even after the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, for example, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must always be energized in the launch standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. Can be improved.

This is, for example, a limitation on the setting of the length of the display effect from the launch standby state to the launch state when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect in the third symbol display device 81. Is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

In FIG. 43 (c), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 starts to stand up is shown. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that abuts on the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove forming portion 442c, so that the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is transmitted to the front side. It will deviate from the rotation axis of the member 440.

Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the launch standby state, the drive motor MT1 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is necessary to turn off the power.

In FIG. 43 (d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retracts from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the restriction on the ascending displacement of the linear motion member 410 is lifted. , The arrangement of each constituent member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is upwardly displaced by the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is bounced upward is shown. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the abutting member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). .. On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410. The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the abutting member 430 in the upright direction.

In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are both. Since they are configured in the same direction in the standing direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a manner of assisting each other.

In FIG. 43 (e), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 is completely upright is shown. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that abuts on the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440 The effect on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, since the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d), FIG. 43 (d). ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction of erecting the contact member 430 in the subsequent displacement will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement of the contact member 430 in an upright position may hinder the rotation of the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a, and from the contact member 430 via the projecting portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to be directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being hindered by the displacement in which the contact member 430 stands upright.

When the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e) and it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to be stopped, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state, and the state change shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of emission effects. The control program shown in FIG. 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the injection device 400, the launch execution control for rotating the front transmission member 440 once in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that rises due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 in the firing state, and the granular member 320 is scattered.

Since this effect scatters the granular member 320 into the player's field of view, it is flashy and can improve the player's attention. For example, it takes a few minutes without the player knowing whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if it is a big hit, the player can improve the interest of the player by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular member 320 to produce the effect.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is off), performing an effect of scattering the granular member 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a big hit, which is not preferable.

In addition, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the state does not shift to the firing state (in the case of disconnection), the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 will result in a long reach during execution, resulting in a big hit. It becomes possible for the player to grasp whether the player is out of the question or not, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of disengagement, after the injection device 400 is put into the launch standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction to control the injection device 400. It is configured to be able to return to the production standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, by driving and controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction of counterclockwise rotation (clockwise) of the front transmission member 440 from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), each component member is displaced in the reverse direction of the above time series. Can be made to.

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42 (e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 into contact with the contact member 430. (See FIG. 42 (f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing when releasing the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430.

Further, after FIG. 42 (e), the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in the auxiliary direction, it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In this case, the ascending displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not a momentary one based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linearly moving member 410 from bouncing off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in an effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) without performing the effect of scattering the granular member 320. Can be restored to.

In order to obtain the state shown in FIG. 42A after the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, the detection sensor SC4 The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction until it is detected that the detection groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

As a result, both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for not scattering the granular member 320 can be executed with the same preparatory operation associated with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to produce a big hit or a miss in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of success or failure due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the launch standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized to temporarily eliminate the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. .. This makes it difficult to grasp from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction, as compared with the case where the drive direction is switched from the state where the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven. ..

Therefore, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the hit / miss notification timing in the production, and even if a drive sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the drive direction, so that the situation where the player can grasp the hit / miss result is avoided. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the hit / miss notification timing without risking the player to grasp the hit / fail result by the drive sound, so that the drive motor MT1 in the launch standby state can be started. It is possible to give a range to the stop timing. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the launch state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in the state sufficiently before the launch state, the subsequent production is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates against control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28.

In FIG. 44, there is a change in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component” in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460. Illustrated in chronological order. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

In FIG. 44 (a), the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480. Is placed at the displacement end position on the approach side.

Since the lid member 480 receives an urging force from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) toward the retracting side, a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is generated. By being transmitted to the rear transmission member 460, there is a risk of affecting the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44A, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 abuts on the third groove portion 462c of the groove forming portion 462 and passes through the contact point. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, since the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface are in contact with each other, the load generated by the contact is directed toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, since the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 goes toward the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is rearward. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44 (b), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44 (c), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this urging force moves the columnar protrusion 472 upward. Since it works in the direction of displacement to, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 also works to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470.

In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 given via the lid member 480 are set. Since both are configured to be the same in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a manner of assisting each other.

In FIG. 44 (d), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44 (d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in a non-contact manner.

As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the lid member 480 to the approach side, and it is possible to alleviate the degree of accumulation of fatigue on the transmission arm member 470. ..

In FIG. 44 (e), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), the launch standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is configured. From the launch standby state to the launch state, the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side so as to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44 (f), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is the state after the firing effect is executed, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 (for example). e) See). Therefore, the amount of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) distributed to the front transmission member 440 can be very small.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the displacement direction of the lid member 480 is a direction that opposes the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Since most of the above can be used as a driving force for rotating other constituent members that come into contact with the rear transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be secured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. In FIG. 45, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described in FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown. Is illustrated without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the ascending side (for example, in the effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction to transmit the front side. The state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 abuts on the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit is set in the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, whereas in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, the drive can be performed continuously. When the displacement angle exceeds the permissible angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and the continuous drive beyond that is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven in a state where the displacement is regulated, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control is limited to the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. The damage to the drive motor MT1 is avoided by providing the above, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

It should be noted that FIG. 46 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

Further, in FIG. 46, a guideline for the rotation angle of the forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42 (a) and 44 (a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (d), and so on. 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (c). 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (e).

Further, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (d). 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are described on the horizontal axis with the effect standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and the above-mentioned constituent members corresponding to the angles are shown. The state change in is described. The arrangement change of each configuration by the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the arrangement change of each configuration by the drive control in the reverse rotation corresponds to the left direction in FIG. Respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced ascending by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) is determined. It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced ascending. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of the ascending displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

Since the collision member 420 has already risen after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted in the middle (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. However, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted from reverse rotation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees) when the power is turned on again. That is, when the detected unit 445 is not arranged on the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

This rotation causes the injection device 400 to return to the effect standby state at one end, and then to control the execution of each effect. This prevents the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 from being unintentionally restricted and the drive motor MT1 from generating heat after the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is arranged from the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed that stabilizes.

For example, if the arrangement is stable in 2 seconds from the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation), so that the granules in the middle of the flow flow. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is bitten by the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

The rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4 times speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the approach side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the lid member 480 can be completely displaced before the granular member 320 is arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

In this state, by stopping the drive in the effect standby state, the granular member 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular member 320 is collected toward the left and right center sides along the shape of the lid member 480. Can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retracted side, and the collision member 420 Get on top.

In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 so as to be different, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each launch execution control. Therefore, for example, by forming the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the granular member 320 to be launched (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be different. , The effect of production can be improved.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. Next, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 show the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes an effect member 700 configured to be able to move up and down at the center position in the left-right direction and to produce light emission, and hemispherical illumination fixedly arranged on the left and right sides thereof. A device 613 is provided.

By performing a light emission effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player to perform an effect of making the player visually brilliantly visible. be able to.

FIG. 51 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is shown in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611 in the assembled state, but in FIGS. 51 and 52, For convenience, it is arranged on the back side of the rear plate portion 611.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has a left-right long main body member 601 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and the front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 arranged on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by a cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a geared relationship, and an intermediate between the upper arm member 620 and the upper arm member 620. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a portion and change their posture with the rotation of the upper arm member 620, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601 and the drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. The transmission gear 650, which is combined and rotatably engaged with the left upper arm member 620 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and is rotatably supported by the main body member 601 and the annular portion are assembled to the main body member 601. It includes a torsion spring SP3 that loads an ascending urging force on the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of a long left and right plate, and is a guide hole 602 which is a pair of left and right elongated holes arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of guide holes 602 projecting from a symmetrical position in a columnar shape in both front and rear directions. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as the central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side portion to the back surface side in a cylindrical shape. An arc-shaped hole 606 drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 on the back side in a posture toward the columnar shaft portion 605 side. It includes a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole for guiding the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 projecting to the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620. The upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large diameter at the head into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 projecting from the back surface side is inserted into the winding main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by an overhanging portion 601a protruding from the back side of the main body member 601 in a dogleg shape, and the other arm is pressed by the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the applied portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction of upward displacement of the connecting portion 623.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back surface side of the main body member 601. As a result, the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged with each other.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. A screw having a large diameter at the head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, so that the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. By screwing a screw having a large head diameter into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to fall off.

The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove through which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is arranged at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, or is arranged at another position. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is done.

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member formed of a resin material having low light transmission property and fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. The front plate portion 612, which is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions and is formed so as to project to the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 to enable light emission. The hemispherical lighting device 613 is provided.

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the back side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, projecting to the back side with a dimension slightly longer than the front-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacting the main body member 601 on the surface. The overhanging contact portion 611a in contact is provided.

As a result, it is possible to stabilize the fastened state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 and to displace the upper arm member 620 in the space separated by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. can. In other words, the posture change of the upper arm member 620 (for example, the posture change that bends with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. ..

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 so that the structural portion of these members is not visible to the player, and is a main body member 601. A pair of left and right sliding surfaces 612a formed as a plane parallel to the front plate portion of the above, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opened to the back surface side in the plate portion protruding from the left upper end portion toward the back surface. It is provided with a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and the pressing member PC1 formed from its shape and material with low friction is configured as a slidable flat surface. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the long direction is a flat plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

The shape of the pressing member PC1 on the side facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact is a point contact. It is configured to be. As a result, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side exceeds the allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. Displacement.

In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set by the dimensional relationship between the back side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side is set so that the effect member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts on the pressing member PC1 and limits the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, so that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 becomes the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent contact.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although it is formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 may be formed in a plane shape, and the shape in the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed so as to be limited to the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portions project to the back side (the design portion on the front side is). It may be configured so as to project to the back side due to the influence of being arranged closer to the back side), or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may be configured to have the same planar shape as in the left side portion of the present embodiment. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the columnar protrusion 654. Forward displacement is regulated by the fastening screws that are fixed. That is, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 in addition to limiting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front, it is possible to avoid a large load locally.

The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for electrical wiring through which the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630 is passed. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612b, through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the effect member 700.

In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electric wiring to the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction with the displacement. (In the present embodiment, even in the case of displacing a distance of about half the left-right width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the electrical wiring is loosened and hangs downward.

The hemispherical lighting device 613 is a device provided with a hemispherical lens member and for irradiating the light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back surface side thereof to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. .. In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward on the center side in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier for the player to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 as compared with the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 points in the front-rear direction. can. For example, it is easy to put light into the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or it is easy to notice the light by irradiating the effect member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state. Can be done.

The upper arm member 620 has a support hole 621 that is formed in the shape of a long plate and is formed as a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted through the upper arm member 620. , A gear portion 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and configured to be meshed with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circle at the end in the long direction. As a long hole having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, which is formed only on the connecting portion 623 configured to allow the cylindrical protrusion 631 of the above to be inserted and the upper arm member 620 on the left side. It includes a transmission hole 624 to be formed, and an urged portion 625 projecting from the back surface side of the upper arm member 620 and having a hook-shaped tip portion.

The transmission hole 624 has a margin extending continuously from one end of the transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. A unit 624b and the like.

The transmission unit 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the driving force transmission, which will be described in detail later.

The urging portion 625 is a portion where one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the urging force in the direction of ascending and displacementing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the urging portion 625 is increased. The arm member 620 receives.

Further, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 to the front can be regulated by the engagement between the hook-shaped portion at the tip of the applied portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is formed substantially symmetrically from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed, and is formed in a columnar shape from an intermediate position in the long direction to the back side. The columnar protrusion 631 and the columnar protrusion 632 projecting in a columnar shape from the left and right outer positions to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction at the left and right inner positions with respect to the columnar protrusion 631. A support hole 633 formed in a circular shape and a plurality of arcuate holes 634 formed through a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw having a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is on the back side of the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632. By screwing in a screw having a large diameter from the head, the lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off.

The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 described later, the wall thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. As a result, when the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at a thick portion, so that it is effective for the effect member 700 to change its posture to a forward leaning posture. Can be regulated to.

Further, the lower arm member 630 on the left side has an arrangement portion 635 formed open to the back side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the long direction of the arm body, and the back surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin-walled lid portion 636, which is arranged on the side and functions as a lid of the placement portion 635, is provided.

The arranging portion 635 includes a base end side through hole 635a formed in the front-rear direction at the columnar protrusion 632 side end portion.

The base end side through hole 635a is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side and is guided to the arrangement portion 635, and exits from the arrangement portion 635 to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630.

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the long direction of the lower arm member 630, and the lower meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is formed deeply on the back side in the effect standby state. Will be done. In other words, the upper side is formed as a thin plate portion with the tangent line as the boundary.

The lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the lower arm member 630 on the right side. Further, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes an upper side wall portion of the arrangement portion 635 in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, is configured to be able to guide electrical wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid in the guide path. The thin-walled lid portion 636 is fastened and fixed to be reinforced.

Since the electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636) and is guided to the effect member 700 side, the members arranged before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, for example). It is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electrical wiring. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from being entangled or rubbed with these members and damaging the electrical wiring.

The lower arm member 630 includes a pressing member PC1 composed of the same member and assembled from the back side, in addition to the above-mentioned pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the front-rear direction via the pressing member PC1. It should be noted that the main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact with each other but have a slight gap, and when the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the back surface, they are in contact with each other to limit the displacement. It functions in the same manner as in the case of the pressing member PC1 on the front side.

That is, the lower arm member 630 is configured so that the pressing member PC1 is assembled on both front and rear sides and can come into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and easily reduce the resistance generated due to the ascending / descending displacement when the displacement is limited.

The tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side to the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the back side end portion of the upper arm member 620. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced toward the back surface to the extent that it abuts on the main body member 601 it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from abutting on the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connecting position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are front and rear. Since the position is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semi-circular main body 651 formed in a substantially semi-circular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape on the radial outer side of the semi-circular main body 651, and a semi-circular main body. A support hole 653 is formed through the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651 as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted, and a cylindrical shape is projected from the outer diameter end of the semicircular main body portion 651 to the front side. A cylindrical protrusion 654, a plate-shaped detected plate portion 655 formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end of the semicircular main body portion 651, and the detected plate portion thereof. It includes a thickened portion 656 thickened and formed between the 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 on the support hole 653 side in the front-rear direction.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in a state of being meshed with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The columnar protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the columnar protrusion 654. The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a fastening screw having a large head diameter is attached to the female screw portion formed at the tip of the protrusion of the columnar protrusion 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions that are configured to be engageable with the above-mentioned displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). By arranging the regulated hole 657 on the support hole 653 side (position closer to the support hole 653), the transmission gear 650 is changed to the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). It is configured to reduce the transmitted load (moment).

Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickening portion 656 is set as a place where it is necessary to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced by forming the portion where the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall.

FIG. 53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a back exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. , A rotary plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-shaped main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the functional plate portion 720, and between the rotary plate portion 730 and the functional plate portion 720. A telescopic displacement member 740 that is arranged and configured to enable displacement similar to that of a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotary plate 730, and a drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 of the functional plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 to execute a light emitting effect, and a light emitting effect device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the tips of a plurality of telescopic displacement members 740, respectively, in an effect standby state. A plurality of shielding design members 760 combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 projecting from symmetrical positions on the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions thereof. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 protruding from the arcuate position centered on 711 to the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions. A through hole 713 formed in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged under the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressing arranged on the back surface of the plate. A member PC1 is provided.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring DK1 guided to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630 between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin-walled lid portion 630 through the lower arm member 630 to the front side. .. In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with other members or is visually recognized by the player.

In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed of an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the wiring guide member 714 is formed with the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. It also has a function to soften the contact of.

That is, the upper side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced ascending, and the effect member 700 is displaced to the back side. Even so, when the wiring guide member 714 comes into contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the ascending displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is slidably arranged with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in the present embodiment, in the process of ascending displacement of the effect member 700, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower end can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. By configuring the above, it is possible to divide the position where the load is generated for maintaining the posture of the effect member 700.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is formed in a substantially plate shape from a resin material, and has a tubular portion 721 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the back surface in the central portion and is formed through the inside of the cylinder, and a central shaft of the tubular portion 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 formed along a coaxial arc shape, a sensor arranging portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. With respect to the motor fixing portion 724 which has a large opening and is formed so that the drive motor MT3 can be fastened and fixed, the radial elongated hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial elongated hole 725a. A plurality of guide holes 725 (five sets in this embodiment) composed of a pair of crossed elongated holes 725b intersecting at right angles, and extending radially outward on an extension of the radial elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (five locations in this embodiment) extending plate portions 726 and both ends in the width direction of the extending plate portion 726 from the back side end portion of the flat surface portion arranged at the extending base end of the extending plate portion 726. A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extension plate portions 726) and a pair of columnar protrusions that are projected in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the end portion in the out-of-diameter direction to the back surface side. 728 and.

The tubular portion 721 is arranged so that the rear end is in contact with the plate-shaped main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710 in a state where the internal through hole communicates with the through hole 713 of the plate-shaped main body 710. Will be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side of the plate-shaped main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the back side end portion of the tubular portion 721.

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. ..

The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 which is fastened and fixed to the sensor arrangement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 which is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to project to the front side, and when the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, the rotating plate 730 The posture can be determined.

The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width in which the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 can be arranged, and is a group of through holes formed along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the tubular portion 721. A long hole-shaped long hole 725a to be formed and a long hole along a straight line orthogonal to the reference straight line of the radial long hole 725a on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the radial long hole 725a. A pair of crossed elongated holes 725b formed in the above.

The radial elongated holes 725a and the crossed elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement members 740 in the assembled arrangement state. It works, but the details will be described later.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the tip on the back surface side can come into contact with the plate-shaped main body 710. In the abutting state, the female screw formed on the tip side of the columnar projecting portion 728 is screwed into the fastening screw inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side, so that the functional plate portion 720 is a plate-shaped main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is also used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-shaped main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotary plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is formed from a resin material in a substantially disk shape, and has a cylindrical portion 731 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the front side in a central portion and is formed through the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the tubular portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 formed along a coaxial arc shape, and formed as long through holes at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. It is provided with a plurality of guide holes 733 (five locations in the present embodiment) and an extended claw portion 734 extending in a claw shape in the outer diameter direction at a position corresponding to the guide hole 733.

The tubular portion 731 is designed so that the inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the tubular portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the sensor SC7. The detected portion 731a is formed so as to be able to enter the detected groove of the above, and the gear portion 731b is formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape capable of meshing with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can secure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at a little less than about 120 degrees.

The guide holes 733 are each formed to have the same shape, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the tubular portion 731 and the center of the tubular portion 731 rather than the small-diameter arc portion 733a. It includes a large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the shaft, and a connecting portion 733c that connects the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a.

The mode of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the change in the length of the tubular portion 731 from the central axis per unit angle is formed so as to change according to the position. To. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in the length of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle in the vicinity of the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b from the central axis is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740 can be reduced, and the effect of effect can be improved by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape protruding in the clockwise direction of the front view, is configured to be engageable with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the back side in the thickness direction. The back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the back side claw portion 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are separated at a substantially intermediate position of the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front side claw portion 734b and the back side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, which have different protrusion tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740 in the front-rear direction. It guides inward in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 has a longer extending length in the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side than in the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. Is formed in. In this embodiment, the extension length is lengthened in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. This makes it possible to mitigate the effects of gravity.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 has the same shape, the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravitational direction is different, so that the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. The first guided protrusion 743b of the 740 may be arranged, and the extension claw portion 734 may fail to guide inward in the radial direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extended length of the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably executed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the upper side is displaced due to the influence of its own weight, the displacement is a displacement in the direction closer to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, so that the extension claw portion 734 is guided inward in the radial direction. Is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, but should be made shorter to reduce the material cost and reduce the size of the rotary plate 730. Can be done.

The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

58 (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are shown in a state in which one set arranged at the uppermost part of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and the shielding design member 760 is collectively arranged. In 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in the case of being discrete.

Since the telescopic displacement member 740 is a member constituting a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two front and rear layers, a plurality of the telescopic displacement members 740 arranged on the front side in the following description. The plane on which the long member can be displaced is also referred to as a front layer plane, and the plane on which a plurality of long members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as a rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is pivotally supported by a pair of proximal end side members 741 arranged in two front and rear layers and pivotally supported at the lower end portion, and by the upper end portion of the proximal end side member 741. A pair of first long members 742, a pair of second long members 743 pivotally supported at the upper ends of the first long members 742, and the upper ends of the second long members 742. A tip adjusting member 744 having a guide elongated hole 744a extending linearly so as to be guided is provided.

The base end side member 741, the first long member 742, and the second long member 743, which are composed of a pair of front and rear members, are designed so that the length and the support position in the long direction are the same as each other.

The base end side member 741 has a transmitted protrusion 741a projecting in a columnar shape from the lower end portion of the member on the rear plane side to the back surface side and a circle from the back surface to the front surface side on which the columnar protrusion 741a is projected. A guided protrusion 741b that is projected in a columnar shape and inserted into a member on the front surface plane side, and a lower end portion of the first long member 742 that is projected in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the rear layer plane side member to the front side. A guided protrusion 741c, which is inserted into a through hole formed in, is provided.

The transmitted protrusion 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730.

The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate portion 725, and are guided in the elongated direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the crossed elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first long member 742 is pivotally supported on the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the long direction, and is projected from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side to the front side in a columnar shape on the front plane. A guided protrusion 742a inserted through the upper end portion of the base end side member 741 on the side is provided.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the crossed elongated hole 725b of the functional plate portion 725, and is guided in the elongated direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

The second long member 743 is pivotally supported on the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the long direction, and is projected from the upper end of the member on the front plane side to the front side in a columnar shape. A pair of members projecting from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side to flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side with a diameter of about the width of the member, and projecting in a columnar shape from the tip of the protrusion to the front side. A support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b projecting in a columnar shape from a substantially intermediate position of a member on the rear plane side to the back side are provided.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided to the back side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load inward in the radial direction by this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The tip adjusting member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a length extending along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. It includes a pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in a hole shape, and a second guided protrusion 744b projecting in a columnar shape from a central position in the elongated direction toward the back surface side.

The protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is arranged in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front side claw portion 734b of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730. This guidance receives a load inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 57).

The shape of the tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is not circular, and the rotating plate 730 having a rotation center on the side of the projected protrusion 741a is inclined to approach the second guided protrusion 744b as the rotating plate 730 is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. A surface (the surface on the left side of FIG. 59 (b)) facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) is provided with an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly displaced in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the rotating plate 730 from becoming excessive when it comes into contact with the extended claw portion 734. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively and discretely arranged, they are arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740. Support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjusting member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the long direction) of the tip adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjusting member 744, is extended to the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended tip toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. A member having a shape portion that is inclined toward the extension and extends in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension tip. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to invisiblely shield the decorative member 752 on the back side by attaching colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet to the front and back, and at the right end portion, along the back surface of the member. It is provided with an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right in a manner in which a plate surface is formed.

Similar to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extending plate portion 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet attached to the front and back, and is arranged on the right side (clockwise direction) of the front view. It is arranged so as to face the back surface side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the back surface side, it comes into contact with the design member 760 so that the displacement can be suppressed.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be offset from the back surface side of the main body portion of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion and the extending plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the line.

This action becomes more remarkable as the arrangement of the extending plate portion 761 is separated from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least the size allowed for the shielding design member 760 as a displacement in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 come into contact with each other along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extending plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface or may be formed as a flat surface having a normal line directed in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface in a mode in which the distance from the shielding design member 760 is closer to the back surface side.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state where the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the frontal view of the uppermost shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the back side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760. Even when displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, the position in the front-rear direction of the shield design member 760 on the right side of the front view along the front inclination of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shield design member 760. The deviation can be corrected. As a result, it is possible to easily align the relative positions of the shielding design members 760 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58B, in the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760, the member that supports the right side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the rear layer plane. , The member supporting the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the intermediate portion of the pair of second long members 743 intersects in such a manner that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side portion becomes the right side portion. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily tilted in a posture arranged on the front side.

Since the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side portion is on the right side portion (the side on which the extension plate portion 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it is easy to tilt to the posture arranged on the front side.

Due to the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back surface side of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extending plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) Can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are on the left side (next to the front counterclockwise direction). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses the displacement toward the back surface side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is suppressed from being displaced to the front side by the extending plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (next to the front clockwise direction). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of the shielding design members 760 facing each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of the shielding design members 760.

The interlocking of the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. In FIGS. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the outer shape arrangement of the transmitted protrusion 741a and the guided protrusion 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is shown. Displacement.

In FIG. 60, a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58) is shown, and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. The state (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted protrusion 741a arranged in the guide hole 733 with the rotation of the rotating plate 730 is arranged as a rotating plate. By displacing the 730 in a direction close to the rotation axis side, the state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes.

In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720, so that the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter side with respect to the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be put out, but the details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an illuminated substrate 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 disposed on the front side of the illuminated substrate 751 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the illuminated substrate 751 and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting to the front side, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the drive motor MT3.

The illuminated substrate 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center thereof. Inside the opening 751a, a drive motor MT3 and an electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but the area where the LED as the light emitting means is arranged is limited. Therefore, from the viewpoint of light emission effect, the smaller the opening 751a is. desirable.

Since the LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is assembled from the front side to the light transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material and the light transmitting member 752a, and the visible surface is mirror-like (for example, silver-plated coating). The mirror surface member 752b is provided.

Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in the front view. .. As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light due to the light irradiation from another direction (for example, the light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , It is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized in the dark.

The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for ease of understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descent halfway state in which the effect member 700 descends from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the overhang state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Illustrated.

The lowering halfway state shown in FIG. 63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary position between the transmission portion 624a and the margin portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the columnar protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission unit 624a and is arranged at a position where the downward displacement of the effect member 700 can be started is regarded as the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is downwardly displaced by, for example, the effect member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) arranged in the pachinko machine 10. It is in a state of being switched according to the execution of the effect to be performed, and before the suggestion effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin portion 624b side.

As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shaped portion that is continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and is an arc-shaped hole in the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 goes toward the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated regardless of the presence or absence of energization of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51), whereby the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 connected to the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated.

Even if the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced is an effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. It is controlled to change the state to.

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 does not move downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in order to return the columnar protrusion 654 to the margin portion 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting a subsequent effect related to the effect member 700 due to the difference in the drive sound of the drive motor MT2. ..

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction of raising the effect member 700. That is, in the driving mode for raising the effect member 700, the effect member 700 is already arranged at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the subsequent displacement of the columnar protrusion 654 is a margin portion. The displacement is such that it slides along 624b.

Further, no matter where the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged in the margin portion 624b, there is no difference in the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is permissible that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar protrusion 654 is low, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is displaced ascendingly is not limited to the speed, and the rotation speed can be set large. As a result, the ascending speed of the effect member 700 can be set large.

In addition, even if the ascending speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed toward the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the columnar protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated at the position where it abuts on the columnar protrusion 654.

Further, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the ascending displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) is from the effect standby state. Compared to the state in the middle of descent, the state from the state in the middle of descent to the overhanging state is set larger.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 due to the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to visually recognize the effect as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is rapidly increasing to the player, and the effect of the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 can be obtained. Can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, for ease of understanding, FIG. 65 (b) is also shown as a diagram in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are not shown.

65 (a) and 65 (b) show the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates the descending halfway state in which the effect member 700 descends from the effect standby state, and FIG. 67 shows. The overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65A, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state where the detected plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before the execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced. However, the drive motor MT2 is driven and controlled with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to the effect standby state.

On the contrary, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side where the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling so as to release the transmission gear 650, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position where the columnar protrusion 654 has entered the margin 624b even slightly from the position of the columnar protrusion 654 in the effect standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 can be stopped. , The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The position of the columnar protrusion 654 is controlled to stop the drive of the drive motor MT2 after a time delay of a sufficient time for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be arranged at the end of the margin portion 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to the position where the position of the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the end of the margin portion 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is made passable through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly displaced, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), and is a position shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is set at a position that partially overlaps the regulation hole 657.

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in to put the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state (see FIG. 15C), and then the transmission gear 650 is set. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction of upward displacement of the effect member 700 by drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) is not reached.

The MPU221 (see FIG. 4) determines the displacement defect of the transmission gear 650 because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. Can be done.

Based on this determination, an abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error display of a displacement defect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulator 180 may remain regulated.

As a result, information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be transmitted to the clerk of the gaming machine store by diverting the notification such as the error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the 700 is displaced ascending is excessive, the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, and the lower arm member 630 becomes the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), a downward acceleration is always added to the lower arm member 630. This makes it possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 Can increase the contact area when collides with the upper arm member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large load from being locally generated on the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

As described above, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced ascending is excessive. Therefore, even if the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm is restricted by the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the columnar protrusion 654 as described above. The ascending displacement of the member 630 can be regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 by the drive force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponds to the state.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 67, the effect member is similar to the state shown in FIG. The auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is arranged at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630.

Thereby, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the degree to stabilize the posture) can be changed. That is, it is possible to increase the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 in the effect standby state or the overhang state as compared with the state in the middle of descent.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotation direction is not regulated (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 is rotated in the rotation direction around the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side. Posture may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side, but in the direction of rotation about the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side. The displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side when the effect member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the effect member 700 may be visibly generated without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the effect member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation about the right columnar protrusion 711 in the overhanging state is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. As a result, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and the attitude change of the effect member 700 can be prevented to the extent that it can be discriminated.

In addition, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped hole 732 in the overhanging state, the right side is caused by the contact between the auxiliary protrusion 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, centering on the columnar protrusion 711. As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear is restricted by the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630.

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, centering on the columnar protrusion 711. As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 on the right side.

Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotation direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the tilting direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress changes in posture and changes in posture in the horizontal swing direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected only by a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but also have an auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged above the cylindrical protrusion 711 and a cylindrical protrusion 711. The lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right sides, so that the posture change of the effect member 700 in the tilting direction can be changed. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged on the upper side of the cylindrical protrusion 711 is arranged in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (on the root side of the arcuate hole 634), so that the effect member 700 is tilted. The load generated by the change in posture in the direction can be withstood by the long main body of the lower arm member 630.

Further, a pressing member PC1 is disposed on the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The displacement of the arm member 630 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

In this way, when the load due to the posture change of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the long direction, the lower arm member 630 By utilizing the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent the posture change of the effect member 700.

Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (lower) of the cylindrical protrusions 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the posture change of the arm member 630 in the lateral swing direction.

In the present embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700. In this embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the effect member 700 changes its posture in a manner of tilting forward around the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and also with the lower arm member 630. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 changes in such a manner that the effect member 700 tilts backward around the connecting portion.

That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes occur in the effect member 700, the displacement of the effect member 700 in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of which of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Because it can be done, it can respond to any change in posture.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) are arranged with a narrow front-rear distance, the effect member 700 may rub against or collide with the partition member 310. Since it can be avoided, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect member 700, deterioration of the design portion, damage to the partition member 310, deterioration of visibility due to scratches (decrease in transparency), and the like.

In the state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 comes into contact with the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive of the drive motor MT2 is continued, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced only by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In the present embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effecting member 700 from bouncing back and being displaced to the ascending side. I'm in control.

As a result, the effecting member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 to be large (for example, a size that allows the effecting member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 is started to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting the displacement to the upper side, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the drive start of the drive motor MT2), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement start.

As a result, the load applied to the drive motor MT2 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced ascendingly.

In FIGS. 65 to 67, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the inner surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is illustrated by a hidden line. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It is passed through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electric wiring DK1 that may occur due to the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electric wiring DK1 previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I try to do it. As a result, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed in the vicinity of the wiring guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed from an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load received by the electric wiring DK1 from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shaped portion of the lower arm member 630 where the arcuate hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced from the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electric wiring with respect to the electric wiring DK1. It is configured so that the DK1 can be pushed toward the wiring guide member 714.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be stably generated.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged in the arcuate hole 634 arranged on the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 and largely hidden in the thin-walled lid portion 636 is in an overhanging state. Only placed in a position visible in the rear view (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arcuate hole 634, and at the same time, is a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw (or remove) the fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. This makes it possible to improve assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency. Further, as a result of assembling and maintaining the effect member 700 in a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at a halfway position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect member 700 and other constituent members are damaged.

Next, the displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 due to the state change will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of expansion / contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

FIG. 68 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is omitted for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, the descending state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the descending state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be expanded / displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter, and the expansion / displacement member 700 is not controlled to the intermediate position. It is controlled to allow extended displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from becoming excessive in size when viewed from the front, and thus the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

The decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered) at the intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700. As the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is a light transmitting member including the position covered by the effect member 700. The 752a is arranged at a position other than the visible position.

As a result, the visibility of the light emitted from the LED or the like arranged on the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a can be improved, and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted to the shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back surface side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is not irradiated with light, the mirror surface member 752b is exposed to the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment). Can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the illuminated substrate 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b and visually recognized is mixed with the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. Can be a different color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through a portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

The control mode is not limited to any one. For example, the shielding design member 760 may be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68 and then controlled to return to the collective arrangement state, or the drive direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. By switching in small steps in the forward and reverse directions, the shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction.

When the shielding design member 760 is controlled to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 is the position of the tip adjusting member in the state of the expanded displacement to the intermediate position. It is set to the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a of 744. As a result, the tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the elongated direction of the guide slot 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such displacement can be achieved, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or when the displacement is expanded to the maximum in the radial direction, the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 Is arranged at both ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjusting member 744, so that the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 in the circumferential direction can be returned (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b)). ).

Further, the intermediate position allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or it may be a position slightly before the position where the maximum expansion displacement occurs.

Here, in a state of being expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extension plate portion 761 is visually recognized overlapping with the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other in the front view), the extension plate is present. Since the portion 761 plays a role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In the present embodiment, since the red reflective sheet is attached to the extending plate portion 761 as in the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, the red color of the extending plate portion 761 can be visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if it is, it is difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extending plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extended plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 visually recognizable may be made conspicuous in the gap between the shielding design members 760.

In the present embodiment, the case where the light transmitting member 752a is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extending plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 shields. Since it is visually recognized in red as in the design member 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the shielding design members 760 as if they are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when irradiating light from the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

70 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is not shown for ease of understanding.

70 and 71 show an overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and an enlarged state of the effect member 700. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be expandable and displaceable until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view is maximized, and the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). The device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 in a front view. Therefore, the mode in which the light is reflected on the mirror surface member 752b when the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is irradiated can be changed from the case where the effect member 700 is arranged in the middle position of the enlarged displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 so that the ground color of the mirror surface member 752b (silver in the present embodiment) can be easily seen by the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to emit light of the same color. The color of the light to be visually recognized by the player can be changed in chronological order.

More specifically, for example, in the case of irradiating white light from the illuminated substrate 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized in the vicinity of the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member is accompanied by the expansion displacement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the ground color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes easily visible at the end position of the enlarged displacement. As a result, it is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player without changing the emission color.

In this embodiment, the expansion displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the expansion displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not continuously generated in a control mode, but the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , It is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700.

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is executably controlled only in the state where the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This makes it possible to prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other constituent members such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering avoidance of collision with other constituent members and configuring so that the displacement does not cause a problem due to collision with other constituent members, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced in the middle of the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduced displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 in the arrow LXXIVb direction view of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is an upper surface of the effect member 700 in the arrow LXXVb direction view of FIG. 75 (a). It is a figure.

In FIGS. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a), the plate-shaped main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. 72 is used as a reference. As such, a state in which the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear is shown. In FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), the rotary plate 730b is not shown.

72 (a) shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effecting member 700 is dispersed at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72 (b) shows the shielding design member 760 of the effecting member 700. A state of being expanded and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is shown.

In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. 72 (b). , The transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at an intermediate position of the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts to come into contact with the claw portion 734a on the back side of the rotating plate 730, and in FIG. 74, the first guided protrusion portion 743b is arranged on the lower side. The state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided to the back side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position immediately before the collective arrangement state is shown.

Since the influence of gravity is different between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the lower side and the member arranged on the upper side. It differs depending on the member.

As shown in FIG. 73, while the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 side by their own weight, the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side rotates by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent permitted in the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted protrusion 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Therefore, the timing at which the shielding design members 760 reach the collective arrangement state is not simultaneous at five, and at least the upper three members are earlier than the lower two members.

As a result, the displacement of the effect member 700 to the collective arrangement state can be stably performed. That is, when the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collective arrangement state vigorously, so that the lower expansion / contraction displacement member When it collides with the 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates on the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature damage.

On the other hand, when the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in the collective arrangement state as in the present embodiment. Is generated in a direction in which its own weight opposes the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, so that the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to the collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed off by the claw portion 734a on the back surface side and is put into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw portion 734b.

In FIG. 75, the collective arrangement state of the effect member 700 is shown. That is, the state in which the rotating plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view is shown up to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the assembled arrangement state of the effect member 700, the surface on the central axis side of the rear side claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740. Displacement to the outside of the direction is regulated.

In addition, the surface of the front side claw portion 734b on the central axis side abuts on the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 to the outside in the radial direction is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut in the radial direction with a front-rear width in the protrusion direction, so that the second long member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744 are arranged and arranged. The posture can be stabilized.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is slidably configured on the back surface of the extending plate portion 726. In this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts on the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collective arrangement state, the more it is inclined so as to project to the front side). Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can give a load to the front side to the second guided protrusion 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, the tip of the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state. The tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extending plate portion 726.

Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from excessively increasing, the load to be sandwiched in the front-rear direction is gradually increased to the tip adjusting member 744, and the position and posture in the front-rear direction of the tip adjusting member 744 are applied. Since it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction, the shielding design member 760 can be closely arranged without any gap in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common, and the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design member 760 is also common.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is on the side where the extending plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59 (a)) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, the right side, FIG. 74). (Refer to (b)) is configured so that the posture can be easily tilted so that it is arranged on the rear side as compared with the opposite side.

This is due to the formation mode of the second long member 743, and this posture inclination also occurs in the tip adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is on the back surface as compared with the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift to the clockwise direction side (on the left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, see FIG. 74 (b)).

On the other hand, in the rotating plate 730, the extended claw portion 734 is arranged so as to face the rearward viewing clockwise direction side of the second guided protrusion 744b, and the extending claw portion 734 is arranged in the rearward viewing counterclockwise direction with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, the inner diameter side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, whereby the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise side when viewed from the rear, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position of the collective arrangement of the effect member 700.

The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. 75. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the effect member 700 shown in time series from FIGS. 72 to 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). The posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and then a posture change that eliminates (corrects) the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be generated.

That is, by maintaining the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extending plate portion 761 come into contact with each other (collision). ), On the other hand, after the approach between the shielding design members 760 is completed, the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member The plate portion arranged in the foreground of the 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and it is possible to easily produce a sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state.

The state shown in FIG. 74 (b) is shown as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. Further, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation in FIG. 74 (b) is configured so as to be less likely to occur from the front-rear arrangement configuration of the second long member 743. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the extended plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other.

Further, the auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the reduced side wall portion in the enlarged / reduced displacement of the tip adjusting member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the extending plate portion 726, the tip adjusting member 744 is brought into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjusting member 744 that has reached the reduced side end of the displacement range. Posture displacement can be corrected.

As a result, not only the posture is corrected by engaging with other shielding design members 760, but also the posture can be stabilized when the tip adjusting member 744 alone reaches the reduced side end of the displacement range. can.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since the displacement rotation unit 800 has a pair of units arranged symmetrically and has a shape symmetrical to each other, the configuration of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the displacement rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described. Omit. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is shown in the assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 has a base plate portion 810 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal that is fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A drive in which a rod MB2 and a metal rod MB2 are inserted and fixed to a vertical slide member 820 configured to be slidable and displaceable in the vertical direction, and fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820, and fastened and fixed to a base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 are inserted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 with the vertical displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820. It includes a wiring arm member 870 that is rotatably and displaceably fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position of the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and a wiring arm member 870 and a wiring guide member 880 that guides electrical wiring. ..

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape and formed so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. It is provided with a drop-off prevention plate 814 arranged on the back surface side in order to prevent the drop-off.

The vertical slide member 820 is a circle from a substantially central position of a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge portion of the flat plate portion 821 to the back surface side, and a region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back surface side. At the columnar protrusions 823 that are projected in a columnar shape, the abbreviated parts 824a and 824b that are large enough to allow the connector part of the electrical wiring to be inserted and the formation of the wall part is omitted, and the left end part of the flat plate part 821. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a tubular shape (or a tubular member is arranged) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal metal rod MB3 capable of inserting the metal rod MB3 in the upper and lower center portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed in (or a tubular member is arranged) and fastened and fixed to a flat plate portion 821 near the end of the metal rod insertion portion 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. A fall-prevention member 827 that can be configured, a shaft support 828 that is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 so that the two-stage pinion 861 can be pivotally supported, and the left and right outside in the horizontal direction from the upper end ( It is provided with a support protrusion 829 that is projected in a cylindrical shape toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electric wiring by forming a displaceable region of the electric wiring arranged between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 inside. The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as the interrupted portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the back surface side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape on the back side in the upper portion thereof, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. The upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower side detection A detected plate portion 825a configured to be displaceable in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 is a female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 in the main body portion 831 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper portion of the main body portion 831. An insertion hole 832 in which an opening is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into the screw can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed. It includes a lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed in and a role as a winding center of the electric wiring as described later.

The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally driven and controlled, the transmission member 830 is displaced up and down in the vertical direction. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is displaced up and down.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 has a main body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is restricted in the left-right direction, and the back surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side to form a guide path for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and is formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a circular member 847 thereof. An illuminated substrate 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841 and an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. A pinnate member 854 that is rotatably supported by the blade, and a mediation member 857 that is fitted from the front side into the opening of the pinnate member 854 in order to match the central opening diameter of the pinnate member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. A central design member 858 is provided with a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 and is projected on the back surface side.

In the main body plate member 841, the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed to the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the rod arrangement portion 842 on which the metal rod MB3 is arranged and the lower side of the rod arrangement portion 842 thereof. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction is provided.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the lateral displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed from a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, but the details will be described later.

The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured such that a pinnate member 854 and a drive gear MG5 formed so as to be meshed with each other are assembled from different directions in the front-rear direction.

The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 formed in a cup shape having a size capable of accepting the pinnate member 854 and recessed toward the back side, and the receiving portion 848 is formed in a cylindrical shape from the center to the front side. It is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 849 to be formed.

The receiving portion 848 includes a through-hole portion 848a that is formed through a shape that overlaps with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5, and a gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 passes through the through-hole portion 848a. It is exposed to a position that can be seen from the rear.

In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 is made meshable with the drive gear MG5, the driving force is transmitted with the rotation of the drive motor MT5, and the pinnate member 854 is rotation-controlled. The rotary drive of the pinnate member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotary unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible even in the effect standby state.

A linear notch 849a is formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 849. This is a shape portion for facilitating the posture maintenance of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, and the details will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

The illuminated substrate 850 has a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a deformed opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the circular opening, and a variant thereof. It is composed of a front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illuminated substrate 850. The back side light emitting means 852b is provided.

In the deformed opening 851, the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be arranged inside the opening, and in the assembled state, the gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 is arranged on the back side of the deformed opening 851.

The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illuminated substrate 850, and the gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed with each other.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces in the front-rear direction. As a result, light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854.

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces outward in the radial direction. As a result, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side due to the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854. In the present embodiment, a plurality of long uneven shapes formed along an arc concentric with the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847. On the other hand, the arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized in the front view.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player does not need to arrange an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854 on the front side of the illuminated substrate 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved in the out-of-diameter direction. In other words, while utilizing the illuminated substrate 850 having a diameter smaller than the outermost diameter of the pinnate member 854, the outside of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outside of the outermost diameter of the pinnate member 854. Light can be visually recognized in (see FIG. 14).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing the light on the radial outside of the pinnate member 854 without increasing the size of the illuminated substrate 850. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the pinnate member 854 rotates at high speed, the back surface side of the pinnate member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to effectively perform light emission effect in this range. .. In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the radial outside of the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854, but for that purpose, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LED or the like. In other words, it becomes necessary to increase the area of the illuminated substrate, which increases the manufacturing cost of the substrate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while keeping the size of the illuminated substrate 850 smaller than the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854, only the visible position of the light is displaced in the outer diameter direction from the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854. It can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect without increasing the manufacturing cost.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 81 and 82. The decorative member 853 is a member formed of a light-impermeable resin material and coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of changing the appearance of the light between the inside and the outside of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, by irradiating blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, there are a region that appears to emit blue light and a region that appears to emit red light. Can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

The pinnate member 854 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a bored in the front-rear direction in the central portion and extending outwardly at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. A plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back surface side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back surface side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The pinnate member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5, but a detection sensor for detecting the posture of the pinnate member 854 is not arranged, and the drive motor MT5 is not provided. The posture of the pinnate member 854 is controlled by the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the pinnate member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and by minimizing the idling after the energization of the drive motor MT5 is released, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the pinnate member 854 assumed by the driving time of the pinnate member 854 and the actual posture of the pinnate member 854. By configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor, the posture of the pinnate member 854 may be detectable.

The mediation member 857 is formed so as to be fitted to the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is formed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. As a result, the mediator member 857 can be made rotatable about the cylindrical protrusion 849.

The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a projecting in a columnar shape from the central portion to the back surface side, a radial projecting portion 858b projecting outward from the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body portion. It is provided with a design ridge portion 858c that is projected upward from the top.

The central protrusion 858a is a portion to be inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in a posture in which the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a, and is inserted into the female screw formed at the tip portion from the back side of the circular member 847. By screwing the fastening screw to be inserted, the central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847.

In addition to the function as the design portion, the design ridge portion 858c can come into contact with the pinnate member 854 and function to adjust the rotation mode of the pinnate member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design ridge portion 858c and the front surface of the pinnate member 854 are arranged close to each other to the extent that they rub against each other, the increase in resistance at the time of rubbing is used to stabilize the stop posture of the pinnate member 854. Can be planned.

As a result, as the drive control mode of the pinnate member 854, a drive mode in which rotation is continued for a long period of time and a drive mode in which rotation of about one rotation is intermittently generated (irregular operation at the start of rotation is produced. When there is a drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the pinnate member 854 in the latter drive mode.

It will be described back to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so that it meshes with the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 and can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction. A rack member 862 and a dropout prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off from the vertical slide member 820 are provided.

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion having a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. A matching large-diameter pinion 861b is provided, and the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed in a long left and right direction, and is formed as a rack gear that can be meshed with the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. It is provided with a columnar projecting portion 862b projecting from the end portion to the front side in a columnar shape.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are composed of gear teeth having the same shape, and have a pitch circular radius of the small diameter pinion 861a. , The ratio of the large diameter pinion 861b to the pitch circle radius is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the lateral displacement amount of the rack member 862 to the lateral displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar protrusion 862b is formed with an outer diameter that can be arranged inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the columnar protrusion 862b is arranged on the transmission guide portion 813. The plate thickness is set so that the columnar protrusion 862b does not fall off from the transmission guide portion 813 even if it approaches the back surface side until it comes into contact with the plate 814.

Thereby, when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth having the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is as large as that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

Therefore, the displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. As a result, it is possible to secure a large displacement width in the left-right direction of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described in detail later.

FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and has a long main body portion 871 formed in a long curved shape and one side is open, and a long main body portion 871 thereof. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the long direction of the above, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 arranged in close proximity to the support hole 872 and formed in the same direction so that electrical wiring can be arranged. It is possible to extract a plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open side end of the long main body 871 and a resin mold for forming the claws 874. It is provided with a through hole 875 for the purpose of forming a through hole 875, and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting from the vicinity of the other end portion of the elongated main body portion 871 in the elongated direction in a circular cross section in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872.

The long main body portion 871 is a portion in which the electrical wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and the narrowing portion 871a having a shortened width is provided in the intermediate portion thereof. The electrical wiring is arranged along the length direction of the long body portion 871 and is guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion on the opposite side on the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the length direction.

The throttle portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 so as not to cause disconnection and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively displaced. The throttle portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the throttle portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed in a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820.

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged in the wiring arm member 870 passes to the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, it is possible to reduce the amount of misalignment of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871. Further, since the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 having a minimum area, the electrical wiring is opposite to the open portion side of the long main body portion 871. It is possible to prevent the through hole 875 from coming out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in the present embodiment).

The circular protrusion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protrusion length that can be arranged in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 and the prevention plate 881. The member includes a path forming member 882 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape in which one side is open, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion, so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the back side at a position separated in the vertical direction. It constitutes a path passing through the upper open portion 883 and the lower open portion 884.

That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge portion, and the upper opening portion 883 forming the upper opening portion of the path due to the lack of the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. The lower opening portion 884 that is formed in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows the connector of the electrical wiring to be inserted in the portion, and the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range that does not overlap with the prevention plate 881 in the left-right direction view. An extended portion 885, a guide recess 886 recessed in a long groove shape so as not to overlap the extended portion 885 in the left-right direction, and a guide recess 886 below the lower edge portion of the guide recess 886. A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided, which is projected in a columnar shape on the prevention plate 881 side, and a fastening screw inserted into the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip thereof.

A space is formed on the back surface side of the path forming member 882 so that the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction. It enters the back surface side of the wall portion 882a at the position where it is arranged (the position near the lower end of the displacement) (see FIG. 86 (a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position near the lower end of the displacement on the back surface side of the wiring guide member 880 constituting the path through which the electrical wiring is guided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal slide member 840 while allowing the electric wiring and the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 to overlap in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement of the wiring guide member 880 in the width direction is the extension portion 885. And it is regulated by the prevention plate 881. Further, the width direction length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total width direction length of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion portion 876. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 to the back surface side.

The guide recess 886 is a connecting recess 886c that connects the front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, the rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b, and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. And prepare.

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion for limiting the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. In FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changing from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state is illustrated in chronological order.

86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L of FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, FIG. 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L of FIG. 77, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the displacement rotation unit 800 in a line.

In FIG. 86, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is a displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the intermediate right end state and the effect upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the intermediate right end state and the effect upper end state. The state of the left end in the middle of being arranged at the left end of the displacement path between the two is shown, and in FIG. 89, the state of the upper end of the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86 (a), 87 (a), 88 (a) and 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 has a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the illustration of the other shaped portions is omitted so that the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be visually recognized. Further, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end portion of the base plate 810, it is possible to prevent the vertical slide member 820 from being hidden during the vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b) and 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the lateral slide member 840 is shown with an imaginary line. For the purpose of showing only the displacement width in the left-right direction, it is shown by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841.

Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The electric wiring DK2 is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocally displaced in the vertical direction. First, the ascending displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the effect standby state (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. That can be determined by MPU221 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the effect standby state, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer end portions) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged on the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retract from the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840, it is possible to avoid that the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full left and right outside.

The state in which the drive motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction of ascending and displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state and the detected plate portion 825a is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the right end state on the way (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the right end state on the way by the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the right end state on the way, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the ascending direction and the right direction from the effect standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the ascending direction, and the posture is maintained.

That is, in the right end state on the way, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, so that the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the right end state on the way is executed without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. Ru. This makes it possible to avoid collisions between the members due to displacement timing deviations that tend to occur when the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are both displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction with the ascending displacement of the vertical slide member 820. In this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement exceeds the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813 and is displaced in the left-right direction.

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are teethed on the two-stage pinion 861. Will be combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 to the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circular radius of the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) to the pitch circular radius of the large diameter pinion 861b is 9:16, so that the left and right positions of the transmission guide portion 813 are set. The lateral slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by the left-right width obtained by multiplying the change amount of the above by a constant (that is, 16/9 = about 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the left end state on the way, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced outward to the left and right as much as in the effect standby state. In other words, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps with the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88A, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the right end state to the left end state on the way, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is formed in the connecting recess 886c formed on the back side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance between the support protrusion 829 as the support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is reduced as compared with the effect standby state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the lateral slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction. Further, at the time of downward displacement, the reverse (after the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 is prevented, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping with the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction view) is established.

As a result, even if the displacement timing of the horizontal slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870 deviate from each other, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 collide with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end portion (horizontal end portion in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is limited to the vertical displacement and the posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer end portions that are difficult for the player to pay attention to, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of view.

As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is used during the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state. It is arranged in the rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connecting recess 886c of the guide recess 886, and has a support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( The anteroposterior distance from (see FIG. 84) is maintained in the minimum state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at different front-rear positions corresponding to the vertical positions by using the wiring arm member 870 that can change the posture according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. By making it possible, it has an advantageous effect that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the rear, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. More specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the effect standby state is set to the right side (left and right side side). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the position on the right side (left and right inward side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the displacement rotation unit 800 is miniaturized in order to avoid contact. There is a risk that it will be necessary to take measures. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be sufficiently secured, while the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is reduced.

In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in particular, to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640 arranged in the right side region of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc. is likely to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured so that the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 can be displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the lateral slide member 840 is not restricted in the left-right direction. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840 by arranging the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 on the front side, and the horizontal slide member 840. It is avoided that the displacement of is limited by the electric wiring DK2.

In addition, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and at the upper position where the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged to the rear side for electrical wiring. The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the members arranged on the game board 13 as a configuration of a solenoid or the like for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

The state change of the electric wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The state change of the electric wiring DK2 referred to here means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in a state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around a pillar.

In the electric wiring DK2, the upper portion (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding portion DK2b is not preferred to extend and bend exclusively up and down. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 to the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86A), so that the rigidity is higher than that of the winding displacement portion of the lower winding portion DK2b. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the resin cable tube is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so as to exhibit a behavior in which the rigidity is higher than that of the winding-displaced portion.

In the state shown in FIG. 89A, the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2 to avoid rubbing between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

Further, since the wiring arm member 870 is configured so that the lower end opening direction is directed vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary bending deformation from occurring in the electric wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, and the lower side thereof. The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887.

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the columnar protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar protrusion 823. It is composed of.

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 887. Possible to be configured.

That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 and the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 are configured to be different from each other. In this embodiment, the planes in which the planes are orthogonal to each other and the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 are the first omitted portion 824a, the second omitted portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. It is configured to pass through 873.

Displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by having a portion of the wiring arm member 870 arranged inside the long main body portion 871 sandwiched between the throttle portions 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electric wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

From here, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wiring DK2 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be independently completed in each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise from the front view centering on the columnar protrusion 823 from the portion that has passed through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and includes the portion that is wound counterclockwise in the front view, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as the limit, and is in the effect standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). In, the wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 822 in the effect standby state can be reduced.

When the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled and the inside in the radial direction centered on the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the lateral slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left side, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pushed and the upper winding portion is radially outwardly centered on the columnar protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, since the guide piece 844a that inclines downward toward the left is projected from the left end portion of the wiring guide member 844, the upper winding portion DK2a is outward (vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844). It is possible to prevent the upper winding portion DK2a from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from the portion hanging downward from the wiring arm member 870 in the left side view (direction view from the left and right outside) around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (the cylindrical projecting portion 887). It includes a portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction), and means a portion up to a portion arranged in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the effect standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (a)). ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 882a in the effect standby state can be reduced.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the vertical slide member 820 being displaced upward from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction about the columnar projecting portion 887. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed and the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction centered on the cylindrical projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the inclined direction toward the front side toward the lower side, the lower winding portion DK2b is between the columnar projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (cylindrical portion). It can be prevented from entering (above the projecting portion 887), and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the horizontal slide member 840. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction is limited by the arrangement of the lateral slide member 840. The front-back width of (see) can be fully utilized for displacement.

Therefore, since a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently lengthened, and the wiring arm member 870 can be used. The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 has a center frame 86 arranged on the front side of a window portion 60a having an opening formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of streams whose front side is open from the resin member. A ball flow unit 150, which is formed in a road shape and is arranged in the lower portion on the back surface side of the base plate 60, is provided.

The ball flow-down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to accept a ball that has flowed down the lower end LB1 of the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path 152, which is a long box-shaped member whose front side is open and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 151 from the back side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving flow path 151. It includes a flow path member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inside of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the sphere.

The plurality of ridges 154 are arranged alternately on the left and right at intervals of about the diameter of a sphere for each of the left and right wall portions. As a result, the flow of the sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 can be decelerated.

The functions of the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 will be described. In addition to the function of guiding the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to the ball discharge path (not shown), the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 enter the second winning opening 640. There is a function to improve the effect by making the later game ball visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the second winning opening 640, a detection sensor for detecting ball passage is arranged near the lower edge shown in FIG. 90. As a result, the prize ball can be paid out and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the player can notice the entry into the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving flow path 152. For example, it is possible to easily notice a situation in which payment is not made due to a problem on the pachinko / pachislot machine store side.

As will be described below, since it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1, the position of the detection sensor is set to the downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1 or the like. The timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of holding display may be delayed.

The game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is an intermediate flow path LM1 (FIG. 27) flow down.

Similar to the guide flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be able to guide the sphere vertically downward while displacing the sphere left and right in a zigzag manner. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 look the same in the flow mode, the ball in the path on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the sphere is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 even by visually recognizing.

Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is information that is directly linked to the interests of the player, and is the information of the nail (not shown) to be planted on the base plate 60. This is a part where individual differences occur in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the state.

In the present embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before entering the second winning opening 640. Since the nails that the balls collide with are planted, whether the balls easily flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the shortening of the time during the right-handed game flows down the guide path DL1 and enters the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof, unless the ball enters the general winning opening 63. It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a waste ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 correspond uniquely. The degree of freedom of the attention position is higher in the case of paying attention to the guide path DL1 than in the case of paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 because the guide path DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It's clear.

Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide path DL1 is confirmed, the frequency of the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the frequency of occurrence of wasted balls in the right-handed game, and the like are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game in consideration of.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and a ball entering the second winning opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. As a result, it is possible to make it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and has been discharged from the game area, so it flows down vertically as it is, and the specific winning opening 65a is viewed from the front. If it flows down to a position where it overlaps with, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, which may hinder the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by letting the ball flow inward to the left and right by the first receiving flow path 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, the ball reaches the position where it overlaps with the specific winning opening 65a in front view. It is prevented (see Fig. 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. ..

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in the front view to the vicinity of the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view, and passes through the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side of. That is, since the sphere guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, he is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to make the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed route recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning opening 640.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, an important display is executed when the player looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for viewing the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the display, which is a comfortable game. Can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows down diagonally downward to the left on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridge portion 154, the staying time of the flowing ball can be extended. This makes it possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in the front view.

Further, by ensuring a long left-right width of the flow path of the sphere, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. This makes it easier for the ball flowing down inside the second receiving flow path member 153 to enter the player's field of view.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160, and the decorative means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are disassembled views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160, and the decorative means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate effecting means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 from the back side to the center frame 86 so as to be in contact with the front side and the upper surface side of the light guide plate 161. The center frame 86 is formed of an impermeable resin material and has an upper support member 162 that aligns the light guide plate 161 and a light transmissive resin material that presses the lower portion of the light guide plate 161 from the back surface side. A lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed, a sphere flow path component 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material to form a sphere flow path, and a light-transmitting member. A plurality of left and right side support members 165 that are formed from the resin material of the above and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a manner of pressing the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, and are formed in a long left and right shape to support the upper side. The horizontal substrate unit 166 is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending from the upper side of the member 162 to the front side of the center frame 86, and is formed in a vertically long shape and is formed from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. A vertical substrate unit 167 arranged and fastened along the left inner wall is provided.

The decorative means 170 includes a first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged at the left and right center positions near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. On the right side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86, on the front side of the right frame portion of the center frame 86. A third decorative member 177 to be arranged is provided.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to the central portion thereof, and a margin member 173 that is composed of another member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10. To prepare for.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 is provided with a horizontally long groove portion 171a having a horizontally long groove shape recessed on the back surface side. The horizontally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the illuminated substrate of the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate effecting means 160 can be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is visibly configured through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the inside of the center frame 86, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the light emitting effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state can be visually recognized by the player without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

The relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 on the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove portion 171a is separately shown as an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the illuminated substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light is irradiated along the arrows D1a and D1b in the vertical direction. 1 Light that reaches the reflection shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back surface side of the decorative member 171 can be conspicuously visually recognized.

As a result, even in a state where the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the mode (light emitting range or light emitting shape) of the light emitting effect visually recognized by the player depending on the forming range or the forming shape of the reflection shape portion 171b. Can be made different and visible.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface on the lower surface. It is arranged in two horizontal rows, that is, a row corresponding to the top and bottom and a row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface are arranged inside the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a, and the rear row on the lower surface is arranged outside the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the upper row and the front row of the lower surface can irradiate the reflection shape portion 171b with light, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface can be used as different light emitting targets. It can irradiate light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161 and the irradiated LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

In the LED arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, the upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows. Thereby, the light emitted from the front and rear two rows of LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in the front view. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the light that irradiates the display area side and the light that irradiates the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged at the same front-rear position as the reflection shape portion 171b, while the front-rear surface is formed of a flat surface. As a result, even when the light is irradiated from the horizontal substrate unit 166, it is possible to prevent the light from being reflected in the intensity, and the visibility can be maintained.

In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specifications, so-called different specifications) is displayed by the number of the star shapes. It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a member separate from the first decorative member 171 in the case of manufacturing a pachinko machine 10 having a different type of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be replaced by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

The margin member 173 is configured as a member separate from the first decorative member 171 and has a shape different from the shape formed on the reflection shape portion 171b as the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate (in this embodiment, a striped groove). ) Is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflection shape portion 171b.

FIG. 97 is a partially front enlarged view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflection shape portion 171b travels to the front side due to reflection or refraction, and is glittering. On the other hand, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is visually recognized slightly dark because it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and travels as it is, rather than being mainly reflected.

As a result, the shape of the margin member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal substrate unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were. In other words, it is possible to visually recognize the LED as if the LED is arranged on the back side to produce light emission.

The second decorative member 174 is provided with a shielding member 175 in which a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) having low transparency is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back surface side of the second decorative member 174. .. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the back surface side of the second decorative member 174.

As a result, the game region (particularly the left side portion) formed on the front side of the base plate 60 and the formation region of the light guide plate 161 in the front view (including the region overlapping the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in the front-rear direction). Can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

The third decorative member 177 is three-dimensionally formed in such a manner that a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are three-dimensionally formed on the front side and a plurality of hexagonal shaped portions arranged so as to be displaced back and forth on the back side thereof. It is provided with a plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 that are formed in a uniform manner.

Like the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in a space arranged between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1 in the center frame 86. To.

As a result, it is possible to execute a light effect that is visually recognized three-dimensionally, not a light effect that is visually recognized in a plane between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1. That is, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth in the front view.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the back surface side, which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front-rear direction is determined by the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front view. Whether it gets brighter or not changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to perform a light effect such as illuminating the front side or illuminating the back side.

In the present embodiment, as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the back side, a third symbol display device 81, a front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed. , The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with the case where light is emitted from a light emitting means such as a fixedly arranged LED toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the position in the front-rear direction of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front view. Which position of is brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to perform a light effect such as illuminating the front side or illuminating the back side.

In the present embodiment, as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left-right direction, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed (see FIG. 27). The first light irradiation device 330 functions to shield at least a part of the light emitted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 due to its arrangement.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect mode of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played via the three-dimensional decorative member 178. It is possible to easily prevent the color of the light visually recognized by the person from becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is configured to be visible in front view and the whole ball is configured to flow down in the same path has been described, but the ball flow-down unit of the second embodiment has been described. In 2150, the flowing sphere is configured to flow down one of a plurality of paths. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 illustrates an example of how the granular member 320 looks immediately after firing. As shown in FIG. 98, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left, as a difference from the ball flow-down unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving flow path 2155 is provided, which is a flow path having a size that allows a sphere to flow down.

The third receiving flow path 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has an inclined angle set to be looser than that of the first receiving flow path 152, and the lower end (left end) is set to the left side of the front view of the first winning opening 64 with the inclined portion 2155a. , A discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from the front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is slower than the flowing speed of the sphere in the first receiving flow path 152 due to the shallow inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in the front view. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of view for a long time.

As a result, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to be in the view of the player playing the game while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. .. In other words, the attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without discomfort.

The guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 in the same manner, and flows along the second receiving flow path member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152. It is switched by the switching means whether it flows down in the first direction D21 where it flows down or in the second direction D22 which flows down along the third receiving flow path 2155.

In the present embodiment, the ridge portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed in the second receiving flow path member 153 increases the flow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving flow path member 153. Therefore, if the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153, the ball will be guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. ..

Such a situation is likely to occur when a plurality of balls continuously enter in a short period of time, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second winning opening 640 in a row. Therefore, by visually recognizing the situation in which the balls flow down the third receiving flow path 2155, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning opening 640 in a row.

The mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow unit 2150 is provided with an opening / closing plate that can switch between a state in which the ball flows into the first direction D21 and a state in which the ball flows in the first direction D21 by using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that is arranged so as to be able to generate a magnetic force at the branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 is arranged, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the ball to flow down. You may switch the route.

According to these methods, not only the flow path of the ball can be switched to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also the ball can be stopped or the ball can be turned back. Unlike a ball that flows down in the game area, changing the flow path of the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, so a ball that uses magnetic force as described above. It is possible to switch the flow path of.

As described above, when the flow path of the sphere is switched by the device using electricity, it is possible to control whether the sphere flows in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22 by MPU221 (see FIG. 4). can. Therefore, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155 in 60% of the cases where the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving flow path is used. It is possible to improve the expectation of the player who sees the ball flowing down 2155 for the big hit.

In this case, it is easiest to gather the player's line of sight at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152, which is a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 2150 (game). It is possible to improve the attention to the ball already discharged from the area).

As described above, the fact that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 is the expected value of the big hit of the lottery when the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high or the ball enters the second winning opening 640. Suggests a high case.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and when the passage of the sphere is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired. ..

As described above, in order to launch the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the launch standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. take time. On the other hand, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the discharge portion 2155b from there. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by using this flow time.

As a result, the passage of the sphere is determined by the detection sensor SC21, and at the same time, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is launched after a certain time delay expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the flow of the sphere with the firing timing of the granular member 320 as compared with the case of controlling to.

For example, the oil adhering to the sphere may adhere to the first receiving flow path 152 to cause a decrease in the flow speed of the sphere. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in such a manner, the granular member 320 may be fired before the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, and the effect of the effect may be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines the passage of the sphere, by controlling the granular member 320 to be launched, the player waits until the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, it is possible to improve the effect of a series of effects, such as executing a powerful effect that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 by launching the granular member 320. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving flow path 2155 through which the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially arranged in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the above-mentioned series of effects without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

It should be noted that a control that does not fire the granular member 320 when the sphere passes through the detection sensor SC21 may be combined. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, the possibility of the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot may be increased.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155, the player with respect to the third receiving flow path 2155 at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the attention of the player.

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to improve the attention to the subsequent display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

A detection sensor having the same function as that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, the ball may be placed in a place where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 at the timing of passing the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific region where the benefit given to the player by passing the game ball is more advantageous.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be expanded / contracted / displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrically dispersed has been described, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, the effect member 700 has been described. , It is configured so that a non-symmetrical section can be formed in the radial expansion / contraction displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 is only in the effect member 3700, and the configurations of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 are common. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effecting member 3700 is arranged at an intermediate position (intermediate position) of the radial expansion / contraction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the adoption of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, the lower two and the upper left 1 While the sheets are radially expanded and displaced with the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in the assembled arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). The configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotating plate 3730. The rotary plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotary plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that a part of the guide holes 733 is changed to another guide hole 3733.

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 is provided with a separate guide hole 3733 in place of the guide holes 733 on the upper and upper right sides in the front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-mentioned small-diameter arc portion 733a, the large-diameter arc portion 733b, and the adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends from the connecting portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position along the same arc shape, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacent to the large-diameter arc portion 733b in the clockwise direction) or It is formed so as to sharply approach the small diameter arc portion 733a side (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733).

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided to the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c. The telescopic displacement member 740 guided to the above does not undergo radial expansion displacement while being guided to the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be displaced. The operation caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by making the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 left-right asymmetric, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the up-down direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position still remains in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 shifts to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, the effect member 3700 receives a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction in the front view due to its own weight. This load can cause the effect member 3700 to change its posture in the rotation direction around the axis in the front-rear direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

As a result, the direction (that is, not planned) is not planned only from the shapes of the functional plate portion 720 (see FIG. 55), the rotary plate 3730, and the telescopic displacement member 740 (see FIG. 59), which are members for displace the shielding design member 760. The shielding design member 760 can be displaced in the direction of rotation).

In the present embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same except for the other parts, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc are the same. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same for the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state or is arranged at the radial expansion displacement end position, so that the shielding design member 760 is left and right. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the left-right center position and the top-bottom center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained to be displaced, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented.

An example of production using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time and are executed individually has been described, but the purpose thereof is to avoid collision with other configurations. ..

In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be feasible at the same time, after adopting a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded and displaced in the radial direction while the effecting member 3700 is displaced downward.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the radial expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 returns, so that the effect member 3700 is shown in FIG. 99. It is possible to cause a posture change of rotation opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

In this way, it is possible to apply rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions to the radial expansion and displacement of the effect member 3700, so that a simple configuration specialized for radial expansion and contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760. As a result, it is possible to make a complicated movement with the addition of displacement in the rotational direction. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect member 3700.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fourth embodiment, the case has been described. The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 due to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the setting part 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, since the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the player does not have the line of sight blocked by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIGS. 12 (a) and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the linear motion member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (minutely displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, since the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the drive of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced ascending by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, so that control can be facilitated.

Further, in the embodiment in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (minutely displaced) so as to be visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can be done.

The mode in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (small displacement) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to vibrate the collision member 420. In this case, it is preferable that the other vibrating device is arranged on the lower side of the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent another vibrating device from being loaded when the collision member 420 is displaced due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the case has been described. The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 due to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the setting part 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is launched, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see an angle of about 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. It is possible that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 to hinder the rotation of the lid member 480, but in the present embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed from an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotation shaft side. This makes it difficult to hinder the rotation of the lid member 480.

When the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven in the forward rotation direction while the granular member 320 is on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracted side (small diameter side in FIG. 102) and the granular member 320 collides. It falls on the member 420.

On the other hand, since the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released at this timing, it is possible to avoid the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. ..

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the launch standby state, the ascending speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved and the granular member 320 can be launched at a high speed.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side at the time of launching, the firing of the granular member 320 is hindered at the left and right central portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing is performed in the left-right direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were the main one.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is launched can be changed depending on the launch mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the forward direction and the launch mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, the firing direction of the granular member 320 can be varied, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are provided with a flat plate-shaped substrate and irradiate light in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the sixth embodiment has been described. The first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are provided with an illuminated substrate in which the second light irradiation device 6340 is bent and arranged. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the first light irradiation device 6330, in addition to the illuminated substrate 332, the front side end portion is close to the front side end portion of the illuminated substrate 332, and the back side end portion is the illuminated substrate. A second illuminated substrate 6334 is provided so as to be tilted away from the 332.

The second illuminated substrate 6334 includes a light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct the light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of illuminating the granular member 320 that scatters the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310.

In the second light irradiation device 6340, in addition to the illuminated substrate 342, the back side end portion is close to the back side end portion of the illuminated substrate 342, and the front side end portion is inclined so as to be away from the illuminated substrate 342. The second illuminated substrate 6344 is provided.

The second illuminated substrate 6344 is provided with light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the back side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct the light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

The arrangement of the illuminated board is not limited to this. For example, only the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 may be adopted, the illuminated substrate 332, 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be adopted. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side of the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 where the light emitting means is not arranged, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

Further, for the purpose of sloping the direction of light irradiation, a device capable of changing the posture of the light emitting means may be configured without taking the method of increasing the number of illuminated substrates. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illuminated substrate 332,342 and the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 to enable light irradiation.

The substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box A100. 107 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

The arrows F, B, L, R, and U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box A100, respectively. Since the same applies to the following figures, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the substrate box A100 connects the box cover A200, the box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). The main control device includes a sealing unit A400 to be connected by the sealing unit A400, and a sub-cover A500 arranged at an end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotation shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400. The rotary shaft A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 toward the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is a lateral direction (arrows U, D) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). It is formed as an axis parallel to the direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotation axis A410 is on one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) in the front view (arrow B direction view) (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220 with the covering portion A270 described later interposed therebetween, the arrow. It is arranged on the R direction side). The rotating shaft A410 may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the side in the L direction of the arrow), which is opposite to one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) on the main control device A110. The main control device A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) the switch device A120 and the key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same other configurations except for the presence / absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

The switch device A120 is operated (on) by pushing the operation unit A122 from the initial position and turned off by releasing the push (the operation unit A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main control device A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operation unit A122 is pushed to the operating position (turned on position), and the main control is based on the click feeling. The operator can detect the completion of the input to the device A110. Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as "off position"), and the key A140 inserted at the off position is rotated (rotated to the right in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as "on"). A key-operated selector switch (mode) that is turned on by being placed in a position) and is turned off by being placed in an off position while the key A140 is rotated (rotated counterclockwise in this embodiment). It is configured as a changeover switch).

In this embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Further, in the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key A140 cannot be removed in the on position.

Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes RAM erasure), and is a key device. In a state where the A130 is turned on, as will be described later, a mode in which the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”) is exemplified. ..

Here, as described above, since the board boxes A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) are connected so as not to be opened, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130). It is necessary to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 in the present embodiment, openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is possible to save time and effort by eliminating the need to open the substrate box A100. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are located on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation unit A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The legs A121 and A131 are projected, and the legs A121 and A131 are inserted into the holes opened in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from the front side, and the portions protruding to the back side are soldered to the switch device A120 and the key device. The A130 is arranged on the front side of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, on a plane including an external force (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (insertion direction), arrows U, D, and arrows L, R) on the switch device A120 and the key device A130. When a force in the parallel direction) is applied and tilted with respect to the main control device A110 (printed board A119), the leg on one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the side lifted from the printed board A119 by tilting). While the tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, the compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed substrate A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may be broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may be peeled off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, in the substrate box A100, a means for solving such a problem is adopted. Details will be described later.

The main control device 100 includes a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display via the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing the setting using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and then the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position while the pachinko machine A10 is pushed. Turn on the power of. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in.

In the present embodiment, the first to sixth six values are defined as the set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by the pushing operation of the operation unit A122, the set values are changed from the first value to the first value. When the operation unit A122 is pushed in from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device The setting value displayed in 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

The information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to secure (more) the amount of information that can be displayed as compared with the case of using, for example, a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress the operation error. Further, by also using the device for displaying information about the game (third symbol display device 81), the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the display of the set value may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting change mode (the setting value is confirmed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode with the set value set (changed) is activated.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position (that is, it remains in the on position), and the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. However, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 while the key A140 of the key device A130 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode with the set value set (changed) is also activated.

Further, in the setting change mode, RAM erasing is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasure include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, and the timing when the key A140 is arranged at the off position. That is, the timing for executing the RAM erase can be set as appropriate.

Further, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the set value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (while it is placed in the on position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is inserted. If the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in the state of being arranged in the off position, the pachinko machine A10 is not started in the normal mode and is in an error state, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display at the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, to confirm the set value set in the setting change mode, first, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and then the power of the pachinko machine A10 is confirmed. Turn on. As a result, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the set value is activated, and the set value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

The display of the set value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. As a result, the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 can be turned off, and the power of the pachinko machine A10 can be turned on with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 placed in the off position. The normal mode with the set value is activated.

In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined mode. As a predetermined embodiment, for example, an embodiment in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) is blinked at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable 4-digit display, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (2) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode. However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the set value is displayed by the latter two digits (two) (for example, the first value is "01" and the second value is "". "02" is displayed, and "06" is displayed as the sixth value).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main control device A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 in the direction of arrow CXa of FIG. 108. FIG. 110B is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 has a front wall portion A201 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate in front view, and the front wall portion A201 from the four sides to the back side (direction of arrow B). Mainly the wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) that are erected toward the wall and formed in a plate shape. In preparation for the above, each of these wall portions A201 to A205 is formed in a box shape with the back surface open. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

Two steps are formed on the upright tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. As for the step, the first surface (first step) is formed on the internal space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the second surface is formed on the outer side (opposite side of the internal space) of the first surface. A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height of standing from the front wall portion A201 is small), and the surface on which the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as "seat surface A206"). Is formed as).

The seat surface A206 is formed as a surface (first surface) of each wall portion A201 to A205 in a continuous front view substantially rectangular frame shape, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. Fastening holes A206a with female threads screwed on the inner circumference are recessed in the four corners of the seat surface A206 (the parts where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected to each other). Will be done.

Therefore, in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), the outer edge side of the front surface thereof is brought into contact with the seat surface A206, and the screw ASC (FIG. 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b)) are screwed into the fastening hole A206a to be fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and to the substrate box A100. It is stored.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 at predetermined intervals. The engaging piece A207 extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction) and the erection tip of the base portion. It is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300 as described later.

The front wall portion A201 is formed with a portion recessed in a part thereof toward the back surface side (direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 located retracted to the back side (main control device 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is a front wall portion. It is formed on the front wall portion A201 by a plate-shaped wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the substrate box A100 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) is located and operated on the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the side closer to the main control device A110 than the first region. It is formed from a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms an operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and is a substantially horizontally long rectangle in front view (the length in the arrow L and R directions with respect to the length dimension in the arrow U and D directions). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimensions are lengthened), and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

The operating wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotating shaft A410 side of the sealing unit A400) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 in the front view (arrow B direction view).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 as it goes toward it. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be formed, and the first connection wall portion A220 and the first connection wall portion A220 and the space can be formed. The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded as a space that combines the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210.

In this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and the securing of the space inside the substrate box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 is on one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the lateral direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 is on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R). One side on the direction side) is a wall portion connected to the front wall portion A201, respectively, and is arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted and removed from the key device A130, and a main control device A110 ( AOP1 to AOP8 are formed as openings AOP1 to AOP8 for enabling connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The front view shape of the opening A250 is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (a substantially square front view in the present embodiment), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210. Located in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation unit A122 in the pushing direction (arrow B direction) and is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a part for controlling (falling down), and is formed in the shape of a frame having a substantially square front view surrounding the opening A250, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operating wall portion A210 is higher than the tip of the operating portion A122 pushed to the operating position (turned on position) from the operating wall portion A210. The tip is set to a low position (the tip of the operation unit A122 protrudes outward (toward the arrow F direction) from the vertical tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pushing operation of the operation unit A122 from being obstructed by the guide wall A251, and it is possible to improve the operability of the operation unit A122.

However, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operating wall portion A210 is higher than the tip of the operating portion A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). It may be set to a position (the tip of the operation unit A122 is immersed inward (toward the arrow B direction) from the vertical tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

Further, the tip of the operation portion A122 whose guide wall A251 is pushed up to the operating position (position to be turned on) from the operation wall portion A210 is abbreviated as the standing tip from the operation wall portion A210. It may be set to the same height position. When pushing the operation unit A122, the fingers are brought into contact with the vertical tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed to the operating position based on the contact. .. This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the tip end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112A), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operating wall portion A210 and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-shaped end face wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 are mainly provided, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is housed in the space inside the portion A271. To.

The peripheral wall portion A271 is a pair of protrusions protruding outward in the radial direction from a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section and two facing positions (positions in which the phases are substantially different from each other by 180 degrees) of the base portion A271a. A portion A271b is provided. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (arrows F and B directions). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the peripheral wall portion A271 (base A271a and protrusion A271b) (that is, a shape in which two facing portions of the circle are projected outward in the radial direction). An opening is formed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end face wall portion A272. As a result, the end face wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a plate-like (cantilever) in which the base end is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) is free.

Here, the opening A260 is limited to the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position (the region required to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees to allow displacement of a portion of the key A140 on one side of the center of rotation and the other side of the center of rotation of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (on one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end face wall portion A272 extends inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and is formed in a substantially annular shape in the front view (arrow B direction view). And a square portion A272b extending inward in the radial direction from the inner edge of the annulus portion A272a and formed in a substantially triangular shape in the front view (arrow B direction view). The square portions A272b are arranged in a posture of tapering inward in the radial direction in the front view (viewing in the direction of arrow B), and are formed at two positions having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

The key A140 has different dimensions from the radius of gyration of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of gyration of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are ridges that are extended in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end thereof is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. ..

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and the second One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge portion of the key A140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

Further, on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on the extension line of the other end). Are formed respectively. The display unit is a portion showing information on the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with the edge directed toward one end of the first ridge A211 is placed in the off position (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the key with the edge directed toward one end of the second ridge A212. The A140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (paralleled) in series (in a row) along the edge portion of the front wall portion A201.

Upright walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210. The erection wall A280 includes a first erection wall A281, a second erection wall A282, a third erection wall A283, and a fourth erection wall A284, and is opened by each of these erection walls A281, A282, A283, and A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the erection wall A280.

The first erection wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 are arranged so as to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erection wall A281. The fourth erection wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erection wall A281.

The second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 are connected to the first erection wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erection wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283. Further, the fourth erection wall A284 is connected to the second erection wall A282 on one side and to the third erection wall A283 on the other side.

Further, the erection wall A290 includes a first erection wall A291, a second erection wall A292, and a third erection wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by each of the erection walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). See (b)). Therefore, in the state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the erection wall A290.

The first erection wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293 are arranged so as to face each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erection wall A291.

The second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293 are connected to the first erection wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erection wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293. Further, the fourth erection wall A284 is connected to the second erection wall A292 on one side and to the third erection wall A293 on the other side.

The erection wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the periphery of the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) in the front view (viewing in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, in the front view (arrow B direction view), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 becomes the inner surface (straight line) of the second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293. The outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed inscribed on the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first erection wall A281, A291, the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293 in the erection wall A280, A290 are the back surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The height of the erection from the surface) is the same, and the erection tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of each of the erection walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is the seat surface A206. It is placed at the same height as.

Therefore, in the erection walls A280 and A290, the erection tip surfaces of the second erection walls A282 and A292 and the third erection walls A283 and A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and each erection wall A281 and A293 are connected. , A282, A292, A283, A293 are located on the same plane as the standing tip surface (forms the same plane). As a result, when the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing wall are erected. The vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erection wall A280, the length dimension (arrow U, D direction dimension) of the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 is the length dimension of the first erection wall A281 (arrow L, The value is larger than the R direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the erection wall A280 (the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283), the second erection wall There is a possibility that the A282 and the third erection wall A283 are deformed and the tilt of the switch device A120 cannot be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the facing space between the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 is connected by the fourth erection wall A284, the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A284 are connected. Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, the tilt of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by arranging the fourth erection wall A284 at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erection wall A284 becomes large. This corresponds to the partial formation of a portion having a large plate thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other portions, molding defects occur in the portion having a partially large plate thickness dimension and its vicinity. Cause.

On the other hand, the erection height of the fourth erection wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erection height of the first erection wall A281, the second erection wall A282, and the third erection wall A283. As a result, while ensuring the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erection wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are obtained. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as will be described later, the switch device A120 is tilted toward the arrow D direction. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth erection wall A284, and its inclination can be suppressed to an appropriate range (that is, the inclination is smaller than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). ..

On the inner surface of the first erection wall A281, A291, the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293 in the erection wall A280, A290, the erection tip side (arrow B). The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that are closer to the outer surface side toward the outer surface side, are formed, respectively. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the standing tip of each standing wall A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is gradually reduced toward the standing tip side, and each standing wall A281 is correspondingly reduced. , A291, A282, A292, A283, A293, the area of the vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are provided on the outer surfaces of the first erection walls A281 and A291, the second erection walls A282 and A292 and the third erection walls A283 and A293 on the erection walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

An upright wall A208 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface on the side of the arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned erection walls A280 and A290, an erection wall A209 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The erection wall A208 is formed in a box shape in which plate-shaped bodies on four sides are connected and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is opened, and is mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). 4) is formed at the position corresponding to). Further, the erection wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape in which the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210 is opened, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). Is formed at the position corresponding to. Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the erection wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the erection wall A209.

Here, in the plurality of erection walls A208, A209, A280, A290 that surround the plurality of objects, the height position of the erection tip surface of one or more erection walls is the erection of the remaining erection walls. It is set to a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In the present embodiment, the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). Located on the side to do). As a result, even if there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 on the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). Compared with the standing wall A209, the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the adhesion of the vertical wall surrounding the object of high importance to the printed circuit board A119.

Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111A is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111B is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 stands from the back wall portion A301 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate in front view and the four sides of the back wall portion A301 toward the front side (arrow F direction). Mainly provided with wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303) provided and formed in a plate shape. Each of these wall portions A301 to A305 forms a box shape with the front side open. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303 at predetermined intervals. The engaged portion A307 is a portion where the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed so as to project downward (toward the arrow D direction).

In the connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase of the engaging piece A207 is set on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the extension portion by the extension length of the extension portion. Face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. Next, the box cover A200 is attached to the box base A300 in the extending direction of the extending portion in the engaging piece A207. Slide and displace in the direction of the arrow R). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, the main control device A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of the main control device A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device A110, and FIG. 113 is a main view in the partial CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110.

114 (a) is a front view of the main control device A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa of FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (b) is a main control device A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb of FIG. 114 (a). 114 (c) is a side view of the main control device A110 in the direction of the arrow CXIVc of FIG. 114 (a).

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the main ones among the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and the other illustrations are omitted. ..

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main control device A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. In the printed circuit board A119, various electronic components (ICs, resistors, capacitors and transistors) are mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is a conductor such as copper foil. The insertion holes A112 are formed at four corners.

The printed circuit board A119 has a board box A100 in a posture in which the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface on the arrow F direction side) faces the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). It is stored in.

In this case, at least in the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, the regions AS1 and AS2 where the vertical tip surfaces of the vertical walls A280 and A290 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact with each other (FIG. 114). (See (a)), electronic components are not mounted or circuits are not formed, and such regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. Note that, in FIG. 114 (a), only the portion of the region where the seat surface A206 is in contact with the standing walls A280 and A290 is shown.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation unit A122 so that it can be displaced (pushed in), and a coil spring (coil spring) that is arranged inside the main body A123 and imparts an urging force to the operation unit A122 to return to the initial position. The urging means (not shown), the contact (not shown) that is arranged inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operation unit A122, and the leg A121 that is electrically connected to the contact. Be prepared.

The main body A123 includes a base portion A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a columnar protrusion A123b projecting from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A123a. The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) face each other.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a on which the leg A121 is projected) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base A123a where the legs A121 project) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base portion A123a may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 may be configured to come into contact with each other.

The leg A121 is projected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a in the main body A123, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 internally arranges a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a matching key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and a cylinder portion A132 thereof. A contact point whose contact can be switched according to the state of the main body A133, the support A134 supporting the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the state of the cylinder portion A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point.

The main body A133 has a base A133a that is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds a cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) thereof, and two positions (phases that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase) on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a. ), A pair of protrusions A133b protruding outward in the radial direction, and an end portion A133c forming an end surface on the tip end side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and a portion where the leg A131 protrudes) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 where the legs A131 project) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) than the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. A circular opening in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a) through the opening. ..

When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering portion A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is covered. The size is the same as or slightly smaller than the concave shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270, whereby the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is placed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

Further, in this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 (end surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) and the back surface of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). It is formed. It should be noted that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end face wall portion A272 may be configured to be in contact with each other.

The leg A131 is projected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support A134 has an opening formed substantially in the center, and the base portion A134a through which the main body A133 (base A133a and protrusion A133b) is inserted, and the two opposite sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b to be extended and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided, and a metal plate-like body is bent and integrated. Is formed in.

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B). Is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, the leg A134b1 is projected from the extending tip surface of the extending portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and becomes self-supporting by inserting the leg A134b1 into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the back side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the main body A133 can be prevented from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119 by the support A134.

A gap may be provided between the extended tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extended portion A134b and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support A134 may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the amount of the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may have the same dimensions. That is, the extended tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to be in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 can be supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the main body A133 can be more strongly suppressed from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Further, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape bent into an abbreviated shape or a substantially S shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in a state of being elastically deformed. It may be configured to be used. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may be performed. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the tilt of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (arrow L, B direction dimension, FIG. 114 (b) left-right direction dimension) set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped body constituting the support A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The holes in the printed substrate A119 through which the legs A134b1 are inserted are formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 can be increased, and when the tilt of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extending portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

Further, by forming the reinforcing portion A134c on the two opposite sides of the support A134, it is possible to regulate the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support A134 as a whole can be increased and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that the inclination of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly regulated (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated in the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated in the on position. 116 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction of the arrow CXVIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction view of arrow CXVIb.

117 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 117 (b) is a substrate in the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 118A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the box A100, FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is a substrate in the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100.

In addition, in FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and a single hatch is attached to the cross section to model the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the substrate box A100, the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 is projected. An opening A260 is formed in the end face wall portion A272 forming the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, when the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by a cheating person due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method is performed in which the wall portion A210) is slid on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) to reach the opening A260.

On the other hand, when the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. The tip of a foreign substance such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that regulates the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c, and the peripheral wall portion A271). The path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall (the wire passing through the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c) to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts is bent. A wall to which the tip of the foreign matter abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 through a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)). It is set to a value larger than (horizontal dimension of).

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, it is formed by a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b). The wall where the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire abuts, that is, the wall where the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire passes through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b, that is, the support A134. The upper surface. Further, for foreign matter such as a wire whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the support A134, each vertical wall A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

As a result, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) and the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (circumferentially due to the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b). The tip of the foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b to which the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire abuts by bending the path formed along the route). The wall against which the protrusion A133b abuts, that is, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIG. 118 (a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251, the operation wall portion A210, the operation portion A122, and the protrusion A123b). The wall (path formed by the gap between them) is bent and the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire abuts the wall (the wall where the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation unit A122 abuts, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b. Further, for foreign matter such as a wire that hits the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and whose traveling direction is changed, the route is along the respective vertical walls A281, A282, A283 and the inner surface of the lower wall A203). Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be made to face each other in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the key A140 (the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless operation or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or a collision of another member with the key A140 when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. When an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) the tilt of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress breakage or bending of the leg A131, removal of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

An end face wall portion A272 is formed on the covering portion A270 at the protruding tip (side in the direction of arrow F), and the end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 in the front view (arrow B direction view), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign substance such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100 and being illegally applied to the main control device A110.

In particular, in the end face wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, the square portion A272b extends inward in the radial direction from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the protruding tip surface of the covering portion A270 (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) is open only in the region where the displacement of the key A140 is allowed (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140), and the protruding portion A270 is projected. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) are designated as the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and make it difficult to insert a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end face wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, the foreign matter such as the wire passes through. It can be difficult to do.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 irregular (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are combined so as to face each other), the end face wall portion A272 is relatively complicated so that the pair of square portions A272b project from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. Formed into a unique shape. In this case, the end face wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) is a cantilever beam having a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free. Since it is formed in a shape), the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end face wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the peripheral wall portion A271 on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) is the opening A260. Even in the case of the configuration), when an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilt of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge (the portion forming the opening A260) of the end face wall portion A272. Can be brought into contact with each other. That is, the position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the above-mentioned external force can be brought into contact with the end face wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (covered portion A270) can be suppressed.

Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. Therefore, as described above, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) and the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) face each other. Can be done (see FIG. 118 (a)).

Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless operation or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or a collision of another member with the key A140 when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) is changed to the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side). ), The rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be regulated.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress breakage or bending of the leg A131, removal of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

Here, for example, the operation unit A122 when the operator carelessly or violently operates the key A140 inserted into the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key device A130, or opens the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. Or, due to a collision of another member with the key A140, an external force in the direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the inserting direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R) is applied to the operation unit A122 or the key A140. When acted on, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 may be tilted, and the contact between them may deform and damage the box cover A200 (particularly, the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270). ..

On the other hand, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and these standing walls A280 and A290 are the standing tip surfaces (inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side). The surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

As a result, in addition to improving the rigidity of the operating wall portion A210 by erecting the standing walls A280 and A290 (functioning as ribs), the support portion (deformation suppression) that supports the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 is suppressed. As a means), the standing walls A280 and A290 can be made to function. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

When the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erection walls A280 and A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated). That is, the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses its tilt is shared not only with the operating wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is distributed accordingly. Can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Further, since the standing tip surface of the standing walls A280 and A290 is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119. The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall (a wall that restricts further progress) to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being fraudulently applied.

The vertical walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the surroundings of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (see FIG. 118 (b)). That is, the region AS1 in which the vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the vertical walls A280 and A290 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) abut. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114 (a)).

Therefore, the path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the erection walls A280 and A290. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the movement to the outside of the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is restricted. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being fraudulently applied.

Further, the erection walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the periphery of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, so that the erection walls A280 and A290 are erected (function as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operating wall portion A210 be further improved, but also the directions of the external forces acting on the operating portion A122 or the key A140 (that is, the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R) can be changed. Regardless of which direction of the external force is applied in the including plane), the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

The first erection wall A291 is arranged so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and the second erection wall A292 and the second erection wall A291. The three standing walls A293 are arranged in such a posture that they are orthogonal to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be efficiently exerted on the standing wall A290.

That is, when the external force in the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R is applied to the key A140, the external force in the direction of the arrows U, D or the directions L, R is applied to the erection wall. While the load received by the A290 (the load capacity that the erection wall A290 should exert as a support) is maximized, an external force is applied in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R and the direction of inclination by a predetermined angle. In that case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the external force in the acting direction, and the load received by the erection wall A290 (the erection wall A290 exerts as a support portion) by the amount that the external force escapes due to the rotation. The load capacity) is low. As a result, by arranging the posture of the erection wall A290 as described above, the erection wall A290 efficiently exerts a function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

Since the erection walls A280 and A290 (the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the rigidity of the box cover A200 is used to utilize the erection wall. The rigidity of the A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the functions of the standing walls A280 and A290 as support portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

In the printed circuit board A119, the surface for connecting the electronic components by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , Areas AS1 and AS2 where the vertical tip surface of A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are abutted (see FIG. 114A), where electronic components are not mounted or a circuit is not formed, and such area AS1 , AS2 is formed as a flat surface.

Therefore, the erected tip surfaces (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the erected walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the erected walls A280 and A290 are combined with the erected walls A280 and A290. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the printed circuit board and the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be reliably functioned as a wall to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 abuts.

The first erection walls A281, A291, the second erection walls A282, A292 and the third erection walls A283, A293 in the erection walls A280, A290 have tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the erection tips are formed. The area of the surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure on the vertical tip surface in contact with the printed circuit board A119 and prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted between the printed circuit board A119 and the vertical walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surface (the surface facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) on the standing tip side of the standing walls A280 and A290, so that the moldability is improved. At the same time, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

That is, the shape of the erection wall A280, A290 is formed by reducing the area of the erection tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a, A290a) gradually approaching the outer surface side toward the erection tip side (arrow B direction). The change can be moderated to ensure the fluidity of the resin in the molding die. Therefore, the moldability can be improved.

Further, when the erected tip surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. (A) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to pass (invade) between the erection tip surface of the erection walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. One end of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (base A271a or protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (FIG. 115). b) See).

As a result, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 can function as ribs for increasing the rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is in contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each of the protrusions A211,222 is used to further tilt the switch device A120 or the key device A130. It can be reliably suppressed and damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

Further, on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on the extension line of the other end). ("ON" and "OFF") are formed respectively. As a result, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 can be combined with the function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the off position. It is set to the same phase position (position facing the end face of the key A140) (see FIG. 115A), and one end of the second ridge A212 is the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a) is set to the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) on the arrow U direction side as the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272). ) Is tilted in the direction of contact (arrow U direction), the first ridge A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115A), and is in the on position. When an external force acts on the key A140 in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface on the arrow L direction side is brought into contact with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272), the key A140 is tilted. The second ridge A212 is located on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by a finger) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). The portion to be formed) can be efficiently reinforced by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the action of an external force (force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case can be suppressed by the second connection wall portion A230 on the key A140 in the off position (FIG. 115 (a). ), The action of an external force (force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case can be suppressed by the first connection wall portion A220 (FIG. 115). (B)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other side (arrow D) in the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction) in the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The direction side) is open (the connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and is located on the third side from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the worker's hand or other configuration on the space side collides with the key A140, and the key A140 is pointed to by the arrow D. An external force that displaces in the direction or in the direction of the arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 on the side that suppresses the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to such an external force (the side that receives it), it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. It can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end face wall portion A272 are arranged at two locations having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view (arrow B direction view). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (outer edge, edge portion forming the opening A260) in the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as an isosceles triangle).

Specifically, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the off position is the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140. The square portion A272b on the side far from the first connection wall portion A220 (opposite side across the key A140) is the gripping surface of the key A140 with respect to the key A140 in the off position. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the surface is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115 (a)).

Therefore, in other words, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the on position. Is shortened (smaller), and the square portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the worker's hand or other configuration on the space side collides with the key A140, and the key A140. Where an external force that displaces the arrow D or L is likely to be applied, according to the square portion A272b in the present embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 on which the external force in the arrow D direction or the arrow F direction is applied. Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is lengthened, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and the tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, the surface pressure can be suppressed and the damage of the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) is a first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall located closer to the main control device A110 than the first region. It is formed from a second region formed by the portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, as compared with the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased from the person who commits the fraud, and the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased. The openings A250 and A260 can be made difficult to see, and it can be difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening A260.

Here, the board box A100 is a distance from the main control device A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space) in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110. )) It is necessary to secure. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily secure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the substrate box A100. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, work is performed on the step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 toward the operation wall portion A210 from the front wall portion A201. The space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of such inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

The operating wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L and R directions) in the front view (arrow B direction view) and is orthogonal to one direction (arrows U and D). It is formed as a region of a substantially rectangular shape (horizontally long rectangle) larger than the length dimension along the direction (see FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b)).

The key device A130 is arranged so that the posture of the key A140 in the off position is along the other directions (arrows U and D directions) described above (see FIG. 115A). That is, in the key A140 in the off position, the surface gripped by the finger faces the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the front view (arrow B direction view). The longitudinal direction of is taken along the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the side (right side and left side of FIG. 115A) where the surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position is desired. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into or pulled out from the key device A130, a step (first connection wall) in which a finger (for example, a thumb and an index finger) holding the key A140 connects the first region and the second region. Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions), as described above. As the first connection wall portion A220 is formed with a downward inclination, the key A140 is operated by grasping the key A140 with fingers (rotating from the off position to the on position or vice versa). It is possible to prevent a finger different from the gripping finger from interfering with a step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

For example, when the key A140 in the off position is grasped by the index finger and the thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be arranged by using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and the key A140 can be arranged from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

Further, when the key A140 in the on position is grasped by the index finger and the thumb, the little finger and the ring finger are formed into the operation wall portion A210 (second area) in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Arranged using the space on the other side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall part A210 by locating the wall part A210 (second region) on one side from the center in the longitudinal direction. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) described above. can.

In the switch device A120, the position (standing height from the operating wall portion A210) of the protruding tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating portion A122 at the initial position is the protrusion of the covering portion A270. It is set to a position (small dimension) lower than the position of the tip surface (front surface of the end surface wall portion A272, the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interference between the operation unit A122 and the fingers when operating the key A140.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall) on both sides of one side (arrow L direction side) and the other side (arrow R direction side 9) in the longitudinal direction. Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall part A230) is formed on one side (arrow U direction side) in the lateral direction, while the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction is formed. The connection surface is not formed.

As a result, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, it is possible to communicate with the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) and the space on the outside. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped by the finger and operated (insertion into the key device A130, withdrawal from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is pressed. Use the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (pinkie and ring finger) different from the grasped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). Can be done. As a result, operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

Here, as described above, the board box A100 is a distance from the main control device A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110. It is necessary to secure the distance (internal space).

In this case, a step connecting the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). The first connection wall portion A220 is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are formed. By making it non-tilted (only the first connecting wall portion A220 is tilted downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A100 for heat dissipation from the main control device A110.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is tilted downward and the others (second connection wall portion A230 and third connection wall portion A240) are not tilted, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. Has an operation wall portion A210 (second region) having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) from the center in the longitudinal direction. ) By adopting a configuration in which the key device A130 is placed close to each other.

The third connection wall portion A240 is formed on the other side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (opposite to the first connection wall portion A220), whereby the third connection wall portion A240 causes the third connection wall portion A240. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 at the time of manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) is omitted, and the illustration is omitted. The reference numerals are shown only in the main configurations.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, as described above, hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view, and the hinges 18 are attached. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface with the side provided with the above as the axis for opening and closing.

Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side of the front with the hinge 18 as the axis for opening and closing, the opening angle can be sufficiently increased (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, about 90 degrees). When the opening angle can be secured), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the board box A100, and the switch device A120 or the key device is in the same manner as described above (the procedure described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119). The A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, the opening angle can be secured only about 45 degrees, and the outer frame 11 and the inner frame enter the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by the opening. Even when it is necessary to insert a hand from between 12 and operate the key device A130), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 has a direction in which the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 (second region) (for example, the arrow R and L directions in FIG. 115 (a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotary axis). Along with pointing toward, the lateral direction (arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating axis), and one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115 (a)). It is arranged in a posture in which the L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted from between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (front of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second area), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are formed into a space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (that is, the operation wall portion A210 (second region) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the key device. The space on the other side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by locating the A130 on one side of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction). Can be placed using.

In such an arrangement, the operation unit A122 can be operated (pushed) with the thumb or the index finger for the switch device A120, and the key A140 can be rotated with respect to the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and index finger holding the key A140, the space secured by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

The above-mentioned setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned on the front side (front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening / closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation shaft A410 as the opening / closing axis. Is also good. As a result, the operator can stand in a position facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input / output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, and so on, via openings AOP1 to AOP8. 1 The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which one end is connected is connected to the symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and FIG. 4).

Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a possibility that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are likely to be operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is performed. There is a risk of sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which at least one end is connected to the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main control device A110. As long as it is connected to (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected, connection and disconnection are mixed. ), The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Since the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is secured and fraud can be suppressed. Connects other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol hold lamp 84 to the main control device A110. Even if the electrical connection line) is released (pulled out) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed to improve workability (ensure versatility). ) Can be planned.

That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation shaft A410 as the axis for opening and closing, in order to rotate the main control device A110 (main control to the electrical connection line). It is necessary to disconnect (pull out) the electrical connection line so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, if all the electrical connection lines are not connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is placed in a predetermined position (switch device) in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed. It is necessary to rotate the A120 and the key device A130 to a position where they can be easily operated), and then reconnect the electrical connection line released (disconnected) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

In particular, when the main control device A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, the extension line is interposed to release (pull out) the main control device A110. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main control device A110, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) are allowed. It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line connecting the second symbol hold lamp 84 to the main control device A110) via an extension line.

As a result, while the main control device A110 can be arranged at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily operated, the labor is suppressed and the workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is reduced. Can be improved.

Next, the substrate box A2100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the ridge A2273 is projected from the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

121 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A2100 in the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121 (a). Is.

Note that FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Further, in FIG. 121 (b), only the portion to be cross-sectionally viewed is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, a ridge A2273 is projected from the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment. The ridge A2273 is a portion (ridge) extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is an outer edge of the end face wall portion A2272 (the tip in the overhanging direction extending radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge).

Specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) in the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position) along the outer edge of the square portion A272b. The range between the position AP1 and the position AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the position AP4 including the position AP5 and the position AP6) and one side (diameterally inward from the peripheral wall portion A271) with the square portion A272b in between. It is set to the range along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4) on the side where the overhanging dimension is large), and in this range (the range between the position AP1 and the position AP6). It is formed continuously.

The protrusion dimension from the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 (annulus portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value within the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and the position AP3 to the position AP2. The value is gradually changed to a larger value toward the position AP2, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP2 toward the position AP1, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, such a protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, and is the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. Set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (protruding dimension).

In this way, by projecting the protrusion A2273 on the end face wall portion A2272, the rigidity of the end face wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and arrows L, R), and the key device A130 is tilted. , It is possible to prevent the end face wall portion A2272 from being damaged when the key A140 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the end face wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) are formed. ), The gap between the front surface and the front surface can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 with respect to the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c in the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value that is approximately the same as the facing interval between them. Therefore, the protruding tip of the ridge A2273 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) is eliminated, and foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A2100 through such a gap. Can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, since the protrusion dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate-like (cantilever) with the outer edge side free is used. Then, the ridge A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly adhered to the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). As a result, foreign matter such as a wire can be more reliably suppressed from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap between the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c of the main body A133). ..

Further, in this way, the protruding tip of the protrusion A2273 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is in contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end face wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, it is possible to prevent the end face wall portion A2272 from being deformed in the insertion direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) of the end face wall portion A2272 from being damaged.

Next, the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

122 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122 (b) shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range). Also, in FIG. 122 (b), only the main configurations are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

Here, the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment has a forming position of the operating wall portion A210 and an opening A260 (covered portion A270, key) in the operating wall portion A210 with respect to the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment. The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (guide wall A251, switch device A120) is different, but the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the operation thereof is performed. The three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covered portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated via the openings A250 and A260. Will be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220, the side in the arrow L direction) than the key device A130. That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the substrate box A3100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated around the rotation axis A410 at a first position (arranged during a game) arranged on the back surface side of the inner frame 12. From the position (see FIG. 120), it is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and the front surface of the box cover A3200 (operation wall portion A210) faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010. That is, it is set in a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in a range of approximately 180 ° up to (see FIG. 122 (b)).

As a result, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information on setting change, setting value). )be able to. As a result, since the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operation mistakes can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to see from the outside, see FIG. 120), so that fraud is performed. (The switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated) can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrows). The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which a desired posture (in the present embodiment, a posture in which both sides are substantially parallel) is obtained (direction B). The angle between the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is preferably set in the range of approximately 0 ° to approximately 45 °.

That is, the substrate is located at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. The box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as wrapping the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. ..

As a result, the work of operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be made easier while checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the information related to the setting change), and the operability is improved and the operation error is made. Can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the key are formed on the operation wall portion A210. The device A130 is arranged.

As a result, the substrate is located at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are located farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly push the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the operation frequency of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (that is, on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220) than the key device A130. Arranged. As a result, the frequently operated switch device A120 can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122B). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Further, since the switch device A120 is arranged adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between the fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment is up to the second position described above by the substrate box A3100 (a position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122 (b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to regulate the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (that is, fix the substrate box A3100 to the second position). ) Provide regulatory measures. As a result, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that the operability can be improved.

As a regulating means, the substrate box A3100 is fixed (held) at the second position by using the magnetic force (adhesive force) of the magnet (a force exceeding the attractive force is applied to the first one. It is equipped with a protruding member that is placed in the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed urging means (for example, coil spring), which allows displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the position), and is placed in the protruding position. The protruding member engages with the substrate box A3100 arranged at the second position and regulates the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging means from the protruding position). When the projecting member is immersed against the urging force of the substrate box A3100, displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is allowed) and the like are exemplified.

Next, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft A410 of the substrate box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (arrows U and D directions) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotating shaft A4410 in the tenth embodiment has been described. The pachinko machine A4010 is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) substrate box A4100 is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and orientation) of the rotation shaft A4410 and the number of arrangements, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 projecting from each of the sealing unit A400 and the subcover A500 in a direction away from each other. The pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side of the board box A4100 in the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction) (opposite to the operating wall portion A210, side in the arrow U direction), and are located in the longitudinal direction of the board box A4100 (arrow). L, R direction) It is formed in a posture of protruding outward from both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotating shafts A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the substrate box A4100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated around the rotation axis A4410 at a first position (arranged during a game) arranged on the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The position is displaced (rotated) from the position (position shown by a broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90 ° to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, a position where the substrate box A4100 projects most toward the back surface side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)). ..

As a result, at the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to the side where the operator is present. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operating wall portion A210 can face the back surface of another component arranged on the inner frame 12. Therefore, another component can be made to face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at a position where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation (the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 is applied to another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with each other, the substrate box A4100 is formed so as not to be able to be arranged at the first position. This makes it possible to prevent the key A140 from being forgotten to be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be removed from being illegally acquired.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the second position of the substrate box A4100 is located below the first position in the gravity direction (vertical direction), the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. In this state, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the substrate box A4100 can be subsequently displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the operator to recognize that the substrate box A4100 is in a state where it cannot be arranged at the first position.

As for the separate member, when the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 rather than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape penetrates into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is decelerated by the ridge portion 154 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an adhesive member may be arranged on the inner surface to increase the flow resistance of the sphere, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by a magnetic force. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged in the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the back surface side of the effect member 700 so that the overhang width to the back surface side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated by configuring the main body portion 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to be inserted into the rear case 510 while the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the effecting member 700 can be displaced by operating the operating member 183 so that the insertion into the rear case 510 is released in a state where the overhang width is shortened. At this time, the effecting member 700 can be displaced. The displacement regulating device 180 also displaces with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized and produced by the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by a manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be provided with a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulated state prior to the initial operation from the power-on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from starting displacement while the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. can do. This makes it possible to prevent the operating member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operating member 183 is provided without driving the displacement regulating device 180, and the displacement regulating device 180 is determined to be in the regulated state by this detection sensor. May be controlled so as not to start driving the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof may be used.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the effect member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 from changing. When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is projected, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with the recess provided in the lower arm member 630 to prevent the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 from changing in the left-right direction. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged as an example of the apparatus for restricting the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the upper side of the gaming area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, by disposing a device for restricting (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displaceting the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, the partition member 310 may be prevented from rubbing against the wall surface, cracking the granular member 320, or scratching the partition member 310.

For example, by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side (effect standby state), it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacement of the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partition member 310 with which the granular member 320 can come into contact at the time of shipment, and it is possible to suppress the displacement amount of the granular member 320, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which cracks occur due to collision between the granular members 320. can.

Further, as another example, the granular member 320 is arranged on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate effecting means 160, is configured to be able to project into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in an extended state. An overhanging member may be provided so as to be able to limit the displacement of the.

This overhanging member is configured to be able to be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (front side of the gaming board 13), and is configured to switch between the overhanging state and the non-overhanging state each time the pushing operation is performed. After installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store, the overhanging member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the overhanging member can be improved.

The mode of changing the state of the overhanging member is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism as in the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engaging or disengaging the claws with each other.

Further, as another example, the arrangement of the granular member 320 may be maintained by shipping the partition member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store and lowering the air pressure in the partition member 310 before operating it, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

Further, as another example, a resin as a material of the granular member 320 may be mixed with a metal powder of a ferromagnetic material to form a magnet, and a magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. As a result, at the time of shipment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, by removing this magnet during operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

The magnet is not limited to the one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged as a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480.

In the embodiment in which the granular member 320 is mixed with the metal powder of the ferromagnetic material, for example, after the firing effect is executed, the operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (for example, the magnet is brought close to the partition member 310). By disposing the effect (operating) effect, the effect mode of stopping the granular member 320 in the air (making it appear as if it is floating) can be included in the launch effect.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an insertion hole formed in the rear case 510 on the same straight line as the central axis of the regulated hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged at a predetermined terminal position is formed in the rear case 510 at the time of shipment. A metal rod or a resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole, fixed with tape or the like, and after arriving at the game machine store, the clerk of the game machine store pulls out the metal rod or the resin rod. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be soiled with the tape for fixing, and the metal rod or resin rod cannot be thrown away for delivery to other stores of the pachinko machine 10 and stored. You may need to do it.

In addition, if the storage of metal rods or resin rods is left to each gaming machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if the metal rods or resin rods are delivered to another store without them, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured. It may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 is an improvement of this viewpoint.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the front-rear width of the rear compartment lower portion 314 are about the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the front-rear width of the left-right central portion 312b and the rear compartment lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-rear width of the left-right portion 312a and the back compartment lower portion 314. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased on the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 and the front plate portion 311 can be increased. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged by the collision.

Further, for example, the front-rear width of the left-right portion 312a and the back surface section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be made to enter the internal space IE1 without losing the momentum of the ejected granular member 320.

Further, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive load locally on the partition member 310. Further, by moving the tapering direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular member 320 toward the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion that is a part of the front plate portion 311 and is expected to reach the ejected granular members 320 in a collective manner may be provided so as to project toward the back surface side. good. In this knob-shaped portion, another member may be arranged and fixed on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or a metal may be formed so that a part of the front plate portion 311 is projected toward the back side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed in the shape of a soccer ball has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be spherical, rugby ball-shaped, or star-shaped (a shape in which a protrusion is formed three-dimensionally). By forming the members having a certain size, a gap can be created between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the firing effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back surface side of the light guide plate 161 and is configured to launch the granular member 320 diagonally forward and upward, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the injection device 400 may be the left-right position of the light guide plate 161 or the upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally to the front side. When arranging the injection device 400 at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the effect standby position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed of a monochromatic (red in this embodiment) resin member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two-color molding or two members having different colors may be combined to form one granular member 320. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape having the same size as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the way the granular member 320 flies and looks changes depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape fitted well or the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitted. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is arranged so as to be scattered in the internal space IE1 and gathers on the collision member 420 by gravity has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the granular member 320 is provided with an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side in the effect standby state), and the granular member 320 is configured to be returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. May be. In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member having a fixed end, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the urging means and the granular member 320 is not limited in any way. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be adhered to each other, and although they are not adhered to each other, they are not separated from each other, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. The urging means may be supported by the internal space IE1 while being displaceable from the granular member 320.

Further, the urging means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, the air pressure adjusting means for adjusting the air pressure in the internal space IE1 may be adopted in the same manner as in the case where gravity acts on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment. In this case, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the air pressure in the internal space IE1.

For example, when the pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the upper side of the internal space IE1. When the pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner of extracting gas from the interior space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

In addition, when causing a change in atmospheric pressure, it is preferable to close the deformed penetrating portion 315. It is easily possible to impart the function of closing the deformed penetrating portion 315 to the lid member 480. For example, when a flexible, thin and highly deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed penetration portion 315, the lid is used. The gap between the member 480 and the deformed penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion facing the transmission protrusion 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is arranged at the lower end position, but also the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while in contact with the curved surface, so that the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum urging force of.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right central portions of the collision member 420 are formed of a curved shape with an upward protrusion has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a slope shape in which the central portion is sharpened and descends in the left-right direction, or it may be a hipped roof shape. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharp point in the central portion in the left-right direction as compared with the curved shape. Therefore, the bias of the left-right arrangement of the granular member 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to construct a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a mass until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310 and then separated by the collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, it is preferable that the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are convex upward. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 from colliding with each other.

In the first embodiment, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape in a lateral view has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower half may be overhanging and bent in a lateral view. In this case, the dense position of the granular member 320 can be moved toward the upper half side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the partition member 310 in the front view is about the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the partition member 310 in front view is designed to be equal to or larger than the size of the visible area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the edge portion of the partition member 310 overlaps with the display by the third symbol display device 81 and is visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the first embodiment, a single collision member 420 is adopted as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be adopted, and may be operated cooperatively or individually by different drive devices.

In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 abuts on the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not abut on the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the back surface side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 so as to be in contact with the front side transmission member 440. In this case, the contact portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is formed unevenly in such a manner that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, so that the pillar portion is arranged as the front transmission member 440 rotates. Can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (minorly displaced).

In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may enter by a slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back surface side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is separated and fits under the lid member 480 in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a protruding portion may be formed so as to project from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and this protruding portion may be configured to be in contact with the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular member 320 is locally deposited, by pushing the granular member 320 by the protruding portion, the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken due to the displacement of the lid member 480 to the approach side. .. This makes it possible to make the arrangement of the granular members 320 uniform.

The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured so that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the granular member 320 is deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the deposited granular member 320, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken.

Further, it may be configured as a pair of ridges that are arranged so as to be inclined to the left and right outwards toward the retractable tip of the advancing / retreating portion 481 starting from the left / right center portion of the approaching tip of the overhanging portion 482. .. In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 480 on the approach side, a load in the direction of pushing the granular member 320 toward the left and right outwards can be applied to the granular member 320.

Moreover, the direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the slopes may be opposite, the ridges may be formed along a single slope direction instead of a pair of slope directions, or ridges of different degrees of slope may be combined, or the slopes may be combined. A ridge without a ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the axis of rotation or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the axis of rotation) may be used. In addition, the number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

The projecting length of the protruding portion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be projected until it reaches a circle having the same coaxial diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the lid member 480 is configured so that the protruding length from the advancing / retreating portion 481 is constant. Is also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protruding portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481. It can be played by the club.

When the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the action timing of the protrusion is not limited to the time when the granular member 320 is stopped and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is contained below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is moved in the forward and reverse directions in small steps near the state in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with respect to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be displaced up and down in small steps, and the granular member 320 resting on the collision member 420 can be displaced. Can be displaced up and down.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collide with the protruding portion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the rearrangement of the granular member 320 can be executed, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be collapsed.

Further, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when it is displaced ascending), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

The execution of the small forward / reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward / reverse direction, or the forward rotation may be generated at short time intervals. In this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 to be displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, so that the drive motor MT1 can be rotated in the reverse direction.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right, so that the lid member corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not a flat surface but has a shape having irregularities (wave shape), and the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 are close to each other. The distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 may be changed. Further, the approach-side end of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed so as to be formed in parallel with the axis of the rotation axis O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be arranged at the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by the posture change of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, contact member 430, transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the case where the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a timing to displace all the members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be adopted may be slightly increased in size.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 abuts on the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, a repulsive force is generated between the front side. The load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear motion member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, in the transmission protrusion 446, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the transmission protrusion 414 and the protrusion portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is disposed in the half portion in the circumferential direction. On the other hand, the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force is disposed in the circumferential half portion on the opposite side so that the repulsive force is placed at the lower end position of the linear motion member 410. Since it can be configured to occur on the side to be maintained, the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. I explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one of the circumferential surfaces of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and the driving force may be transmitted through the groove to increase the transmission target of the driving force.

In the first embodiment, the case where it may be unclear whether or not the timing at which the front transmission member 440 should be rotated in the reverse direction may be unclear due to the detection by the detection sensor SC4, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is arranged, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 indicates that the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. It may be judged whether or not it is possible. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the drive in the forward rotation direction has passed through the launch state, so reverse rotation is possible if the launch state has not been reached, and reverse rotation is not possible if the launch state is exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear motion slide).

In the first embodiment, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent a defect related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. The case where it is configured has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is higher than the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760 are balanced with the early start of displacement due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shield design member 760 are simultaneously installed in all directions. It can be made to appear as if the displacement has started.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is brought into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740 to generate a load in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be arranged to apply the urging force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary plate 730 is used as both a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacementing the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b is first loaded and radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the second guided protrusion 744b to be arranged receives a load later is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b occurs at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment, the case where the telescopic displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, a first guided protrusion 743b and a second guided protrusion 744b, has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to project diagonally with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740, the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, an overhanging portion is formed on the outer side of the circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b can be extruded outward in the radial direction at the overhanging portion so that the telescopic displacement member 740 can be moved to the discrete state side. It can assist the displacement toward.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the effect member 700 at the displacement lower end position and loosens the degree of the posture change of the effect member 700 allowed at the upper and lower intermediate positions has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the degree of tolerance for the posture change of the effect member 700 may be increased toward the position of the lower end of the displacement.

Further, the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the acting force is generated with respect to the effect member 700, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip portion of the lower arm member 630 for each portion. The contact area of can be changed.

The degree of change in posture of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, the front surface of the plate of the main body member 601 arranged to face the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 and the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with irregularities to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the posture change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the plate of the main body member 601 or in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. Therefore, it becomes easy to suppress the posture change in the portion where the interval is narrow. Further, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the descending end.

In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increase / decrease device capable of increasing / decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increasing / decreasing device may be a braking device capable of increasing or decreasing the frictional resistance, a device for increasing or decreasing the displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device for projecting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. .. In the case of a device using magnetic force, it is easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arcuate hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

In the first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the effect member 700 moves downward, a large displacement is allowed as a displacement in the expansion direction, and after the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed, the effect member 700 is in the expansion direction. The case where displacement occurs has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled so that the displacement in the expansion direction occurs in the middle of the displacement of the effect member 700 in the vertical direction. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved to the left and right by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction in which the effect member 700 is reduced (displaced inward in the radial direction) while the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced. It is possible to offset the influence of the change from the long posture to the long posture up and down, and it is possible to suppress the posture change in the forward tilting direction of the effect member 700.

In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is displaced vertically has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, the effect member 700 projects to the front side of the center frame 86 in the assembled state, and the state changes to the discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. It may be configured to change to a larger state.

In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. Further, the second layer glass unit is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front side toward the upper side, so that the size of the upper plate 17 is maintained. Is preferable.

In the first embodiment, the case where the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjusting member 744 are likely to be tilted due to the positional relationship of the second long member 743 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is arranged between the second long member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744, and the posture of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exerted.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged on the upper side of the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electric wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a drive device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched by the throttle portion 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing tool such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

Further, the fastening position of the electric wiring DK2 can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the electric wiring DK2 arranged through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a throttle portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. , The fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connection position.

Further, the means for fastening the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to the use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. That is, by narrowing the width of a part of the arrangement portion 635 in which the electric wiring DK1 is arranged, the electric wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement, or the inside of the arrangement portion 635 may be configured. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixture such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electric wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be a lower arm member 630 provided with an arrangement portion 635, or an effect member 700 disposed on the tip end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in a direction (front-back direction) in which the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced on the vertical and horizontal planes and the wiring arm member 870 is displaced from the vertical and horizontal planes. Although the case of doing so has been explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front-back and left-right planes, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction, and as the direction of proximity separation, the front-back and left-right planes. It may be tilted and displaced.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b has been described in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced in a spiral shape in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged according to the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and the electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a drive device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 854, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as follows.

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging state of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the state change to the enlarged state occurs in the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, when the pinnate member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700 is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 May be configured so that the state can be changed to the enlarged state.

In this case, it is possible to avoid a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800, and it is possible to avoid expecting a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the pinnate member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is composed of the same shape as the guide path DL1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer left-right width than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. ..

In the first embodiment, the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path for the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to flow down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a route for a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63, may be used as a route for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the out port 71.

Further, since the arrangement of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, and 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow path LM1 can also be arbitrarily set. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16 or the like). Even in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section in which the ball flows down along the path in the front view of the ball flowing down in the game area.

Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the player's field of view, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left and right center sides of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 in front view may be used.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illuminated substrate may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Further, the entire range of the illuminated substrate is not limited to the one hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illuminated substrate may not be shielded, and the light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is stopped may be alternately generated.

Further, by fastening the guide hole 733 formed in a stepped shape to a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to be close to or in contact with each other at different displacement loci and different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illuminated substrates is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the horizontal board unit 166 or the vertical board unit 167 of the light guide plate effecting means 160 may be configured by a plurality of illuminated boards. Further, the portion (left and right long portions) corresponding to the horizontally long groove portion 171a of the decorative means 170 is configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of illuminated boards, and is used as the intersection. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the light may be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illuminated substrates are used. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be arranged on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at a portion. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the irradiation direction of the light can be increased. Further, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality, the number of configurations may be reduced) regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two positions of the key device A130 has been described, but the number of such protrusions A133b (the number of formations) may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangements) may be increased to two or more. ..

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, the arrangement direction (direction, posture, phase) with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration is used as a reference. You may change the order of each. The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each configuration are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is on one side of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) (first connection wall portion A220 side). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction, and the operation wall portion A210 (second region) may be arranged. It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the third connection wall portion A240 side).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering portion A270) connects the pair of protruding portions A133b (protruding portions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). , R direction) has been described, but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the operation wall portion A210 (orientation, phase). Prescribed as the arrangement direction (attitude, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the second region) and the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The key device A130 (covered portion A270) may be disposed in an arrangement direction (attitude, phase) having an angle (an angle greater than 0 ° and less than 90 °).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (covering portion A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order in which the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (guide wall A251), and the openings A260 (covered portions A270) are arranged in the reverse order of the arrangement of each of the above embodiments (that is, in order from the side closest to the first connection wall portion A220). ), Or the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. Will be).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the like. It may be formed in the site of. That is, it does not need to be formed on the lower portion of the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. As other parts, for example, a part forming the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, that is, the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, and the left wall part of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples thereof include A204 or the right wall portion A205, the back wall portion A301 of the box base A300, the upper wall portion A302, the lower wall portion A303, the left wall portion A304, or the right wall portion A305. Similarly, as other portions, for example, a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, or a third connection wall portion A240 is exemplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. It is preferable that the guide wall A251 is also provided on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 as the length dimension of the operation portion A122 is extended.

In each of the above embodiments, a recess is formed on the outer surface (front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the concave bottom surface of the recess is the operating wall portion A210 (that is, from the front wall portion A201). Although the case where the operation wall portion A210 is located at a lower position (on the side of the main control device A110) is not necessarily limited to this, the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200 is not necessarily limited to this. The portion that forms the protrusion and forms the protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be the operating wall portion A210 (that is, operated to a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (opposite to the main control device A110)). (Position the wall portion A210).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main control device 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 have been described. The stored items are arbitrary as long as the controls are operated through the openings. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a stored object has, for example, a connecting portion connected to an opening / closing lid that opens / closes a discharge port for discharging the ball from the flow path of the ball, and the opening / closing lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. A member (structure, device) for opening and closing is exemplified.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a push button switch and a key operation type selector switch are adopted as the operation means (switch device A120, key device A130) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other types are not necessarily limited. The operation means of may be adopted. Examples of other types of operating means include tactile switches, rocker switches, DIP switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the controls (operation unit A122, key A140) is push-in and rotation has been described, but the operation mode is not necessarily limited to this, and is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is operably arranged through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in each of the above embodiments). Other modes of operation include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (eg, a mode in which the operation buttons are displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends, like the operation buttons of a rocker switch), tilting (eg, toggle). An embodiment in which the operating lever is displaced so as to tilt to one side with the proximal end side as a fulcrum, such as an operating lever of a switch) is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the operator, the direction connecting both ends of the operator that is displaced by the seesaw, and the tilting direction of the tilting operator are the longitudinal directions (arrows L and R directions) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operating means.

In any of the above-mentioned operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is formed only in the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the actuator (the region necessary for allowing the displacement). Is also good.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by a finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the key A140 or the key device A130 is not necessarily subjected to an external force, and at least one of the surface or the end surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portion A272, A2272 (annulus). It may be configured to be in contact with the portion A272a or the outer edge of the square portion A272b). That is, at least one of the face or the end face of the key A140 in the off position or the on position to be gripped by the finger is in contact with the end face wall portion A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

The surface and end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by the fingers and the gap between the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the gaps and the gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the upright wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the tilt of the key device A130 to be tolerated). That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the above gaps is eliminated (the key A140 or the key device A130 is abutted) before reaching an angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off or be damaged or the solder is peeled off. .. The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, still more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one place or at three or more places. Further, when they are formed at two or more places, their circumferential positions (phases) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be continuously formed in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are projected outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is projected inward in the radial direction from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protrusion is radially inward on the outer surface of the base A133a of the key device A130. A recessed portion may be provided so that the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is made continuous up to the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base A133a so that the covering portion A270 can be put on the key device A130 (the protrusion is inserted into the recess) (protrusion). An opening for inserting the portion into the recess may be formed on the end face).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in addition, the ridge A251 is connected to the guide wall A251. May be concatenated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where two ridges (first ridge A211 and second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of such ridges is not necessarily limited to this. It may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of pieces, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect the other ridges to positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212, the cross-sectional shape of the other ridges, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the erecting dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210). ) And the width dimension (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the height direction of the cross-section disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end face shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a shape in which these are combined. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and whichever is larger may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (the vertical dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210) is along the extending direction. However, the case is not limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be gradually lowered as it is separated from one end connected to the covering portion A270. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the on position and the off position) of the key A140 is set to 90 ° has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) are not necessarily limited to this. Phase difference) may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end face wall portion A272) corresponds to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (the region required to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing the displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion of the key A140 on the other side (opposite to one side) of the center of rotation is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed in a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of gyration of a portion on one side of the center of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by a finger)) and from the center of rotation. Also explained the case where the radius of gyration of the other side is different, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the radius of gyration (from the center of rotation to the end face (grasped with a finger)) on one side and the other side. The distance) to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may be openings having substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Examples of other front view shapes include a substantially square, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape having a pentagon or more, and a shape in which these are combined.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a form in which the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 is along the arrows U and D directions).

In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is a connection wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion). A240) has been described, and the rest of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but the present invention is not limited to this. The entire outer edge of the operating wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connecting wall portion.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. However, the operation wall portion A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 does not match the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (guide wall A251) and the openings A260 (covered portions A270) are arranged in substantially series (substantially one row) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include staggered arrangements, arrangements dispersed in non-regular positions, and arrangements in a grid pattern (arrangements at intersections of a plurality of straight lines orthogonal to each other). Further, when arranged in substantially series (substantially one row), the series direction may be arranged to be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portions A210 (box covers A200, A3200), and the arrangement may be substantially orthogonal to each other. It may be.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are not necessarily limited to this. One or more protrusions or ridges (ribs) may be erected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F).

In this case, the ribs (for example, the portions formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining the cross-sectional shape of a substantially semicircle or a substantially rectangular shape) are the end face walls in the front view (arrow B direction view). A form extending radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axial center of the peripheral wall portion A271) is preferable. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, even if the key A140 engages with the edge of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the extraction direction (arrow F direction) of the key A140 when the key A140 is pulled out. This is because the rigidity of the ribs can be used to prevent damage to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272.

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape in the front view continuous in the circumferential direction. A plurality of such ridges (ribs) may be arranged at different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). Although the case of being located on the separated side) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and another standing wall A208, A280, A290 may be retracted.

Further, the amount of retreat of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Further, the amount of retreat may change in the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 of 1.

In this case, it is preferable that the amount of retreat of the erecting tip surface from the reference surface is smaller as the erecting wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The area farther from the fastening hole A206a of the printed circuit board A119 is separated from the abutted erection wall when the erection wall is abutted by the amount that the regulation by the screw ASC is weaker than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. The degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened due to deformation (displacement) in the direction in which the printed circuit board A119 is formed. This is because it is possible to easily secure the close contact between the vertical tip surface of the vertical wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the vertical walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the fastening hole A206a (the erection wall A280, the erection wall A290, and the erection wall A208) (in this order). Since the distance from the erection wall A209) becomes longer, the amount of retreat from the above-mentioned reference plane is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erection tip surface of the erection wall A208). The amount of retreat from the reference plane is minimized).

Further, also in each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above may be changed as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erection tip surface of the erection wall A208, A209, A280, A290 of 1 may be configured to be an inclined surface with respect to the front wall portion A201 of the box covers A200, A3200, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode has been described, but the setting value is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of this. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84.

Further, the set value may not be displayed on any of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before the activation, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. The configuration may be such that the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to prevent the set value from being illegally acquired by an illegal means (for example, a means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 by a hidden camera installed in the hall). Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the set value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although the description is omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the center of rotation) is provided, and the inner frame 11 is provided with the inner side. When it is detected by the first detection sensor that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is permitted, and the inner frame 12 has a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the release (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be invalidated). .. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Further, a second detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational position centered on the rotation axis A410) is provided, and the board box A100 is provided with respect to the inner frame 12. When the second detection sensor detects that the A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). The input from A130 is invalidated), and if the opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is made. It may be configured to be acceptable. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are predetermined. When the opening (rotation) beyond the angle is not detected by the second detection sensor, the above-mentioned setting change may be allowed. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch in which the mechanical detection unit is displaced as the machine opens and closes.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main control device A110. That is, at least if the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected). , Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be allowed. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed by the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed by the 7-segment display of the main control device A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. If the predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, it is disconnected regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected, it is disconnected. However, even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, when a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110). It may be configured so that the setting change is prohibited. Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, as a predetermined electrical connection line, a payout control device 111 is exemplified. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being operated illegally and paying out the game ball.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ridge A2273 is extended in a streak shape has been described as a form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at a predetermined interval between the position AP1 including the position AP2 and the position AP5 and the position AP6. Alternatively, the ridge A2273 may be formed intermittently between the position AP1 including the position AP2 to the AP5 and the position AP6.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or a plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the position AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. .. Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 to have a second position (a position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010), FIG. 122 ( Although the case of being arranged in b)) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the board box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrow L, R direction) with respect to the inner frame 12, and slide displacement in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (arrow L direction). By doing so, the rotation axis A410, which is a form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position, is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrows F and B directions) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis is formed. An example is a mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) with the A410 as the center of rotation.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotary shaft A4410 is formed on each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one or both rotary shafts A4410 may be formed. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, a split body of the rotation shaft A4410 is formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300, and the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300. A4410 may be formed.

The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotary shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotary shaft A410 is formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. May be. Further, as in the case described above, one rotation shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 in a state of being connected to the box base A300.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine comprising an action means and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by being acted upon by the action means, and including an auxiliary means configured so that the displacement mode of the displacement means has a plurality of modes. A1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of a liquid crystal display area and has a displacement means that is displaced when a driving device such as a motor is driven (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be complicated by the function of the auxiliary means in which the auxiliary means has a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and it is possible to keep the player's attention in a high state.

The specific examples of the auxiliary means are not limited in any way. For example, a box-shaped space-constructing means that constitutes a space in which the displacement means can be displaced may be used, or the displacement means may be displaced by a drive device different from the acting means and the displacement means may be pushed to change the displacement mode of the displacement means. It may be a means. Further, the driving device of the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the acting means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating means can be configured to have a first state in which the first acting unit can act on the displacement means and a second state in which the second acting unit can act on the displacement means. A2 game machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the part when the acting means acts on the displacement means can be different, so that even if the movement of the acting means at the time of action is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be different.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, the operating means is provided with a contacting means that abuts against the displacement means to apply a load, and is configured to be capable of generating a load in a plurality of types via the abutting means. A3 game machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of loads generated via the abutting means, so that the displacement modes of the displacement means can be set to a plurality of types.

In the game machine A3, the contacting means is configured to be displaceable and is configured to be able to contact the first contacting portion which is configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the first contacting means which is configured to be able to contact the displacement means. A second contact portion different from the portion is provided, and the angle in a predetermined direction between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangent line of the first contact portion) is the above. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is configured to be different from the angle in the predetermined direction view between the displacement direction of the abutting means and the second abutting portion (or the tangent line of the second abutting portion).

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be changed without changing the displacement direction of the contacting means, so that there are a plurality of types of displacements of the displacement means. Can occur in the direction of.

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent line drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and the tangent lines parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement means can be loaded in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means is displaced with less energy loss. Can be made to. As a result, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating means configured to be able to generate a load for displacing the acting means is provided, and the load generating means loads at a position where the displacement means are arranged closer. The gaming machine A6, which is configured to generate the above-mentioned.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the acting means is supported in a support mode that allows a posture change, and the posture change occurs on the side where it is easy to maintain a balance of arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means. A7 game machine featuring the above.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by the posture change of the acting means, so that the overload is locally applied to the acting means. It can be avoided to occur.

The cause of the change in posture of the means of action is not limited at all. For example, it may be generated by the balance of the load from the displacement means, or a drive device for changing the posture of the acting means may be provided. When the posture of the acting means is changed by the balance of the load from the displacement means, it is easy to change the posture of the acting means by providing multiple lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the acting means. It is possible to generate multiple types of displacement.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guiding means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and the guiding means can guide the displacement of the displacement means in one direction. The first guide portion and the second guide portion capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in another direction are provided, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion are surfaces facing the displacement means. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the formation mode of the above is different.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the operating means is configured to be displaceable, and the arrangement of the acting means is configured to change the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means at a position where the balance of the displacement means can be easily maintained. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it can act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

The gaming machine A10, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement means comprises one or more members, which are configured not to be coupled to each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and formed into a mass. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the members.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the posture of the displacement means can be stabilized when the displacement means is arranged in the acting means.

The method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making a hole in the member may be used.

<Changes due to advancing and retreating means that advance and retreat to the displacement range of the displacement means>
An arrangement means configured to be displaceable in a predetermined range and an advancing / retreating means configured to be displaceable in an advancing / retreating direction with respect to the range are provided, and the advancing / retreating means enters the predetermined portion of the range to reach the range. The gaming machine B1 is configured so that the width of the machine can be changed, and the width can be changed in a plurality of types.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine including a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members due to the displacement of the first movable member. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing / retreating means is configured with a plurality of types of changing modes of the width of the range when entering the range, the displacement modes of the arranging means can be configured with a plurality of types. The displacement mode of can be improved.

The mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular effect member formed from a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

Further, the method of configuring the mode of changing the width of the range due to the displacement of the advancing / retreating means by a plurality of types is not limited at all. For example, the approach side portion of the advancing / retreating means may be formed by an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion having a different width to enter the range, or the displacement width of the advancing / retreating means may be changed to change the range. The width of may be variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent entry and exit of the arrangement means, and is configured to be variable, and the advancing / retreating means enters in the unchanged state of the range. The gaming machine B2 is configured to be displaceable in an embodiment, and the box-shaped means is provided with an open portion formed so that the advancing / retreating means can be inserted and the arranging means cannot be inserted.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the advancing / retreating means can enter the range through the open portion, while the displacement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

The arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged in a place where the arrangement means is difficult to reach. In this case, the possibility that the placement means accidentally falls out of the range can be further reduced. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a place where a load from the arrangement means is unlikely to occur (for example, the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent the load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing / retreating means during the displacement, obstructing the displacement of the advancing / retreating means, or causing a defect in the advancing / retreating means or the arranging means.

2.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make the player appear as if the arranging means is guided in different directions by the same advancing / retreating means. As a result, the types of effects can be increased, so that the effect of effects using the arrangement means and the advancing / retreating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancing / retreating means is configured such that the gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range is shorter than the width length of the arranging means in the state of entering the range. A gaming machine B4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even when the arranging means is arranged on the side far from the advancing / retreating means, the advancing / retreating means is used as the arranging means in the entered state. Can act.

In addition, it may be configured so that there is no gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range. Further, it may be configured so that there is a gap in a part and there is no gap in the other part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing / retreating means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the approach side, the representative tip portion farthest from the axis is said. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gap between the range and the range is minimized.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion, which tends to have the largest misalignment from the axis, first enters the range so as to enter the range from the axis. It is possible to deal with misalignment at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce the resistance of subsequent approach movements.

The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined overhanging portion, and is formed so as to incline toward the side retreating from the range as the distance from the overhanging portion is along the axial direction. Pachinko machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the arranging means can be displaced so as to be away from a predetermined overhanging portion in the approaching process of the advancing / retreating means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion in the axial direction.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing / retreating means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion. It is possible to secure the placement location of.

Various aspects are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is opened. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is opened before the advancing / retreating means enters, or the shape may be such that the range side is opened when the advancing / retreating means has entered.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a driving means capable of generating a driving force and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the advancing / retreating means are provided, and the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means are provided. The driving force is transmitted by abutting, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means can be changed, and the contact area is the entry of the advancing / retreating means into the range. The gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured to be maximum at the initial stage and then decrease.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry where a large load is likely to occur when the advancing / retreating means starts to come into contact with the arranging means. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load applied per unit area of the contact surface. Thereby, the durability of the advancing / retreating means and the transmitting means can be improved.

The mode of the advancing / retreating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means of displacing outside the game area or a means of displacing inside the game area.

<Synchronously operate the two members with the transmission cam>
The transmission means includes a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or a plurality of members, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means. The first transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first target portion of the displacement means in the first aspect, and the displacement means in the second aspect different from the first aspect. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a second transmission unit configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second target unit.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is a drive device used for displacement of the displacement means, and includes a first drive device for moving the displacement means up and down and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-20210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the first drive device and the second drive device are synchronized and the plurality of displacement means are displaced in order to execute the operation effect of the displacement means, the drive timing is deviated. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be ruled out and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a first transmission unit and a second transmission unit are arranged in the transmission means, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. Since it is configured, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

The time when the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneously transmitted) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, it is preferable to arrange the driving force so that at least a part of the driving force is generated in the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to utilize its own weight for driving force transmission.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first target portion and the driving force transmission to the second target portion are configured to occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by suppressing the maximum value of the driving resistance to a low value.

Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force, or as a load transmission generated by the displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Is also good.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The displacement locus is configured to partially intersect, and the first member is configured to be able to abut on the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the abutted state, the first member is interposed via the first member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that a driving force can be transmitted to a second member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, a case where the driving force is directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member can be configured.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member can be retracted to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to prevent the first member being displaced from coming into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs in a state where the first member arrives at a predetermined arrangement and is stopped, so that the mode of transmitting the driving force to the second member can be smoothly switched. Can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. It is possible to avoid unintended collisions or contacts of each member.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the second member is provided with an urging means configured to be able to urge the second member in a predetermined direction, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction that opposes the urging force. A gaming machine C6, wherein the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined direction with the second member arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to form a timing in which the second member is displaced against the urging force and a timing in which the second member is fastened against the urging force due to the displacement of the transmission means.

In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is configured such that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmitting portion of the transmission means is displaced toward the predetermined direction side. ..

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, a part of the load required for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the urging force can be used as an auxiliary.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission unit can form a non-contact state that is non-contact with the second member, and in the non-contact state, the displacement of the second member. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so as not to interfere with the second transmission unit.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member is a displacement state pushed by the second transmission unit and a displacement state separated from the second transmission unit. And can be configured.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from the contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means to be in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulatory section that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmitting means via the first member is blocked by the regulating unit to reach the driving means. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

The mode of the regulatory unit is not limited in any way. For example, a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to the slide displacement by restricting the displacement may be used, or a shaft branch portion that limits the displacement to the rotational displacement may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives a first state of being displaced or stopped by receiving the driving force of the driving means, and a load from the second target portion. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the state can be changed in the second state of being displaced or stopped.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<The load transmission is cut off by limiting the generation of the load when it is far away>
A gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, and a contact with the displacement means. A first means configured to be able to change the state between a state and a non-contact state that is non-contact with the displacement means is provided, and an object for transmitting a load given from the outside to the first means is switchably configured. The gaming machine D1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine in which a displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by the driving force of the driving means can come into contact with another movable body at the displacement end position (upper end position) and receive a load. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacement means, and the state of the driving means by control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) and Since there is a possibility that the state of the driving means may differ from the actual state, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

Further, it is conceivable that the operating resistance of the drive means may be unstablely increased or decreased due to the load applied to the drive means, and the deterioration of the drive means may be accelerated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, so that the drive state of the drive means can be stabilized. Further, by suppressing the unstable increase / decrease in the operating resistance of the drive means, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

The method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed at the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means (for example, the first means receives an external force) that causes the load may be the displacement of the first means. It may be configured to occur only in the non-contact state.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side in the gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face the opposite side.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an arrangement means that is arranged so as to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured so that the transmission means and the displacement means occur in a non-contact state. A gaming machine D3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-contact state of the transmitting means and the displacement means, so that the load transmission is performed between the transmitting means and the displacement means. It can be blocked.

The collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means or may occur in the non-contact state. When the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be blocked, so that the arrangement of the transmission means (presence or absence of contact between the transmission means and the displacement means) ), The load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load generated by the contact (the contact portion). The gaming machine D4 is characterized by being flexibly configured to the extent that it can be deformed.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be abuttable, and the second means of at least one of the first means or the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the contact portion is formed of a shock-absorbable material.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is provided with an urging means for urging the displacement means, and the standby position of the displacement means is set at the end of the displacement range in the urging direction of the urging means. The gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to prevent the standby position of the displacement means (the position waiting for the load generation from the transmission means) from shifting. 1 It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the means and the displacement means are separated from each other. Thereby, the driving means can be easily and appropriately controlled.

Further, by reducing the degree of freedom in arranging the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to prevent the first means and the displacement means from inadvertently coming into contact with each other.

A gaming machine D7, wherein in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the first means is allowed to change its posture due to a collision of the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging means can be used to change the posture of the first means, so that the load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the urging force of the urging means. The urging state to be received and the transmission means are in contact with the displacement means, and the displacement means is displaced to the opposite side in the direction of the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the state can be changed between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the means is invalid and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6 or D7, a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease of posture change with respect to a collision of the arranging means) can be configured.

<Conditionally regulate one of the forward and reverse rotations>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable by a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point at which the displacement mode changes, and there are a plurality of types from the reference position. The gaming machine E1 is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the above-described embodiment.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable accessory to perform different operations in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, different operations correspond to the presence or absence of switching of the drive direction of the drive device, so that the type of effect can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the effect to be executed from now on. Since the player can predict about the above, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the effect to be executed from now on by the discriminating involvement means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, different effects may be produced in which the displacement means is displaced between the correct effect and the displacement effect. In this case, if the displacement means of the displacement means is displaced to a predetermined position in the same manner, the displacement from the predetermined position occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated), and it is possible to know whether or not the displacement means is correct. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the displacement is correct even if the displacement occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The gaming machine E1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force for displacement of the displacement means and a regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means, and the driving means generates the driving force in the regulating means. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a non-existent state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be muted when the displacement means is regulated. It can be difficult to determine whether it is in the opposite direction.

Further, unlike the case where the driving force continues to generate the driving force when the effect for a long time (long reach or the like) is executed with the displacement of the displacement means regulated, it is possible to suppress the heat generation of the driving means.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the regulating means is displaced to a position where the displacement means can be acted upon by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of arranged driving means can be reduced as compared with the case where the driving means for driving the regulating means is separately provided.

A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is provided with a discrimination-involvement means configured to have a section in which it is difficult to determine which aspect of the plurality of modes is displaced. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to configure the discriminating means so that it is difficult to discriminate the displacement mode of the displacement means in the predetermined section. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of displacement of the displacement means up to now, which is difficult to determine the displacement mode, as compared with the case where the displacement mode is difficult to discriminate only in.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section of the gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. This makes it possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being discovered from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the drive means before notifying the result.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detecting means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means is provided, and the detecting means determines the switching of the feasible displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. The gaming machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used in combination, so that the detection sensor can be used. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<A sense of unity of multiple members>
In a gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are displaceable, the mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. The gaming machine F1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the first member and the second member, which are configured to be displaceable, to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacements of the first member and the second member occur on the same straight line, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member will revert after contacting each other depending on the speeds close to each other. Yes, it can look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different. For example, the displacement modes of the first member and the second member are not set to be close to each other on the same straight line, but the directions of the first member and the second member are changed so as to approach each other after the proximity on another straight line. It is possible to avoid reversion and facilitate the maintenance of the effect mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for abutting each other, and the first member and the second member The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the postures in the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the gaming machine F1 or F2 includes a load generating means capable of generating a load toward the side that maintains the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a certain direction or a load having a certain size. For example, when the load that is easily received (for example, an effect mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (for example, the gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Further, it is not necessary that the load generated by the load generating means is always generated. For example, the generation of the load and the elimination of the load may be switched according to the change of the above-mentioned situation. The load generating means may be an external one.

The gaming machine F3 includes a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is the displacement. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being integrally configured with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be appropriately maintained, and the timing is deviated. It is possible to prevent the load from being generated.

Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least a part of the first member comes into contact with the second member.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily execute an effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than a predetermined state.

A gaming machine F7, wherein in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate a load at a plurality of places with respect to the first member or the second member.

According to the gaming machine F7, in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of places, the load is not limited to the maintenance of the state with respect to the displacement in one direction. , It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against a change in posture. As a result, even when the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid conspicuous misalignment.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded portions are the first loaded portion and the first loaded portion thereof. A second loaded portion having a larger displacement with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion is provided, and the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be gradually applied to the first member or the second member. Further, the roles of the loads given to the first loaded portion and the second loaded portion can be separated. For example, the first loaded portion can be used in the role of arranging the first loaded portion at a predetermined position, and the second loaded portion can be used in the role of adjusting the posture.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, in the load generating means, the portion that applies a load toward the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is the first member as compared with the other parts. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the pick-up length of the facing surface facing the second member is formed to be long.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the hanging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, for the other portion, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved, and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the gaming machine F10 is characterized in that the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other. ..

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load generated in the assembling work. That is, since it is easier to avoid load transmission between the first member and the second member as compared with the case of assembling in the contact state, it is possible to assemble the first member and the second member without any loss. can.

As a result, the contact surface as designed can be provided on the first member and the second member, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a misalignment is likely to occur due to a load by the load generating means such as when a gap is generated. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling states of displacement means>
The gaming machine G0 includes a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, and the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to enable a displacement composed of a change in arrangement and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means arranged at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, the posture of the displacement means is due to the need to provide a gap to secure the displacement. There was a problem that the countermeasures against the change were not sufficient and there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the posture change of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. As a result, even when the space where the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid a collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting may be performed with a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, etc.) as the axis, or horizontal swing may be performed with the straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.) as the axis.

The gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the acting force for suppressing a posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means can be changed according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the space for arranging the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the effect of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means reciprocates, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, when the displacement means itself is displaced by expansion / contraction or rotational displacement due to the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse, so that the driving force generation position. By increasing the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine G0 or G1, the gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to support the displacement means by a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0 or G1, the displacement means is supported by a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, so that the displacement means is prevented from tilting. It can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the operating means includes an auxiliary supporting means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main supporting means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the displacement means is supported by three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line by the main support means and the auxiliary support means. Posture changes can be suppressed in all directions.

In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means also functions as a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding the displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that the area in a predetermined direction is increased or decreased, and the acting means is configured so that the acting force generation position is maximized at the displacement end position of the displacement means. The gaming machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , The change in posture of the displacement means can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement. Therefore, if the position where the acting force is generated is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases. , The problem that the drive device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by configuring the position other than the displacement end position to reduce the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to prevent the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid increasing the size of the drive device.

<Wiring guidance for propeller unit>
The displacement means, the electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and the electric wiring displacement means configured to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring are provided, and the displacement means is the predetermined portion of the electrical wiring displacement means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is configured to be displaceable on the side avoiding the displacement means when the displacement is made toward the side approaching.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member linked to the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). See publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring for the purpose of avoiding contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, and it is more difficult than the displacement termination of the displacement means. Since a space for arranging the electric wiring is required on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the predetermined portion of the electric wiring can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacement means by the electric wiring displacement means, the contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring is positive. Since it can be avoided, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

It should be noted that the case where the displacement means approaches a predetermined portion is not limited in any way. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there may be a risk of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be closer than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least the first direction and the second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in the first direction and the third direction orthogonal to the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid that the displacement amount of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction is limited to the electric wiring.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set to be in the direction along the predetermined directional view. The effect on the appearance can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the stopping means for stopping the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion is provided, and the electric wiring displacement means is the said. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured so as to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

The configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the stopping means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

In the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means, the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. As a result, the capacity of the electrical wiring of the stopping means can be increased, so that the displacement amount of the displacement means that compensates for the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement means is integrally configured with the displacement means, and includes a corresponding changing means for changing the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. The gaming machine H6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the corresponding changing means.

<Flower path of a sphere through which an electric chew is passed>
A game area and a flow-down means for flowing down a game ball discharged from the game area are provided, and the flow-down means is characterized by including a section configured so that the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. Pachinko machine I0.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the base plate constituting the gaming area is formed of plywood (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate and the player cannot visually recognize the gaming ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if he / she does not pay attention to the discharge timing, he / she may suddenly get the impression that the game ball has disappeared from the game area.

In addition, even if attention is paid to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning opening and the out opening are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out opening, the winning opening is used. It may be mistaken for a ball that has entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility of distrust that the prize ball is not paid out. That is, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming ball from the gaming area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the flow-down means is configured to include a section in which the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area can be visually recognized, so that the player visually observes the gaming ball flowing down in the section. This makes it possible to confirm how the gaming balls are arranged from the gaming area. This makes it possible to improve the discharge of the game ball from the game area.

The discharge of the game ball from the game area means the whole aspect in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through the prize ball opening, or may be discharged through the out port without the prize ball.

In the game machine I0, a game ball that has flowed down the game area is arranged so as to be able to pass through, and a profit-giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball is provided. The means are arranged above the profit-giving means and on the downstream side of the first component, which is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side approaching the profit-giving means, and the profit. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a second component portion configured to be able to guide the gaming ball to a side away from the profit-giving means on the upper side of the granting means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flowing means, the player can grasp how the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area, and at the same time, the player can grasp it. It is possible to prevent the gaming ball from approaching the lower profit-giving means. As a result, the game ball that has already been discharged from the game area and the game ball that is still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit-giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. You can try to do it.

The predetermined profit is not limited in any way. For example, the prize ball may be paid out, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol and the second symbol may be performed, or other profits may be used.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1, the attention means formed inside the gaming area and the frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means are provided, and the flow-down means has the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to flow down to the inward side of the means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing means allows the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player paying attention to the means of interest. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the means of interest, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has been discharged from the game area.

The means of interest is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means in which a pattern is variablely displayed, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a drive means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

In the game machine I2, the flow-down means is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to extend the period in which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the means of interest.

<Ingenuity around the board design and light guide plate>
The predetermined substrate is provided with a predetermined substrate provided with light emitting means and the placed means arranged on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction view, and the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined direction view. The gaming machine J0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light emitting means is arranged so as to be smaller than the visible area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated board having a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a game area on the front surface, and the plate surface of the illuminated board and the plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There are gaming machines in which the LEDs are arranged substantially in parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the area of the illuminated substrate that can be visually recognized in the front view is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate is irradiated with the LED light, the visible area is illuminated. There is a possibility that the decorative board may enter and the decorative member and the illuminated board may be visually recognized as overlapping in the front and back.

Only the configurations necessary for functions such as circuits and resistors are arranged on the surface of the illuminated circuit board, and the design is not usually high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illuminated board overlap each other and are visually recognized, the appearance is poor and the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the effect of the predetermined substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, since the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light, at least the predetermined substrate is predetermined. It is possible to form an area where only light can be visually recognized without overlapping with the substrate. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the predetermined substrate.

The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited in any way. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding it, or the visible area may not be visible by being totally shielded.

The optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be oriented in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be oriented in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. It may be something that can be done.

The light transmission of the arrangement means is not limited in any way. For example, the light transmission may be configured to be good, the light transmission may be configured to be low, or the degree of light transmission may be changed for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means is provided on both sides of the predetermined substrate and includes a plurality of direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, and is between the plurality of direction changing means. In addition, a low transmittance means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means is arranged, and the predetermined substrate is characterized in that at least a part thereof is arranged inside the low transmission means in a predetermined direction view. The gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. This makes it possible to narrow the visible range of the predetermined substrate.

The means for changing the direction is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a drive device, a game area or a flow path through which a game ball flows, a case member or a decorative member to be fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

In the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion constituting the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means can be mixed with the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The shape of a predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, or it may be a bone that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the outer peripheral portion of rotation. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, the title logo).

A gaming machine J3, wherein in any of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the predetermined substrate is arranged with the end face of the plate facing in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, the area of a predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction can be minimized.

The gaming machine J3 includes a display means for executing a display effect that can be visually recognized in a predetermined direction, and a gaming area arranged in front of the display means. The predetermined board includes a display area of the display means and the display area. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a gaming area in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined board at the boundary, light is emitted from the back surface of the gaming area to the front side, and unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board is used. It is possible to perform an effect of irradiating light on the pachinko machine or an effect of irradiating only the game area side with light.

In the gaming machine J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board constituting the gaming area on the front side.

According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the gaming board, for example, the light emitting means is arranged as compared with the case where the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the rear case where the movable accessory or the like is arranged. The degree of freedom can be improved.

Further, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the rear case through the back surface of the game board, the rear case side can be visually recognized from the window portion of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see the back of the game board without looking around in a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the electrical wiring.

Further, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the rear case, the space for arranging the predetermined board is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If there is, a predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of accessories at the time of shipment>
A displacement means and a limiting means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limiting means includes a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. The gaming machine K1 is configured to be state-changeable, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fixing and releasing the arrangement of the displacement means.

That is, while the gaming machine is configured to be able to operate normally after it is installed, the movable accessory can be fixed even in situations where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a measure to fix the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the cushioning material is suppressed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, in the case of a configuration in which the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the limiting means, so that the arrangement and the release of the displacement means can be improved.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is removed, since the limiting means is not removed, it is difficult to continue the game if the state is easily changed by an external force that may occur during the game. On the other hand, by configuring the limiting means to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect during the game.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be capable of changing the state between the first state and the second state when the power is off.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. This makes it possible to prevent the worker from becoming difficult in the power failure state and the recovery work from the power failure state.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes an urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is such that the operating portion is displaced by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operation unit is configured to change its state in accordance with the above, and the operating unit can be displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state, the operation unit is displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a separated position away from the ground.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at a position away from the reference position in the second state, it is given to the gaming machine after installation such as opening and closing the door. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiting means from occurring due to the external force that can be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing the state from the second state.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means constituting the displaceable region of the gaming machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit is arranged outside the area forming means, so that even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operating means. It is possible to prevent the displacement means from coming into contact with the operator.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, an urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means has a predetermined amount from the reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The limiting means is configured to change state with displacement, the limiting means includes a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the operating unit in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to secure a displacement allowable width (posture change width) of a portion.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the displacement of the operating means is configured to be possible in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction, so that the direction is directed toward the operating unit. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent the operation unit from being displaced in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation unit from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing its state due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating portion includes an engaging portion configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the urging means is arranged at the center of the operating portion, and the engaging portion is the operation. A gaming machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the section.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced with the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change from occurring by merely performing (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to an external force such as opening and closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipment, or the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back surface side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable by the support shafts on the left and right position sides, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shafts. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the clerk of the gaming hall opens the front door. It is possible to facilitate the operation when operating the control means. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width becomes large (opposite the support shaft), so that the operating position of the limiting means can be set to the front side.

In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area forming means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, the limiting means are arranged on the support shaft side, so that the operator who works with the front door open prevents accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

In addition, since the load applied to the limiting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced as compared with the case where it is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft, the limiting means is in a state due to the impact caused by the opening and closing of the front door. It can be prevented from changing.

A gaming machine K9 in any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, wherein in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the limiting means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the limiting means acts on the displacement means with the displacement guiding accuracy of the limiting means alone lowered. Can be improved.

The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that, when any of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is energized in the first state, the gaming machine K10 is provided with a preventive notification means for notifying the continuation of the energized state.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notifying means can notify the state of the limiting means to be switched from the first state.

The mode of notification is not limited in any way. For example, an error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, a notification sound may be output by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting means may be illuminated (or maintained in an extinguished state). You may notify by.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object includes an operating means disposed on the object and operably formed, and the accommodating body is formed with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means. The gaming machine L0 characterized by this.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the control board is provided with the operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

According to the gaming machine L0, an operating means arranged on an object and formed to be operable is provided, and an opening is formed in the accommodating body at a position corresponding to the operating means, so that the operating means can be provided through the opening. Can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the housing when operating the operating means. Therefore, the time and effort can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covered portions A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes an facing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes an facing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and being displaced by the operator, and the facing portion is at least in a range excluding the displacement locus of the operator on the first surface of the operating means. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is disposed so as to face a part thereof.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the facing portion is arranged so as to face at least a part of the first surface of the actuator except for the displacement locus of the actuator. , Foreign matter such as wire can be sent from the opening to the inside of the housing by the amount that the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator. It can be suppressed from being inserted.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which a base end is fixed and one end is free.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, so that the shape is simplified and the formability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that a protrusion is provided on the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, a protrusion is provided on the facing portion, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be increased and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

The protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

In the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion is projected from a surface of the facing portion on the side facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M4, the protrusion is projected from the surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, so that the facing portion and the operating means first. The gap between the surface and the surface can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing through the gap.

In the gaming machine M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means. By eliminating the gap between them, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

Further, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the facing portion is pushed in the insertion direction by the operating element when the actuator is inserted into the operating means, the facing portion in the insertion direction. Can be suppressed from being deformed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side of the facing portion from being damaged.

Since the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, the elastic deformation of the facing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusions are in contact with each other. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire).

A gaming machine M7, wherein in any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by inserting and displaceting an operator, and the facing portion has an edge portion abutting on the operating operator inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator laterally or carelessly opens and closes the member on which the housing is arranged. When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the portion connected to the object) becomes large. Further, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the actuator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operating means (the portion connected to the object) is large. Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. The operator (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) can be brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion to suppress tilting or excessive displacement of the actuator. As a result, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that a gap between the operating means and the covering portion is provided. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

Here, when the operating means is operated by inserting and displacementing the operator, when the operator inserted in the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly prepares the operator). When the operator is operated laterally or the member on which the housing is arranged is inadvertently opened and closed and the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also tilted and operated. The load on the root of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

The gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the outer shape of the operating means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion, so that the base end side of the operating means The gap between the and the covering can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the covering portion or the other of the operating means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the coverings or operating means comprises a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the coverings or operating means. Since the receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M11, the gaming machine M12 is characterized in that the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M12, the gaming machine M13 is characterized in that the accommodating body is erected from an inner surface thereof and includes a erection wall in which the erection tip abuts on the object.

According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M1 to M12, the accommodating body includes a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through an opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means. The gaming machine M14.

According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M13, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the path for entering the inside of the housing can be blocked. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and a surface for connecting the electronic components to the circuit of the control board by soldering is a side on which the operating means is arranged. Is a gaming machine M15 characterized in that it is set on the opposite surface.

According to the game machine M15, in addition to the effect of the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit of the control board by soldering is an operating means. Since it is set on the surface opposite to the side on which the solder is placed, it is easy to bring the erecting tip of the erecting wall into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the erecting wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the erecting wall can be reliably functioned as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts, and foreign matter such as a wire can be suppressed from being inserted into the inside of the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erection wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced.

According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erection wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced, so that the erection wall is brought into contact with the object. It is possible to increase the surface pressure at the standing tip to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted between the object and the standing tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M16, the erection tip of the erection wall is characterized in that the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing while improving the moldability. That is, by using a tapered surface, the shape change can be made gentle and the fluidity of the resin in the molding die can be ensured. On the other hand, when the erecting tip of the erecting wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be difficult to pass between the erection wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the accommodating body is formed with an outer surface on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is projected from two regions.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the housing is one from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion is projected from the second region, the protrusion height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the region covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the region that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and the region that abuts on the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing and the prevention of the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, and the opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the housing to reach the opening. The method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the accommodating body, the tip of the foreign substance such as the wire is brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion, and further. Can stop the progress of. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that regulates the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate box A100 (standing wall A280, A290) as an example>
The gaming machine L0 is characterized in that the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and the housing is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the operating means or the outer surface of the operating element. Gaming machine N1 to play.

Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator laterally or carelessly opens and closes the member on which the housing is arranged. , When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the accommodating body is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operator. It can be received and the displacement of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the housing is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object.

Here, if the accommodating body is configured to receive the displaced (tilted) operating means, the accommodating body may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the accommodating body is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object. Supports and can suppress deformation of the housing. As a result, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

At the same time, the support of the erecting wall suppresses the deformation of the housing, so that the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the erection wall can be tilted in any direction of the operating means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

In addition, the erect wall can block the route for entering the inside of the housing. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N3, the erection wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the accommodating body on which the erection wall is erected.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the erecting wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the accommodating body on which the erecting wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the accommodating body is increased. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the erection wall by utilizing the above, and it is possible to increase the rigidity of the entire housing by connecting the inner surfaces to each other. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) of the standing wall that suppresses the deformation of the housing when the operating means is tilted. As a result, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5, wherein in any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, the tilt of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes a ridge projecting from the outer surface thereof and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge is said. A gaming machine N6 characterized by being connected to a covering portion.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, and the housing is provided with a protrusion protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge can function as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means and the damage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, since the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the region covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the region that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and the region that abuts on the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing and the prevention of the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N6, the housing is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the accommodating body is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge. Therefore, the function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit can also be used for the ridge. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the operating means is operated by the operator being inserted into the first surface and displaced, and the accommodating means is operated. The body is provided with an facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body is an opposed portion facing the first surface of the operating body. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing.

Further, since the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means, the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) is placed on the edge of the facing portion. By contacting the portion, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operator. As a result, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is arranged so as to face at least a part of a range excluding the displacement locus of the operator in the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is arranged in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement locus of the operator in the first surface of the operator. Foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing by the amount that the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator. It can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to increase the area of the facing portion that abuts on the displaced operator so that excessive displacement of the operator (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be easily suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to the first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. The gaming machine N10 is characterized in that the child and the facing portion are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is the first position. The gaming machine N11 is characterized in that the operator and the facing portion displaced at two positions are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effect of the game machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion. Since the position to be moved is the position where the operator displaced to the first position or the second position and the facing portion come into contact with each other, the operator displaced to the first position or the second position hits the facing portion. It is possible to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other by using the ridges.

<About the concept of the invention using the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall portion A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the accommodating body has an outer surface formed on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. The gaming machine O1 characterized in that

Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the housing when operating the operating means. Therefore, the time and effort can be suppressed. However, there is a risk of fraudulent insertion of foreign matter such as wire through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the accommodating body has an outer surface formed on one side from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region is formed. Since the opening is formed in, the opening can be arranged at a position deep from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and a step (connecting surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This makes it possible to increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraud.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region. O2.

Here, the housing (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board). On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, the operability deteriorates. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily secure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing. .. However, when operating the operating means, the hand of the operator (operator) interferes with the step (connecting surface) between the first region and the second region, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a risk that the operability when operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region. In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second region can be expanded by the amount of the downward inclination, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine O2, the second region is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to one direction, and the operating means is operated. The gaming machine O3 is operated by inserting and displaces the child, and the posture of the operator when it is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is set to a posture along the other direction. ..

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the second region is a region having a substantially rectangular front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displaceting the operator, and the posture of the operator when it is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is set to be a posture along the other direction. A space can be secured on the side where the gripping surfaces face each other with the surface for gripping the child oriented in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the operator is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the finger holding the operator from interfering with the accommodating body. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is from the first region to the second. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is tilted downward toward an area.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is the second. Since it is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to prevent a finger different from the grasped finger from interfering with the container when the operator is gripped and displaced. For example, when the operator is gripped with the index finger and the thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region can be obtained. It can be secured as a space for moving the little finger side, and interference between the little finger side and the housing can be suppressed. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, so that the connection surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction is used for operation. The means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress interference with other members during manufacturing and prevent damage to the operating means. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening and prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing.

Further, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded by that amount, that is, in order to cope with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the enclosure can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. A gaming machine O6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connecting surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and a connecting surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped and operated (inserted into the operating means, pulled out from the operating means, or displaced (for example, rotation) of the operator), the grasped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) are used. The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing the fingers different from the above. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surface is the first. A gaming machine O7 characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to a region and the second region.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the like. Since the connection surface of the above is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, the accommodating body for dealing with heat dissipation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of inclining the connection surface downward. The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the volume of the internal space of the accommodating body by inclining the connecting surface downward.

In the game machine O4 or O5, a base body on which the accommodating body is arranged and a rotation axis that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotation axis. It is characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Game machine O8 to play.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effect of the game machine O4 or O5, a base body on which the accommodating body is arranged and a rotation axis that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is provided. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotation axis and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when operating the operating means in the space formed by rotating the base body around the axis of rotation, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing the operator's (operator) hand to access the operating means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, comprising a display device arranged in a gaming area and an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, the present invention relates to the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, a display device arranged in the game area and an operating means arranged in an object and formed to be operable are provided, and information on the operation of the operating means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operating state of the operating means based on the display of the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine P1, the housing is formed so as to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the accommodating body is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), so that the operability can be improved and the operation error can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state where the operating means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the accommodating body can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the accommodating body is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time. P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, the housing can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display of the display device. As a result, improvement of operability and suppression of operation mistakes can be achieved more reliably.

In the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operating means is arranged on a side farther from the pivotally supported position than the center of the housing.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the accommodating body is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operating means is arranged on the side farther from the axially supported position than the center of the accommodating body. In a state where the housing is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time, the operating means is positioned farther from the outer edge of the game machine main body. Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means are composed of a plurality of the operating means, and the second operating means having a higher operation frequency than the first operating means is on the side farther from the position where the axis is supported than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5, characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the operating means are composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means having a higher operation frequency than the first operating means is more than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the position where it is supported by the shaft, the operating means (first operating means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body when operating the operating means (first operating means) having a high operation frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, the gaming machine is provided with an operating means arranged and operably formed on the object, and one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that the operable or non-operability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the object.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in whether or not the operating means can be operated. That is, if the operation is allowed regardless of the connection state of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operating means may be easily operated illegally, while the connection of one or more electrical connection lines. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, the workability of the work associated with the operation of the operating means may be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, an operating means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operating means is changed according to the state, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable in the gaming machine Q1.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the accommodating body can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in a state where the operating means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when the accommodating body is displaced, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so that the operationability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in controlling fraud and improving workability.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connecting line among the electrical connecting lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if the other electrical connection lines are disconnected (pulled out) from the object, the operating means By allowing the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the containment body is formed to be displaceable, other electrical connection lines released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the containment body (that is, arrange it in an easy-to-operate manner) are attached to the accommodation body. After the displacement, for example, in order to allow the operation of the operating means, an extension wire is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection wire, and the other electrical connection wire released (pulled out) is provided. You can avoid the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connecting lines is disconnected from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections). Since the operation of the operating means is prohibited (unless the wire is connected to the object), it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated illegally.

In the configuration in which the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the accommodating body (that is, arrange it in an easy-to-operate manner) is attached to the accommodating body. After the displacement, for example, if an extension wire is interposed between the object and another electrical connection wire, and the other electrical connection wire that has been released (pulled out) is reconnected to the object, the operation can be performed. Since the operation of the means can be allowed, the work by the operation of the operation means is possible. <About the concept of the invention using the board boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, the accommodating machine is provided with an operating means arranged and operably formed on the object, and the accommodating body is formed displaceably and is arranged at the time of a game. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operating means can be easily operated rather than a position.

A gaming machine provided with a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the gaming machine R1, the operating body is provided with an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, and the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position arranged at the time of the game. Since it can be displaced to a position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably pivotally supported, and the housing is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion as a rotation center.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the accommodating body is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion as the rotation center, so that the accommodating body is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine R3, wherein in the gaming machine R1 or R2, another member faces the operating means at a position where the accommodating body is arranged at the time of the game.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the housing is arranged at the time of the game, another member is faced with the operating means, so that the operating means is illegally operated. It can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operator, and in a state where the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the other member, whereby the operator is said to be in contact with the other member. The gaming machine R4, characterized in that the accommodating body cannot be displaced to a position where it is arranged during the game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacementing the operator, and when the operator is inserted, the operator hits another member. By being in contact with the container, it is impossible to displace the housing to the position where it is arranged during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from forgetting to remove it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being used illegally.

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 In any of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 A gaming machine X2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 In any of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine X3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
There is a gaming machine in which the base plate constituting the gaming area is composed of plywood (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming ball from the gaming area. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the discharge of gaming balls from the gaming area.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a gaming area and a flow-down means for flowing down a game ball discharged from the gaming area, and the flow-down means is discharged from the gaming area. A section is provided so that the game ball can be visually recognized.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the game area can pass through the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the passage of the game ball. The first component unit is provided with a profit-giving means configured to be grantable, and the flow-down means is configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side closer to the profit-giving means above the profit-giving means, and a first component thereof. It is provided with a second component which is arranged on the downstream side of the first component and is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side away from the profit-giving means on the upper side of the profit-giving means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, in which the attention means formed inside the gaming area and the frame arranged around the attention means in a frame shape. The flow-down means is configured to flow down the game ball inward of the frame means in front view.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the discharge of the gaming ball from the gaming area.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the flow path of the discharged gaming ball can be made appropriate.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the discharged gaming ball can be easily put into the player's field of view.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (part of area construction means)
18 Hinge (part of support shaft)
19 Hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specific winning opening (part of profit-giving means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 Ball flow unit (part of flow means)
152 First receiving channel (1st component, 2nd component)
153 Second receiving flow path member (second component)
154 Protruding part (part of deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of the means of interest)
166 Horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 Decorative means (placed means)
171a Horizontal groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflective shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement control device (restriction means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guiding means)
183 Operation member (operation unit)
183f Engagement part 184 Coil spring (urging means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 Section member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-shaped means)
312 Curved plate part (first guide part)
314 Lower part of the back section (second guide)
315 Deformed penetration (open part)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of placement means)
362 Shaft part (Regulatory part)
410 Linear moving member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protrusion (second contact part)
414 Protruding part (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Cushioning member (second contact part)
430 Abutment member (part of displacement means, first member, regulating means)
432 Protruding part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, discrimination involvement means)
446 Transmission protrusion (first transmission part, contact part)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Closure member (part of action means, contact means, advancing / retreating means)
482 Overhanging part (representative tip part)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Rear case (part of area construction means)
630 Lower arm member (part of the means of action)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 Directing member (displacement means)
730 rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b 1st guided protrusion (1st loaded portion)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a Wall (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electrical wiring DK2b Lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of flow-down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, urging means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Board box (accommodation)
A110 Main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 switch device (operation means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b protrusion (first side)
A130 key device (operation means)
A133b protrusion (reception part)
A133c end (first surface)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (containment body)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposing part)
A211 1st ridge (ridge)
A212 2nd ridge (ridge)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 2nd connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 3rd connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 Opening A260 Opening A270, A2270 Covering part A271 Peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a Base (cover)
A271b Protrusion (bulging part)
A272, A2272 End face wall part (covering part, facing part)
A272a Annulus part (opposing part)
A272b Square part (opposing part)
A2273 ridge (protrusion)
A280, A290 Standing wall A280a, A290a Tapered surface A281, A291 First standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 2nd standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 3rd standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (containment body)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft

Claims (3)

It is equipped with a game area and a flow means for flowing the game ball discharged from the game area.
The flow-down means is a gaming machine characterized by including a section configured so that a gaming ball discharged from the gaming area can be visually recognized. A profit-giving means is provided so that a game ball that has flowed down the game area is arranged so as to be able to pass through, and a predetermined profit can be given to the player based on the passage of the game ball.
The flow-down means includes a first component portion configured to be able to guide the game ball to a side closer to the profit-giving means on the upper side of the profit-giving means.
It is characterized by having a second component which is arranged on the downstream side of the first component and is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side away from the profit-giving means on the upper side of the profit-giving means. The gaming machine according to claim 1. A means of attention formed inward of the game area and a frame means arranged in a frame shape around the means of attention are provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the flowing-down means is configured to allow a gaming ball to flow down toward the inside of the frame means in a front view.

Images